1 /* Optimize by combining instructions for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
20 /* This module is essentially the "combiner" phase of the U. of Arizona
21 Portable Optimizer, but redone to work on our list-structured
22 representation for RTL instead of their string representation.
24 The LOG_LINKS of each insn identify the most recent assignment
25 to each REG used in the insn. It is a list of previous insns,
26 each of which contains a SET for a REG that is used in this insn
27 and not used or set in between. LOG_LINKs never cross basic blocks.
28 They were set up by the preceding pass (lifetime analysis).
30 We try to combine each pair of insns joined by a logical link.
31 We also try to combine triplets of insns A, B and C when C has
32 a link back to B and B has a link back to A. Likewise for a
33 small number of quadruplets of insns A, B, C and D for which
34 there's high likelihood of success.
36 LOG_LINKS does not have links for use of the CC0. They don't
37 need to, because the insn that sets the CC0 is always immediately
38 before the insn that tests it. So we always regard a branch
39 insn as having a logical link to the preceding insn. The same is true
40 for an insn explicitly using CC0.
42 We check (with use_crosses_set_p) to avoid combining in such a way
43 as to move a computation to a place where its value would be different.
45 Combination is done by mathematically substituting the previous
46 insn(s) values for the regs they set into the expressions in
47 the later insns that refer to these regs. If the result is a valid insn
48 for our target machine, according to the machine description,
49 we install it, delete the earlier insns, and update the data flow
50 information (LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES) for what we did.
52 There are a few exceptions where the dataflow information isn't
53 completely updated (however this is only a local issue since it is
54 regenerated before the next pass that uses it):
56 - reg_live_length is not updated
57 - reg_n_refs is not adjusted in the rare case when a register is
58 no longer required in a computation
59 - there are extremely rare cases (see distribute_notes) when a
61 - a LOG_LINKS entry that refers to an insn with multiple SETs may be
62 removed because there is no way to know which register it was
65 To simplify substitution, we combine only when the earlier insn(s)
66 consist of only a single assignment. To simplify updating afterward,
67 we never combine when a subroutine call appears in the middle.
69 Since we do not represent assignments to CC0 explicitly except when that
70 is all an insn does, there is no LOG_LINKS entry in an insn that uses
71 the condition code for the insn that set the condition code.
72 Fortunately, these two insns must be consecutive.
73 Therefore, every JUMP_INSN is taken to have an implicit logical link
74 to the preceding insn. This is not quite right, since non-jumps can
75 also use the condition code; but in practice such insns would not
80 #include "coretypes.h"
95 #include "stor-layout.h"
97 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
98 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
100 #include "insn-attr.h"
101 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
103 #include "tree-pass.h"
104 #include "valtrack.h"
105 #include "rtl-iter.h"
106 #include "print-rtl.h"
108 /* Number of attempts to combine instructions in this function. */
110 static int combine_attempts
;
112 /* Number of attempts that got as far as substitution in this function. */
114 static int combine_merges
;
116 /* Number of instructions combined with added SETs in this function. */
118 static int combine_extras
;
120 /* Number of instructions combined in this function. */
122 static int combine_successes
;
124 /* Totals over entire compilation. */
126 static int total_attempts
, total_merges
, total_extras
, total_successes
;
128 /* combine_instructions may try to replace the right hand side of the
129 second instruction with the value of an associated REG_EQUAL note
130 before throwing it at try_combine. That is problematic when there
131 is a REG_DEAD note for a register used in the old right hand side
132 and can cause distribute_notes to do wrong things. This is the
133 second instruction if it has been so modified, null otherwise. */
135 static rtx_insn
*i2mod
;
137 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the old right hand side. */
139 static rtx i2mod_old_rhs
;
141 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the new right hand side. */
143 static rtx i2mod_new_rhs
;
145 struct reg_stat_type
{
146 /* Record last point of death of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
147 rtx_insn
*last_death
;
149 /* Record last point of modification of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
152 /* The next group of fields allows the recording of the last value assigned
153 to (hard or pseudo) register n. We use this information to see if an
154 operation being processed is redundant given a prior operation performed
155 on the register. For example, an `and' with a constant is redundant if
156 all the zero bits are already known to be turned off.
158 We use an approach similar to that used by cse, but change it in the
161 (1) We do not want to reinitialize at each label.
162 (2) It is useful, but not critical, to know the actual value assigned
163 to a register. Often just its form is helpful.
165 Therefore, we maintain the following fields:
167 last_set_value the last value assigned
168 last_set_label records the value of label_tick when the
169 register was assigned
170 last_set_table_tick records the value of label_tick when a
171 value using the register is assigned
172 last_set_invalid set to nonzero when it is not valid
173 to use the value of this register in some
176 To understand the usage of these tables, it is important to understand
177 the distinction between the value in last_set_value being valid and
178 the register being validly contained in some other expression in the
181 (The next two parameters are out of date).
183 reg_stat[i].last_set_value is valid if it is nonzero, and either
184 reg_n_sets[i] is 1 or reg_stat[i].last_set_label == label_tick.
186 Register I may validly appear in any expression returned for the value
187 of another register if reg_n_sets[i] is 1. It may also appear in the
188 value for register J if reg_stat[j].last_set_invalid is zero, or
189 reg_stat[i].last_set_label < reg_stat[j].last_set_label.
191 If an expression is found in the table containing a register which may
192 not validly appear in an expression, the register is replaced by
193 something that won't match, (clobber (const_int 0)). */
195 /* Record last value assigned to (hard or pseudo) register n. */
199 /* Record the value of label_tick when an expression involving register n
200 is placed in last_set_value. */
202 int last_set_table_tick
;
204 /* Record the value of label_tick when the value for register n is placed in
209 /* These fields are maintained in parallel with last_set_value and are
210 used to store the mode in which the register was last set, the bits
211 that were known to be zero when it was last set, and the number of
212 sign bits copies it was known to have when it was last set. */
214 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT last_set_nonzero_bits
;
215 char last_set_sign_bit_copies
;
216 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode
) last_set_mode
: 8;
218 /* Set nonzero if references to register n in expressions should not be
219 used. last_set_invalid is set nonzero when this register is being
220 assigned to and last_set_table_tick == label_tick. */
222 char last_set_invalid
;
224 /* Some registers that are set more than once and used in more than one
225 basic block are nevertheless always set in similar ways. For example,
226 a QImode register may be loaded from memory in two places on a machine
227 where byte loads zero extend.
229 We record in the following fields if a register has some leading bits
230 that are always equal to the sign bit, and what we know about the
231 nonzero bits of a register, specifically which bits are known to be
234 If an entry is zero, it means that we don't know anything special. */
236 unsigned char sign_bit_copies
;
238 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_bits
;
240 /* Record the value of the label_tick when the last truncation
241 happened. The field truncated_to_mode is only valid if
242 truncation_label == label_tick. */
244 int truncation_label
;
246 /* Record the last truncation seen for this register. If truncation
247 is not a nop to this mode we might be able to save an explicit
248 truncation if we know that value already contains a truncated
251 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode
) truncated_to_mode
: 8;
255 static vec
<reg_stat_type
> reg_stat
;
257 /* One plus the highest pseudo for which we track REG_N_SETS.
258 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs allocates the array for REG_N_SETS just once,
259 but during combine_split_insns new pseudos can be created. As we don't have
260 updated DF information in that case, it is hard to initialize the array
261 after growing. The combiner only cares about REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1,
262 so instead of growing the arrays, just assume all newly created pseudos
263 during combine might be set multiple times. */
265 static unsigned int reg_n_sets_max
;
267 /* Record the luid of the last insn that invalidated memory
268 (anything that writes memory, and subroutine calls, but not pushes). */
270 static int mem_last_set
;
272 /* Record the luid of the last CALL_INSN
273 so we can tell whether a potential combination crosses any calls. */
275 static int last_call_luid
;
277 /* When `subst' is called, this is the insn that is being modified
278 (by combining in a previous insn). The PATTERN of this insn
279 is still the old pattern partially modified and it should not be
280 looked at, but this may be used to examine the successors of the insn
281 to judge whether a simplification is valid. */
283 static rtx_insn
*subst_insn
;
285 /* This is the lowest LUID that `subst' is currently dealing with.
286 get_last_value will not return a value if the register was set at or
287 after this LUID. If not for this mechanism, we could get confused if
288 I2 or I1 in try_combine were an insn that used the old value of a register
289 to obtain a new value. In that case, we might erroneously get the
290 new value of the register when we wanted the old one. */
292 static int subst_low_luid
;
294 /* This contains any hard registers that are used in newpat; reg_dead_at_p
295 must consider all these registers to be always live. */
297 static HARD_REG_SET newpat_used_regs
;
299 /* This is an insn to which a LOG_LINKS entry has been added. If this
300 insn is the earlier than I2 or I3, combine should rescan starting at
303 static rtx_insn
*added_links_insn
;
305 /* Basic block in which we are performing combines. */
306 static basic_block this_basic_block
;
307 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p
;
310 /* Length of the currently allocated uid_insn_cost array. */
312 static int max_uid_known
;
314 /* The following array records the insn_rtx_cost for every insn
315 in the instruction stream. */
317 static int *uid_insn_cost
;
319 /* The following array records the LOG_LINKS for every insn in the
320 instruction stream as struct insn_link pointers. */
325 struct insn_link
*next
;
328 static struct insn_link
**uid_log_links
;
331 insn_uid_check (const_rtx insn
)
333 int uid
= INSN_UID (insn
);
334 gcc_checking_assert (uid
<= max_uid_known
);
338 #define INSN_COST(INSN) (uid_insn_cost[insn_uid_check (INSN)])
339 #define LOG_LINKS(INSN) (uid_log_links[insn_uid_check (INSN)])
341 #define FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK(L, INSN) \
342 for ((L) = LOG_LINKS (INSN); (L); (L) = (L)->next)
344 /* Links for LOG_LINKS are allocated from this obstack. */
346 static struct obstack insn_link_obstack
;
348 /* Allocate a link. */
350 static inline struct insn_link
*
351 alloc_insn_link (rtx_insn
*insn
, unsigned int regno
, struct insn_link
*next
)
354 = (struct insn_link
*) obstack_alloc (&insn_link_obstack
,
355 sizeof (struct insn_link
));
362 /* Incremented for each basic block. */
364 static int label_tick
;
366 /* Reset to label_tick for each extended basic block in scanning order. */
368 static int label_tick_ebb_start
;
370 /* Mode used to compute significance in reg_stat[].nonzero_bits. It is the
371 largest integer mode that can fit in HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
373 static machine_mode nonzero_bits_mode
;
375 /* Nonzero when reg_stat[].nonzero_bits and reg_stat[].sign_bit_copies can
376 be safely used. It is zero while computing them and after combine has
377 completed. This former test prevents propagating values based on
378 previously set values, which can be incorrect if a variable is modified
381 static int nonzero_sign_valid
;
384 /* Record one modification to rtl structure
385 to be undone by storing old_contents into *where. */
387 enum undo_kind
{ UNDO_RTX
, UNDO_INT
, UNDO_MODE
, UNDO_LINKS
};
393 union { rtx r
; int i
; machine_mode m
; struct insn_link
*l
; } old_contents
;
394 union { rtx
*r
; int *i
; struct insn_link
**l
; } where
;
397 /* Record a bunch of changes to be undone, up to MAX_UNDO of them.
398 num_undo says how many are currently recorded.
400 other_insn is nonzero if we have modified some other insn in the process
401 of working on subst_insn. It must be verified too. */
407 rtx_insn
*other_insn
;
410 static struct undobuf undobuf
;
412 /* Number of times the pseudo being substituted for
413 was found and replaced. */
415 static int n_occurrences
;
417 static rtx
reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx
, machine_mode
, const_rtx
,
419 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
420 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*);
421 static rtx
reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx
, machine_mode
, const_rtx
,
423 unsigned int, unsigned int *);
424 static void do_SUBST (rtx
*, rtx
);
425 static void do_SUBST_INT (int *, int);
426 static void init_reg_last (void);
427 static void setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn
*);
428 static void set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx
, const_rtx
, void *);
429 static int cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn
*);
430 static int can_combine_p (rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*,
431 rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx
*, rtx
*);
432 static int combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn
*, rtx
*, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, int, int, rtx
*);
433 static int contains_muldiv (rtx
);
434 static rtx_insn
*try_combine (rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*,
436 static void undo_all (void);
437 static void undo_commit (void);
438 static rtx
*find_split_point (rtx
*, rtx_insn
*, bool);
439 static rtx
subst (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, int, int, int);
440 static rtx
combine_simplify_rtx (rtx
, machine_mode
, int, int);
441 static rtx
simplify_if_then_else (rtx
);
442 static rtx
simplify_set (rtx
);
443 static rtx
simplify_logical (rtx
);
444 static rtx
expand_compound_operation (rtx
);
445 static const_rtx
expand_field_assignment (const_rtx
);
446 static rtx
make_extraction (machine_mode
, rtx
, HOST_WIDE_INT
,
447 rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, int, int, int);
448 static rtx
extract_left_shift (rtx
, int);
449 static int get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
450 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*);
451 static rtx
canon_reg_for_combine (rtx
, rtx
);
452 static rtx
force_to_mode (rtx
, machine_mode
,
453 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, int);
454 static rtx
if_then_else_cond (rtx
, rtx
*, rtx
*);
455 static rtx
known_cond (rtx
, enum rtx_code
, rtx
, rtx
);
456 static int rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx
, rtx
, bool = false);
457 static rtx
make_field_assignment (rtx
);
458 static rtx
apply_distributive_law (rtx
);
459 static rtx
distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx
, int);
460 static rtx
simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode
, rtx
,
461 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
);
462 static rtx
simplify_and_const_int (rtx
, machine_mode
, rtx
,
463 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
);
464 static int merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code
*, HOST_WIDE_INT
*, enum rtx_code
,
465 HOST_WIDE_INT
, machine_mode
, int *);
466 static rtx
simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code
, machine_mode
, rtx
, int);
467 static rtx
simplify_shift_const (rtx
, enum rtx_code
, machine_mode
, rtx
,
469 static int recog_for_combine (rtx
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx
*);
470 static rtx
gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode
, rtx
);
471 static enum rtx_code
simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code
, machine_mode
,
473 static enum rtx_code
simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code
, rtx
*, rtx
*);
474 static void update_table_tick (rtx
);
475 static void record_value_for_reg (rtx
, rtx_insn
*, rtx
);
476 static void check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn
*, rtx
);
477 static void record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx
, const_rtx
, void *);
478 static void record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn
*);
479 static int get_last_value_validate (rtx
*, rtx_insn
*, int, int);
480 static rtx
get_last_value (const_rtx
);
481 static int use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx
, int);
482 static void reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx
, const_rtx
, void *);
483 static int reg_dead_at_p (rtx
, rtx_insn
*);
484 static void move_deaths (rtx
, rtx
, int, rtx_insn
*, rtx
*);
485 static int reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx
, rtx
);
486 static void distribute_notes (rtx
, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
);
487 static void distribute_links (struct insn_link
*);
488 static void mark_used_regs_combine (rtx
);
489 static void record_promoted_value (rtx_insn
*, rtx
);
490 static bool unmentioned_reg_p (rtx
, rtx
);
491 static void record_truncated_values (rtx
*, void *);
492 static bool reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode
, const_rtx
);
493 static rtx
gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode
, rtx
);
496 /* It is not safe to use ordinary gen_lowpart in combine.
497 See comments in gen_lowpart_for_combine. */
498 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
499 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_for_combine
501 /* Our implementation of gen_lowpart never emits a new pseudo. */
502 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT
503 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT gen_lowpart_for_combine
505 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS
506 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine
508 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES
509 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine
511 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE
512 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE reg_truncated_to_mode
514 static const struct rtl_hooks combine_rtl_hooks
= RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER
;
517 /* Convenience wrapper for the canonicalize_comparison target hook.
518 Target hooks cannot use enum rtx_code. */
520 target_canonicalize_comparison (enum rtx_code
*code
, rtx
*op0
, rtx
*op1
,
521 bool op0_preserve_value
)
523 int code_int
= (int)*code
;
524 targetm
.canonicalize_comparison (&code_int
, op0
, op1
, op0_preserve_value
);
525 *code
= (enum rtx_code
)code_int
;
528 /* Try to split PATTERN found in INSN. This returns NULL_RTX if
529 PATTERN can not be split. Otherwise, it returns an insn sequence.
530 This is a wrapper around split_insns which ensures that the
531 reg_stat vector is made larger if the splitter creates a new
535 combine_split_insns (rtx pattern
, rtx_insn
*insn
)
540 ret
= split_insns (pattern
, insn
);
541 nregs
= max_reg_num ();
542 if (nregs
> reg_stat
.length ())
543 reg_stat
.safe_grow_cleared (nregs
);
547 /* This is used by find_single_use to locate an rtx in LOC that
548 contains exactly one use of DEST, which is typically either a REG
549 or CC0. It returns a pointer to the innermost rtx expression
550 containing DEST. Appearances of DEST that are being used to
551 totally replace it are not counted. */
554 find_single_use_1 (rtx dest
, rtx
*loc
)
557 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
573 /* If the destination is anything other than CC0, PC, a REG or a SUBREG
574 of a REG that occupies all of the REG, the insn uses DEST if
575 it is mentioned in the destination or the source. Otherwise, we
576 need just check the source. */
577 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) != CC0
578 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) != PC
579 && !REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
580 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == SUBREG
581 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
)))
582 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
))))
583 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
)
584 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x
)))
585 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
))))
588 return find_single_use_1 (dest
, &SET_SRC (x
));
592 return find_single_use_1 (dest
, &XEXP (x
, 0));
598 /* If it wasn't one of the common cases above, check each expression and
599 vector of this code. Look for a unique usage of DEST. */
601 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
602 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
606 if (dest
== XEXP (x
, i
)
607 || (REG_P (dest
) && REG_P (XEXP (x
, i
))
608 && REGNO (dest
) == REGNO (XEXP (x
, i
))))
611 this_result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &XEXP (x
, i
));
614 result
= this_result
;
615 else if (this_result
)
616 /* Duplicate usage. */
619 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
623 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
625 if (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
) == dest
627 && REG_P (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
))
628 && REGNO (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
)) == REGNO (dest
)))
631 this_result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
634 result
= this_result
;
635 else if (this_result
)
645 /* See if DEST, produced in INSN, is used only a single time in the
646 sequel. If so, return a pointer to the innermost rtx expression in which
649 If PLOC is nonzero, *PLOC is set to the insn containing the single use.
651 If DEST is cc0_rtx, we look only at the next insn. In that case, we don't
652 care about REG_DEAD notes or LOG_LINKS.
654 Otherwise, we find the single use by finding an insn that has a
655 LOG_LINKS pointing at INSN and has a REG_DEAD note for DEST. If DEST is
656 only referenced once in that insn, we know that it must be the first
657 and last insn referencing DEST. */
660 find_single_use (rtx dest
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx_insn
**ploc
)
665 struct insn_link
*link
;
669 next
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
671 || (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (next
) && !JUMP_P (next
)))
674 result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &PATTERN (next
));
683 bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
);
684 for (next
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
685 next
&& BLOCK_FOR_INSN (next
) == bb
;
686 next
= NEXT_INSN (next
))
687 if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (next
) && dead_or_set_p (next
, dest
))
689 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, next
)
690 if (link
->insn
== insn
&& link
->regno
== REGNO (dest
))
695 result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &PATTERN (next
));
705 /* Substitute NEWVAL, an rtx expression, into INTO, a place in some
706 insn. The substitution can be undone by undo_all. If INTO is already
707 set to NEWVAL, do not record this change. Because computing NEWVAL might
708 also call SUBST, we have to compute it before we put anything into
712 do_SUBST (rtx
*into
, rtx newval
)
717 if (oldval
== newval
)
720 /* We'd like to catch as many invalid transformations here as
721 possible. Unfortunately, there are way too many mode changes
722 that are perfectly valid, so we'd waste too much effort for
723 little gain doing the checks here. Focus on catching invalid
724 transformations involving integer constants. */
725 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (oldval
)) == MODE_INT
726 && CONST_INT_P (newval
))
728 /* Sanity check that we're replacing oldval with a CONST_INT
729 that is a valid sign-extension for the original mode. */
730 gcc_assert (INTVAL (newval
)
731 == trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (newval
), GET_MODE (oldval
)));
733 /* Replacing the operand of a SUBREG or a ZERO_EXTEND with a
734 CONST_INT is not valid, because after the replacement, the
735 original mode would be gone. Unfortunately, we can't tell
736 when do_SUBST is called to replace the operand thereof, so we
737 perform this test on oldval instead, checking whether an
738 invalid replacement took place before we got here. */
739 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval
) == SUBREG
740 && CONST_INT_P (SUBREG_REG (oldval
))));
741 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval
) == ZERO_EXTEND
742 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (oldval
, 0))));
746 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
748 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
750 buf
->kind
= UNDO_RTX
;
752 buf
->old_contents
.r
= oldval
;
755 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
758 #define SUBST(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
760 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is an int expression. Note that substitution
761 for the value of a HOST_WIDE_INT value (including CONST_INT) is
765 do_SUBST_INT (int *into
, int newval
)
770 if (oldval
== newval
)
774 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
776 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
778 buf
->kind
= UNDO_INT
;
780 buf
->old_contents
.i
= oldval
;
783 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
786 #define SUBST_INT(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_INT (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
788 /* Similar to SUBST, but just substitute the mode. This is used when
789 changing the mode of a pseudo-register, so that any other
790 references to the entry in the regno_reg_rtx array will change as
794 do_SUBST_MODE (rtx
*into
, machine_mode newval
)
797 machine_mode oldval
= GET_MODE (*into
);
799 if (oldval
== newval
)
803 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
805 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
807 buf
->kind
= UNDO_MODE
;
809 buf
->old_contents
.m
= oldval
;
810 adjust_reg_mode (*into
, newval
);
812 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
815 #define SUBST_MODE(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_MODE (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
817 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is a LOG_LINKS expression. */
820 do_SUBST_LINK (struct insn_link
**into
, struct insn_link
*newval
)
823 struct insn_link
* oldval
= *into
;
825 if (oldval
== newval
)
829 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
831 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
833 buf
->kind
= UNDO_LINKS
;
835 buf
->old_contents
.l
= oldval
;
838 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
841 #define SUBST_LINK(oldval, newval) do_SUBST_LINK (&oldval, newval)
843 /* Subroutine of try_combine. Determine whether the replacement patterns
844 NEWPAT, NEWI2PAT and NEWOTHERPAT are cheaper according to insn_rtx_cost
845 than the original sequence I0, I1, I2, I3 and undobuf.other_insn. Note
846 that I0, I1 and/or NEWI2PAT may be NULL_RTX. Similarly, NEWOTHERPAT and
847 undobuf.other_insn may also both be NULL_RTX. Return false if the cost
848 of all the instructions can be estimated and the replacements are more
849 expensive than the original sequence. */
852 combine_validate_cost (rtx_insn
*i0
, rtx_insn
*i1
, rtx_insn
*i2
, rtx_insn
*i3
,
853 rtx newpat
, rtx newi2pat
, rtx newotherpat
)
855 int i0_cost
, i1_cost
, i2_cost
, i3_cost
;
856 int new_i2_cost
, new_i3_cost
;
857 int old_cost
, new_cost
;
859 /* Lookup the original insn_rtx_costs. */
860 i2_cost
= INSN_COST (i2
);
861 i3_cost
= INSN_COST (i3
);
865 i1_cost
= INSN_COST (i1
);
868 i0_cost
= INSN_COST (i0
);
869 old_cost
= (i0_cost
> 0 && i1_cost
> 0 && i2_cost
> 0 && i3_cost
> 0
870 ? i0_cost
+ i1_cost
+ i2_cost
+ i3_cost
: 0);
874 old_cost
= (i1_cost
> 0 && i2_cost
> 0 && i3_cost
> 0
875 ? i1_cost
+ i2_cost
+ i3_cost
: 0);
881 old_cost
= (i2_cost
> 0 && i3_cost
> 0) ? i2_cost
+ i3_cost
: 0;
882 i1_cost
= i0_cost
= 0;
885 /* If we have split a PARALLEL I2 to I1,I2, we have counted its cost twice;
887 if (old_cost
&& i1
&& INSN_UID (i1
) == INSN_UID (i2
))
891 /* Calculate the replacement insn_rtx_costs. */
892 new_i3_cost
= insn_rtx_cost (newpat
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
895 new_i2_cost
= insn_rtx_cost (newi2pat
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
896 new_cost
= (new_i2_cost
> 0 && new_i3_cost
> 0)
897 ? new_i2_cost
+ new_i3_cost
: 0;
901 new_cost
= new_i3_cost
;
905 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
907 int old_other_cost
, new_other_cost
;
909 old_other_cost
= INSN_COST (undobuf
.other_insn
);
910 new_other_cost
= insn_rtx_cost (newotherpat
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
911 if (old_other_cost
> 0 && new_other_cost
> 0)
913 old_cost
+= old_other_cost
;
914 new_cost
+= new_other_cost
;
920 /* Disallow this combination if both new_cost and old_cost are greater than
921 zero, and new_cost is greater than old cost. */
922 int reject
= old_cost
> 0 && new_cost
> old_cost
;
926 fprintf (dump_file
, "%s combination of insns ",
927 reject
? "rejecting" : "allowing");
929 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i0
));
930 if (i1
&& INSN_UID (i1
) != INSN_UID (i2
))
931 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i1
));
932 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d and %d\n", INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
934 fprintf (dump_file
, "original costs ");
936 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d + ", i0_cost
);
937 if (i1
&& INSN_UID (i1
) != INSN_UID (i2
))
938 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d + ", i1_cost
);
939 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d + %d = %d\n", i2_cost
, i3_cost
, old_cost
);
942 fprintf (dump_file
, "replacement costs %d + %d = %d\n",
943 new_i2_cost
, new_i3_cost
, new_cost
);
945 fprintf (dump_file
, "replacement cost %d\n", new_cost
);
951 /* Update the uid_insn_cost array with the replacement costs. */
952 INSN_COST (i2
) = new_i2_cost
;
953 INSN_COST (i3
) = new_i3_cost
;
965 /* Delete any insns that copy a register to itself. */
968 delete_noop_moves (void)
970 rtx_insn
*insn
, *next
;
973 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb
, cfun
)
975 for (insn
= BB_HEAD (bb
); insn
!= NEXT_INSN (BB_END (bb
)); insn
= next
)
977 next
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
978 if (INSN_P (insn
) && noop_move_p (insn
))
981 fprintf (dump_file
, "deleting noop move %d\n", INSN_UID (insn
));
983 delete_insn_and_edges (insn
);
990 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine DEF. */
992 can_combine_def_p (df_ref def
)
994 /* Do not consider if it is pre/post modification in MEM. */
995 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def
) & DF_REF_PRE_POST_MODIFY
)
998 unsigned int regno
= DF_REF_REGNO (def
);
1000 /* Do not combine frame pointer adjustments. */
1001 if ((regno
== FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1002 && (!reload_completed
|| frame_pointer_needed
))
1003 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
1004 && regno
== HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1005 && (!reload_completed
|| frame_pointer_needed
))
1006 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
!= ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1007 && regno
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
&& fixed_regs
[regno
]))
1013 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine USE. */
1015 can_combine_use_p (df_ref use
)
1017 /* Do not consider the usage of the stack pointer by function call. */
1018 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (use
) & DF_REF_CALL_STACK_USAGE
)
1024 /* Fill in log links field for all insns. */
1027 create_log_links (void)
1030 rtx_insn
**next_use
;
1034 next_use
= XCNEWVEC (rtx_insn
*, max_reg_num ());
1036 /* Pass through each block from the end, recording the uses of each
1037 register and establishing log links when def is encountered.
1038 Note that we do not clear next_use array in order to save time,
1039 so we have to test whether the use is in the same basic block as def.
1041 There are a few cases below when we do not consider the definition or
1042 usage -- these are taken from original flow.c did. Don't ask me why it is
1043 done this way; I don't know and if it works, I don't want to know. */
1045 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb
, cfun
)
1047 FOR_BB_INSNS_REVERSE (bb
, insn
)
1049 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
1052 /* Log links are created only once. */
1053 gcc_assert (!LOG_LINKS (insn
));
1055 FOR_EACH_INSN_DEF (def
, insn
)
1057 unsigned int regno
= DF_REF_REGNO (def
);
1060 if (!next_use
[regno
])
1063 if (!can_combine_def_p (def
))
1066 use_insn
= next_use
[regno
];
1067 next_use
[regno
] = NULL
;
1069 if (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (use_insn
) != bb
)
1074 We don't build a LOG_LINK for hard registers contained
1075 in ASM_OPERANDs. If these registers get replaced,
1076 we might wind up changing the semantics of the insn,
1077 even if reload can make what appear to be valid
1078 assignments later. */
1079 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1080 && asm_noperands (PATTERN (use_insn
)) >= 0)
1083 /* Don't add duplicate links between instructions. */
1084 struct insn_link
*links
;
1085 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, use_insn
)
1086 if (insn
== links
->insn
&& regno
== links
->regno
)
1090 LOG_LINKS (use_insn
)
1091 = alloc_insn_link (insn
, regno
, LOG_LINKS (use_insn
));
1094 FOR_EACH_INSN_USE (use
, insn
)
1095 if (can_combine_use_p (use
))
1096 next_use
[DF_REF_REGNO (use
)] = insn
;
1103 /* Walk the LOG_LINKS of insn B to see if we find a reference to A. Return
1104 true if we found a LOG_LINK that proves that A feeds B. This only works
1105 if there are no instructions between A and B which could have a link
1106 depending on A, since in that case we would not record a link for B.
1107 We also check the implicit dependency created by a cc0 setter/user
1111 insn_a_feeds_b (rtx_insn
*a
, rtx_insn
*b
)
1113 struct insn_link
*links
;
1114 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, b
)
1115 if (links
->insn
== a
)
1117 if (HAVE_cc0
&& sets_cc0_p (a
))
1122 /* Main entry point for combiner. F is the first insn of the function.
1123 NREGS is the first unused pseudo-reg number.
1125 Return nonzero if the combiner has turned an indirect jump
1126 instruction into a direct jump. */
1128 combine_instructions (rtx_insn
*f
, unsigned int nregs
)
1130 rtx_insn
*insn
, *next
;
1132 struct insn_link
*links
, *nextlinks
;
1134 basic_block last_bb
;
1136 int new_direct_jump_p
= 0;
1138 for (first
= f
; first
&& !NONDEBUG_INSN_P (first
); )
1139 first
= NEXT_INSN (first
);
1143 combine_attempts
= 0;
1146 combine_successes
= 0;
1148 rtl_hooks
= combine_rtl_hooks
;
1150 reg_stat
.safe_grow_cleared (nregs
);
1152 init_recog_no_volatile ();
1154 /* Allocate array for insn info. */
1155 max_uid_known
= get_max_uid ();
1156 uid_log_links
= XCNEWVEC (struct insn_link
*, max_uid_known
+ 1);
1157 uid_insn_cost
= XCNEWVEC (int, max_uid_known
+ 1);
1158 gcc_obstack_init (&insn_link_obstack
);
1160 nonzero_bits_mode
= mode_for_size (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
, MODE_INT
, 0);
1162 /* Don't use reg_stat[].nonzero_bits when computing it. This can cause
1163 problems when, for example, we have j <<= 1 in a loop. */
1165 nonzero_sign_valid
= 0;
1166 label_tick
= label_tick_ebb_start
= 1;
1168 /* Scan all SETs and see if we can deduce anything about what
1169 bits are known to be zero for some registers and how many copies
1170 of the sign bit are known to exist for those registers.
1172 Also set any known values so that we can use it while searching
1173 for what bits are known to be set. */
1175 setup_incoming_promotions (first
);
1176 /* Allow the entry block and the first block to fall into the same EBB.
1177 Conceptually the incoming promotions are assigned to the entry block. */
1178 last_bb
= ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
);
1180 create_log_links ();
1181 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block
, cfun
)
1183 optimize_this_for_speed_p
= optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block
);
1188 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block
)
1189 || single_pred (this_basic_block
) != last_bb
)
1190 label_tick_ebb_start
= label_tick
;
1191 last_bb
= this_basic_block
;
1193 FOR_BB_INSNS (this_basic_block
, insn
)
1194 if (INSN_P (insn
) && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
))
1198 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
1201 note_stores (PATTERN (insn
), set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies
,
1203 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn
);
1206 for (links
= REG_NOTES (insn
); links
; links
= XEXP (links
, 1))
1207 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (links
) == REG_INC
)
1208 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (XEXP (links
, 0), NULL_RTX
,
1211 /* Record the current insn_rtx_cost of this instruction. */
1212 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn
))
1213 INSN_COST (insn
) = insn_rtx_cost (PATTERN (insn
),
1214 optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
1217 fprintf (dump_file
, "insn_cost %d for ", INSN_COST (insn
));
1218 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, insn
);
1223 nonzero_sign_valid
= 1;
1225 /* Now scan all the insns in forward order. */
1226 label_tick
= label_tick_ebb_start
= 1;
1228 setup_incoming_promotions (first
);
1229 last_bb
= ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
);
1230 int max_combine
= PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_COMBINE_INSNS
);
1232 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block
, cfun
)
1234 rtx_insn
*last_combined_insn
= NULL
;
1235 optimize_this_for_speed_p
= optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block
);
1240 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block
)
1241 || single_pred (this_basic_block
) != last_bb
)
1242 label_tick_ebb_start
= label_tick
;
1243 last_bb
= this_basic_block
;
1245 rtl_profile_for_bb (this_basic_block
);
1246 for (insn
= BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
);
1247 insn
!= NEXT_INSN (BB_END (this_basic_block
));
1248 insn
= next
? next
: NEXT_INSN (insn
))
1251 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
1254 while (last_combined_insn
1255 && (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (last_combined_insn
)
1256 || last_combined_insn
->deleted ()))
1257 last_combined_insn
= PREV_INSN (last_combined_insn
);
1258 if (last_combined_insn
== NULL_RTX
1259 || BLOCK_FOR_INSN (last_combined_insn
) != this_basic_block
1260 || DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn
) <= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
))
1261 last_combined_insn
= insn
;
1263 /* See if we know about function return values before this
1264 insn based upon SUBREG flags. */
1265 check_promoted_subreg (insn
, PATTERN (insn
));
1267 /* See if we can find hardregs and subreg of pseudos in
1268 narrower modes. This could help turning TRUNCATEs
1270 note_uses (&PATTERN (insn
), record_truncated_values
, NULL
);
1272 /* Try this insn with each insn it links back to. */
1274 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1275 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, links
->insn
, NULL
,
1276 NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1277 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1279 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "two-insn combine", 1);
1283 /* Try each sequence of three linked insns ending with this one. */
1285 if (max_combine
>= 3)
1286 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1288 rtx_insn
*link
= links
->insn
;
1290 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1291 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1295 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link
)
1296 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, nextlinks
->insn
,
1297 NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1298 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1300 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "three-insn combine", 1);
1305 /* Try to combine a jump insn that uses CC0
1306 with a preceding insn that sets CC0, and maybe with its
1307 logical predecessor as well.
1308 This is how we make decrement-and-branch insns.
1309 We need this special code because data flow connections
1310 via CC0 do not get entered in LOG_LINKS. */
1314 && (prev
= prev_nonnote_insn (insn
)) != 0
1315 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev
)
1316 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev
)))
1318 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, prev
, NULL
, NULL
,
1320 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1323 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, prev
)
1324 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, prev
, nextlinks
->insn
,
1325 NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1326 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1330 /* Do the same for an insn that explicitly references CC0. */
1331 if (HAVE_cc0
&& NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn
)
1332 && (prev
= prev_nonnote_insn (insn
)) != 0
1333 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev
)
1334 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev
))
1335 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
1336 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx
, SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn
))))
1338 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, prev
, NULL
, NULL
,
1340 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1343 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, prev
)
1344 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, prev
, nextlinks
->insn
,
1345 NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1346 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1350 /* Finally, see if any of the insns that this insn links to
1351 explicitly references CC0. If so, try this insn, that insn,
1352 and its predecessor if it sets CC0. */
1355 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1356 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (links
->insn
)
1357 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (links
->insn
)) == SET
1358 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx
, SET_SRC (PATTERN (links
->insn
)))
1359 && (prev
= prev_nonnote_insn (links
->insn
)) != 0
1360 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev
)
1361 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev
))
1362 && (next
= try_combine (insn
, links
->insn
,
1363 prev
, NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1364 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1368 /* Try combining an insn with two different insns whose results it
1370 if (max_combine
>= 3)
1371 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1372 for (nextlinks
= links
->next
; nextlinks
;
1373 nextlinks
= nextlinks
->next
)
1374 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, links
->insn
,
1375 nextlinks
->insn
, NULL
,
1377 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1380 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "three-insn combine", 1);
1384 /* Try four-instruction combinations. */
1385 if (max_combine
>= 4)
1386 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1388 struct insn_link
*next1
;
1389 rtx_insn
*link
= links
->insn
;
1391 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1392 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1396 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (next1
, link
)
1398 rtx_insn
*link1
= next1
->insn
;
1401 /* I0 -> I1 -> I2 -> I3. */
1402 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link1
)
1403 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1406 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1408 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1411 /* I0, I1 -> I2, I2 -> I3. */
1412 for (nextlinks
= next1
->next
; nextlinks
;
1413 nextlinks
= nextlinks
->next
)
1414 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1417 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1419 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1424 for (next1
= links
->next
; next1
; next1
= next1
->next
)
1426 rtx_insn
*link1
= next1
->insn
;
1429 /* I0 -> I2; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1430 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link
)
1431 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1434 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1436 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1439 /* I0 -> I1; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1440 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link1
)
1441 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1444 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1446 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1452 /* Try this insn with each REG_EQUAL note it links back to. */
1453 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1456 rtx_insn
*temp
= links
->insn
;
1457 if ((set
= single_set (temp
)) != 0
1458 && (note
= find_reg_equal_equiv_note (temp
)) != 0
1459 && (note
= XEXP (note
, 0), GET_CODE (note
)) != EXPR_LIST
1460 /* Avoid using a register that may already been marked
1461 dead by an earlier instruction. */
1462 && ! unmentioned_reg_p (note
, SET_SRC (set
))
1463 && (GET_MODE (note
) == VOIDmode
1464 ? SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
)))
1465 : (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
)) == GET_MODE (note
)
1466 && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set
)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
1467 || (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (set
), 0))
1468 == GET_MODE (note
))))))
1470 /* Temporarily replace the set's source with the
1471 contents of the REG_EQUAL note. The insn will
1472 be deleted or recognized by try_combine. */
1473 rtx orig_src
= SET_SRC (set
);
1474 rtx orig_dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
1475 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set
)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
1476 SET_DEST (set
) = XEXP (SET_DEST (set
), 0);
1477 SET_SRC (set
) = note
;
1479 i2mod_old_rhs
= copy_rtx (orig_src
);
1480 i2mod_new_rhs
= copy_rtx (note
);
1481 next
= try_combine (insn
, i2mod
, NULL
, NULL
,
1483 last_combined_insn
);
1487 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "insn-with-note combine", 1);
1490 SET_SRC (set
) = orig_src
;
1491 SET_DEST (set
) = orig_dest
;
1496 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn
);
1503 default_rtl_profile ();
1505 new_direct_jump_p
|= purge_all_dead_edges ();
1506 delete_noop_moves ();
1509 obstack_free (&insn_link_obstack
, NULL
);
1510 free (uid_log_links
);
1511 free (uid_insn_cost
);
1512 reg_stat
.release ();
1515 struct undo
*undo
, *next
;
1516 for (undo
= undobuf
.frees
; undo
; undo
= next
)
1524 total_attempts
+= combine_attempts
;
1525 total_merges
+= combine_merges
;
1526 total_extras
+= combine_extras
;
1527 total_successes
+= combine_successes
;
1529 nonzero_sign_valid
= 0;
1530 rtl_hooks
= general_rtl_hooks
;
1532 /* Make recognizer allow volatile MEMs again. */
1535 return new_direct_jump_p
;
1538 /* Wipe the last_xxx fields of reg_stat in preparation for another pass. */
1541 init_reg_last (void)
1546 FOR_EACH_VEC_ELT (reg_stat
, i
, p
)
1547 memset (p
, 0, offsetof (reg_stat_type
, sign_bit_copies
));
1550 /* Set up any promoted values for incoming argument registers. */
1553 setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn
*first
)
1556 bool strictly_local
= false;
1558 for (arg
= DECL_ARGUMENTS (current_function_decl
); arg
;
1559 arg
= DECL_CHAIN (arg
))
1561 rtx x
, reg
= DECL_INCOMING_RTL (arg
);
1563 machine_mode mode1
, mode2
, mode3
, mode4
;
1565 /* Only continue if the incoming argument is in a register. */
1569 /* Determine, if possible, whether all call sites of the current
1570 function lie within the current compilation unit. (This does
1571 take into account the exporting of a function via taking its
1572 address, and so forth.) */
1573 strictly_local
= cgraph_node::local_info (current_function_decl
)->local
;
1575 /* The mode and signedness of the argument before any promotions happen
1576 (equal to the mode of the pseudo holding it at that stage). */
1577 mode1
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (arg
));
1578 uns1
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (arg
));
1580 /* The mode and signedness of the argument after any source language and
1581 TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES-driven promotions. */
1582 mode2
= TYPE_MODE (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg
));
1583 uns3
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg
));
1585 /* The mode and signedness of the argument as it is actually passed,
1586 see assign_parm_setup_reg in function.c. */
1587 mode3
= promote_function_mode (TREE_TYPE (arg
), mode1
, &uns3
,
1588 TREE_TYPE (cfun
->decl
), 0);
1590 /* The mode of the register in which the argument is being passed. */
1591 mode4
= GET_MODE (reg
);
1593 /* Eliminate sign extensions in the callee when:
1594 (a) A mode promotion has occurred; */
1597 /* (b) The mode of the register is the same as the mode of
1598 the argument as it is passed; */
1601 /* (c) There's no language level extension; */
1604 /* (c.1) All callers are from the current compilation unit. If that's
1605 the case we don't have to rely on an ABI, we only have to know
1606 what we're generating right now, and we know that we will do the
1607 mode1 to mode2 promotion with the given sign. */
1608 else if (!strictly_local
)
1610 /* (c.2) The combination of the two promotions is useful. This is
1611 true when the signs match, or if the first promotion is unsigned.
1612 In the later case, (sign_extend (zero_extend x)) is the same as
1613 (zero_extend (zero_extend x)), so make sure to force UNS3 true. */
1619 /* Record that the value was promoted from mode1 to mode3,
1620 so that any sign extension at the head of the current
1621 function may be eliminated. */
1622 x
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode1
, const0_rtx
);
1623 x
= gen_rtx_fmt_e ((uns3
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
), mode3
, x
);
1624 record_value_for_reg (reg
, first
, x
);
1628 /* If MODE has a precision lower than PREC and SRC is a non-negative constant
1629 that would appear negative in MODE, sign-extend SRC for use in nonzero_bits
1630 because some machines (maybe most) will actually do the sign-extension and
1631 this is the conservative approach.
1633 ??? For 2.5, try to tighten up the MD files in this regard instead of this
1637 sign_extend_short_imm (rtx src
, machine_mode mode
, unsigned int prec
)
1639 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) < prec
1640 && CONST_INT_P (src
)
1642 && val_signbit_known_set_p (mode
, INTVAL (src
)))
1643 src
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (src
) | ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
));
1648 /* Update RSP for pseudo-register X from INSN's REG_EQUAL note (if one exists)
1652 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (reg_stat_type
*rsp
, rtx_insn
*insn
, const_rtx set
,
1655 rtx reg_equal_note
= insn
? find_reg_equal_equiv_note (insn
) : NULL_RTX
;
1656 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bits
= 0;
1657 rtx reg_equal
= NULL
, src
= SET_SRC (set
);
1658 unsigned int num
= 0;
1661 reg_equal
= XEXP (reg_equal_note
, 0);
1663 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
)
1665 src
= sign_extend_short_imm (src
, GET_MODE (x
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
1667 reg_equal
= sign_extend_short_imm (reg_equal
, GET_MODE (x
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
1670 /* Don't call nonzero_bits if it cannot change anything. */
1671 if (rsp
->nonzero_bits
!= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
)
1673 bits
= nonzero_bits (src
, nonzero_bits_mode
);
1674 if (reg_equal
&& bits
)
1675 bits
&= nonzero_bits (reg_equal
, nonzero_bits_mode
);
1676 rsp
->nonzero_bits
|= bits
;
1679 /* Don't call num_sign_bit_copies if it cannot change anything. */
1680 if (rsp
->sign_bit_copies
!= 1)
1682 num
= num_sign_bit_copies (SET_SRC (set
), GET_MODE (x
));
1683 if (reg_equal
&& num
!= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
1685 unsigned int numeq
= num_sign_bit_copies (reg_equal
, GET_MODE (x
));
1686 if (num
== 0 || numeq
> num
)
1689 if (rsp
->sign_bit_copies
== 0 || num
< rsp
->sign_bit_copies
)
1690 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= num
;
1694 /* Called via note_stores. If X is a pseudo that is narrower than
1695 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and is being set, record what bits are known zero.
1697 If we are setting only a portion of X and we can't figure out what
1698 portion, assume all bits will be used since we don't know what will
1701 Similarly, set how many bits of X are known to be copies of the sign bit
1702 at all locations in the function. This is the smallest number implied
1706 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx x
, const_rtx set
, void *data
)
1708 rtx_insn
*insn
= (rtx_insn
*) data
;
1711 && REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1712 /* If this register is undefined at the start of the file, we can't
1713 say what its contents were. */
1714 && ! REGNO_REG_SET_P
1715 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
), REGNO (x
))
1716 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)))
1718 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
1720 if (set
== 0 || GET_CODE (set
) == CLOBBER
)
1722 rsp
->nonzero_bits
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
));
1723 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= 1;
1727 /* If this register is being initialized using itself, and the
1728 register is uninitialized in this basic block, and there are
1729 no LOG_LINKS which set the register, then part of the
1730 register is uninitialized. In that case we can't assume
1731 anything about the number of nonzero bits.
1733 ??? We could do better if we checked this in
1734 reg_{nonzero_bits,num_sign_bit_copies}_for_combine. Then we
1735 could avoid making assumptions about the insn which initially
1736 sets the register, while still using the information in other
1737 insns. We would have to be careful to check every insn
1738 involved in the combination. */
1741 && reg_referenced_p (x
, PATTERN (insn
))
1742 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P (DF_LR_IN (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
)),
1745 struct insn_link
*link
;
1747 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, insn
)
1748 if (dead_or_set_p (link
->insn
, x
))
1752 rsp
->nonzero_bits
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
));
1753 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= 1;
1758 /* If this is a complex assignment, see if we can convert it into a
1759 simple assignment. */
1760 set
= expand_field_assignment (set
);
1762 /* If this is a simple assignment, or we have a paradoxical SUBREG,
1763 set what we know about X. */
1765 if (SET_DEST (set
) == x
1766 || (paradoxical_subreg_p (SET_DEST (set
))
1767 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set
)) == x
))
1768 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (rsp
, insn
, set
, x
);
1771 rsp
->nonzero_bits
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
));
1772 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= 1;
1777 /* See if INSN can be combined into I3. PRED, PRED2, SUCC and SUCC2 are
1778 optionally insns that were previously combined into I3 or that will be
1779 combined into the merger of INSN and I3. The order is PRED, PRED2,
1780 INSN, SUCC, SUCC2, I3.
1782 Return 0 if the combination is not allowed for any reason.
1784 If the combination is allowed, *PDEST will be set to the single
1785 destination of INSN and *PSRC to the single source, and this function
1789 can_combine_p (rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx_insn
*pred ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
1790 rtx_insn
*pred2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, rtx_insn
*succ
, rtx_insn
*succ2
,
1791 rtx
*pdest
, rtx
*psrc
)
1798 bool all_adjacent
= true;
1799 int (*is_volatile_p
) (const_rtx
);
1805 if (next_active_insn (succ2
) != i3
)
1806 all_adjacent
= false;
1807 if (next_active_insn (succ
) != succ2
)
1808 all_adjacent
= false;
1810 else if (next_active_insn (succ
) != i3
)
1811 all_adjacent
= false;
1812 if (next_active_insn (insn
) != succ
)
1813 all_adjacent
= false;
1815 else if (next_active_insn (insn
) != i3
)
1816 all_adjacent
= false;
1818 /* Can combine only if previous insn is a SET of a REG, a SUBREG or CC0.
1819 or a PARALLEL consisting of such a SET and CLOBBERs.
1821 If INSN has CLOBBER parallel parts, ignore them for our processing.
1822 By definition, these happen during the execution of the insn. When it
1823 is merged with another insn, all bets are off. If they are, in fact,
1824 needed and aren't also supplied in I3, they may be added by
1825 recog_for_combine. Otherwise, it won't match.
1827 We can also ignore a SET whose SET_DEST is mentioned in a REG_UNUSED
1830 Get the source and destination of INSN. If more than one, can't
1833 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
)
1834 set
= PATTERN (insn
);
1835 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == PARALLEL
1836 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0)) == SET
)
1838 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn
), 0); i
++)
1840 rtx elt
= XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, i
);
1842 switch (GET_CODE (elt
))
1844 /* This is important to combine floating point insns
1845 for the SH4 port. */
1847 /* Combining an isolated USE doesn't make sense.
1848 We depend here on combinable_i3pat to reject them. */
1849 /* The code below this loop only verifies that the inputs of
1850 the SET in INSN do not change. We call reg_set_between_p
1851 to verify that the REG in the USE does not change between
1853 If the USE in INSN was for a pseudo register, the matching
1854 insn pattern will likely match any register; combining this
1855 with any other USE would only be safe if we knew that the
1856 used registers have identical values, or if there was
1857 something to tell them apart, e.g. different modes. For
1858 now, we forgo such complicated tests and simply disallow
1859 combining of USES of pseudo registers with any other USE. */
1860 if (REG_P (XEXP (elt
, 0))
1861 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == PARALLEL
)
1863 rtx i3pat
= PATTERN (i3
);
1864 int i
= XVECLEN (i3pat
, 0) - 1;
1865 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (elt
, 0));
1869 rtx i3elt
= XVECEXP (i3pat
, 0, i
);
1871 if (GET_CODE (i3elt
) == USE
1872 && REG_P (XEXP (i3elt
, 0))
1873 && (REGNO (XEXP (i3elt
, 0)) == regno
1874 ? reg_set_between_p (XEXP (elt
, 0),
1875 PREV_INSN (insn
), i3
)
1876 : regno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
1883 /* We can ignore CLOBBERs. */
1888 /* Ignore SETs whose result isn't used but not those that
1889 have side-effects. */
1890 if (find_reg_note (insn
, REG_UNUSED
, SET_DEST (elt
))
1891 && insn_nothrow_p (insn
)
1892 && !side_effects_p (elt
))
1895 /* If we have already found a SET, this is a second one and
1896 so we cannot combine with this insn. */
1904 /* Anything else means we can't combine. */
1910 /* If SET_SRC is an ASM_OPERANDS we can't throw away these CLOBBERs,
1911 so don't do anything with it. */
1912 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set
)) == ASM_OPERANDS
)
1921 /* The simplification in expand_field_assignment may call back to
1922 get_last_value, so set safe guard here. */
1923 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
1925 set
= expand_field_assignment (set
);
1926 src
= SET_SRC (set
), dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
1928 /* Do not eliminate user-specified register if it is in an
1929 asm input because we may break the register asm usage defined
1930 in GCC manual if allow to do so.
1931 Be aware that this may cover more cases than we expect but this
1932 should be harmless. */
1933 if (REG_P (dest
) && REG_USERVAR_P (dest
) && HARD_REGISTER_P (dest
)
1934 && extract_asm_operands (PATTERN (i3
)))
1937 /* Don't eliminate a store in the stack pointer. */
1938 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
1939 /* Don't combine with an insn that sets a register to itself if it has
1940 a REG_EQUAL note. This may be part of a LIBCALL sequence. */
1941 || (rtx_equal_p (src
, dest
) && find_reg_note (insn
, REG_EQUAL
, NULL_RTX
))
1942 /* Can't merge an ASM_OPERANDS. */
1943 || GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
1944 /* Can't merge a function call. */
1945 || GET_CODE (src
) == CALL
1946 /* Don't eliminate a function call argument. */
1948 && (find_reg_fusage (i3
, USE
, dest
)
1950 && REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1951 && global_regs
[REGNO (dest
)])))
1952 /* Don't substitute into an incremented register. */
1953 || FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i3
, dest
)
1954 || (succ
&& FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ
, dest
))
1955 || (succ2
&& FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ2
, dest
))
1956 /* Don't substitute into a non-local goto, this confuses CFG. */
1957 || (JUMP_P (i3
) && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO
, NULL_RTX
))
1958 /* Make sure that DEST is not used after INSN but before SUCC, or
1959 after SUCC and before SUCC2, or after SUCC2 but before I3. */
1962 && (reg_used_between_p (dest
, succ2
, i3
)
1963 || reg_used_between_p (dest
, succ
, succ2
)))
1964 || (!succ2
&& succ
&& reg_used_between_p (dest
, succ
, i3
))
1966 /* SUCC and SUCC2 can be split halves from a PARALLEL; in
1967 that case SUCC is not in the insn stream, so use SUCC2
1968 instead for this test. */
1969 && reg_used_between_p (dest
, insn
,
1971 && INSN_UID (succ
) == INSN_UID (succ2
)
1973 /* Make sure that the value that is to be substituted for the register
1974 does not use any registers whose values alter in between. However,
1975 If the insns are adjacent, a use can't cross a set even though we
1976 think it might (this can happen for a sequence of insns each setting
1977 the same destination; last_set of that register might point to
1978 a NOTE). If INSN has a REG_EQUIV note, the register is always
1979 equivalent to the memory so the substitution is valid even if there
1980 are intervening stores. Also, don't move a volatile asm or
1981 UNSPEC_VOLATILE across any other insns. */
1984 || ! find_reg_note (insn
, REG_EQUIV
, src
))
1985 && use_crosses_set_p (src
, DF_INSN_LUID (insn
)))
1986 || (GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (src
))
1987 || GET_CODE (src
) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE
))
1988 /* Don't combine across a CALL_INSN, because that would possibly
1989 change whether the life span of some REGs crosses calls or not,
1990 and it is a pain to update that information.
1991 Exception: if source is a constant, moving it later can't hurt.
1992 Accept that as a special case. */
1993 || (DF_INSN_LUID (insn
) < last_call_luid
&& ! CONSTANT_P (src
)))
1996 /* DEST must either be a REG or CC0. */
1999 /* If register alignment is being enforced for multi-word items in all
2000 cases except for parameters, it is possible to have a register copy
2001 insn referencing a hard register that is not allowed to contain the
2002 mode being copied and which would not be valid as an operand of most
2003 insns. Eliminate this problem by not combining with such an insn.
2005 Also, on some machines we don't want to extend the life of a hard
2009 && ((REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2010 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (dest
), GET_MODE (dest
)))
2011 /* Don't extend the life of a hard register unless it is
2012 user variable (if we have few registers) or it can't
2013 fit into the desired register (meaning something special
2015 Also avoid substituting a return register into I3, because
2016 reload can't handle a conflict with constraints of other
2018 || (REGNO (src
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2019 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (src
), GET_MODE (src
)))))
2022 else if (GET_CODE (dest
) != CC0
)
2026 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == PARALLEL
)
2027 for (i
= XVECLEN (PATTERN (i3
), 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
2028 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3
), 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
2030 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3
), 0, i
), 0);
2032 /* If the clobber represents an earlyclobber operand, we must not
2033 substitute an expression containing the clobbered register.
2034 As we do not analyze the constraint strings here, we have to
2035 make the conservative assumption. However, if the register is
2036 a fixed hard reg, the clobber cannot represent any operand;
2037 we leave it up to the machine description to either accept or
2038 reject use-and-clobber patterns. */
2040 || REGNO (reg
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2041 || !fixed_regs
[REGNO (reg
)])
2042 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, src
))
2046 /* If INSN contains anything volatile, or is an `asm' (whether volatile
2047 or not), reject, unless nothing volatile comes between it and I3 */
2049 if (GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
|| volatile_refs_p (src
))
2051 /* Make sure neither succ nor succ2 contains a volatile reference. */
2052 if (succ2
!= 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ2
)))
2054 if (succ
!= 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ
)))
2056 /* We'll check insns between INSN and I3 below. */
2059 /* If INSN is an asm, and DEST is a hard register, reject, since it has
2060 to be an explicit register variable, and was chosen for a reason. */
2062 if (GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
2063 && REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2066 /* If INSN contains volatile references (specifically volatile MEMs),
2067 we cannot combine across any other volatile references.
2068 Even if INSN doesn't contain volatile references, any intervening
2069 volatile insn might affect machine state. */
2071 is_volatile_p
= volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (insn
))
2075 for (p
= NEXT_INSN (insn
); p
!= i3
; p
= NEXT_INSN (p
))
2076 if (INSN_P (p
) && p
!= succ
&& p
!= succ2
&& is_volatile_p (PATTERN (p
)))
2079 /* If INSN contains an autoincrement or autodecrement, make sure that
2080 register is not used between there and I3, and not already used in
2081 I3 either. Neither must it be used in PRED or SUCC, if they exist.
2082 Also insist that I3 not be a jump; if it were one
2083 and the incremented register were spilled, we would lose. */
2086 for (link
= REG_NOTES (insn
); link
; link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
2087 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_INC
2089 || reg_used_between_p (XEXP (link
, 0), insn
, i3
)
2090 || (pred
!= NULL_RTX
2091 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (pred
)))
2092 || (pred2
!= NULL_RTX
2093 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (pred2
)))
2094 || (succ
!= NULL_RTX
2095 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (succ
)))
2096 || (succ2
!= NULL_RTX
2097 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (succ2
)))
2098 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (i3
))))
2101 /* Don't combine an insn that follows a CC0-setting insn.
2102 An insn that uses CC0 must not be separated from the one that sets it.
2103 We do, however, allow I2 to follow a CC0-setting insn if that insn
2104 is passed as I1; in that case it will be deleted also.
2105 We also allow combining in this case if all the insns are adjacent
2106 because that would leave the two CC0 insns adjacent as well.
2107 It would be more logical to test whether CC0 occurs inside I1 or I2,
2108 but that would be much slower, and this ought to be equivalent. */
2112 p
= prev_nonnote_insn (insn
);
2113 if (p
&& p
!= pred
&& NONJUMP_INSN_P (p
) && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (p
))
2118 /* If we get here, we have passed all the tests and the combination is
2127 /* LOC is the location within I3 that contains its pattern or the component
2128 of a PARALLEL of the pattern. We validate that it is valid for combining.
2130 One problem is if I3 modifies its output, as opposed to replacing it
2131 entirely, we can't allow the output to contain I2DEST, I1DEST or I0DEST as
2132 doing so would produce an insn that is not equivalent to the original insns.
2136 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))
2137 (set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 101) 0) <foo>)
2139 This is NOT equivalent to:
2141 (parallel [(set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 100) 0) <foo>)
2142 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))])
2144 Not only does this modify 100 (in which case it might still be valid
2145 if 100 were dead in I2), it sets 101 to the ORIGINAL value of 100.
2147 We can also run into a problem if I2 sets a register that I1
2148 uses and I1 gets directly substituted into I3 (not via I2). In that
2149 case, we would be getting the wrong value of I2DEST into I3, so we
2150 must reject the combination. This case occurs when I2 and I1 both
2151 feed into I3, rather than when I1 feeds into I2, which feeds into I3.
2152 If I1_NOT_IN_SRC is nonzero, it means that finding I1 in the source
2153 of a SET must prevent combination from occurring. The same situation
2154 can occur for I0, in which case I0_NOT_IN_SRC is set.
2156 Before doing the above check, we first try to expand a field assignment
2157 into a set of logical operations.
2159 If PI3_DEST_KILLED is nonzero, it is a pointer to a location in which
2160 we place a register that is both set and used within I3. If more than one
2161 such register is detected, we fail.
2163 Return 1 if the combination is valid, zero otherwise. */
2166 combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx
*loc
, rtx i2dest
, rtx i1dest
, rtx i0dest
,
2167 int i1_not_in_src
, int i0_not_in_src
, rtx
*pi3dest_killed
)
2171 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SET
)
2174 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
2175 rtx src
= SET_SRC (set
);
2176 rtx inner_dest
= dest
;
2179 while (GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2180 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == SUBREG
2181 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
2182 inner_dest
= XEXP (inner_dest
, 0);
2184 /* Check for the case where I3 modifies its output, as discussed
2185 above. We don't want to prevent pseudos from being combined
2186 into the address of a MEM, so only prevent the combination if
2187 i1 or i2 set the same MEM. */
2188 if ((inner_dest
!= dest
&&
2189 (!MEM_P (inner_dest
)
2190 || rtx_equal_p (i2dest
, inner_dest
)
2191 || (i1dest
&& rtx_equal_p (i1dest
, inner_dest
))
2192 || (i0dest
&& rtx_equal_p (i0dest
, inner_dest
)))
2193 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, inner_dest
)
2194 || (i1dest
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, inner_dest
))
2195 || (i0dest
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, inner_dest
))))
2197 /* This is the same test done in can_combine_p except we can't test
2198 all_adjacent; we don't have to, since this instruction will stay
2199 in place, thus we are not considering increasing the lifetime of
2202 Also, if this insn sets a function argument, combining it with
2203 something that might need a spill could clobber a previous
2204 function argument; the all_adjacent test in can_combine_p also
2205 checks this; here, we do a more specific test for this case. */
2207 || (REG_P (inner_dest
)
2208 && REGNO (inner_dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2209 && (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (inner_dest
),
2210 GET_MODE (inner_dest
))))
2211 || (i1_not_in_src
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, src
))
2212 || (i0_not_in_src
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, src
)))
2215 /* If DEST is used in I3, it is being killed in this insn, so
2216 record that for later. We have to consider paradoxical
2217 subregs here, since they kill the whole register, but we
2218 ignore partial subregs, STRICT_LOW_PART, etc.
2219 Never add REG_DEAD notes for the FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM or the
2220 STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, since these are always considered to be
2221 live. Similarly for ARG_POINTER_REGNUM if it is fixed. */
2223 if (GET_CODE (subdest
) == SUBREG
2224 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (subdest
))
2225 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subdest
)))))
2226 subdest
= SUBREG_REG (subdest
);
2229 && reg_referenced_p (subdest
, PATTERN (i3
))
2230 && REGNO (subdest
) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2231 && (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2232 || REGNO (subdest
) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
2233 && (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2234 || (REGNO (subdest
) != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2235 || ! fixed_regs
[REGNO (subdest
)]))
2236 && REGNO (subdest
) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
)
2238 if (*pi3dest_killed
)
2241 *pi3dest_killed
= subdest
;
2245 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == PARALLEL
)
2249 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (x
, 0); i
++)
2250 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3
, &XVECEXP (x
, 0, i
), i2dest
, i1dest
, i0dest
,
2251 i1_not_in_src
, i0_not_in_src
, pi3dest_killed
))
2258 /* Return 1 if X is an arithmetic expression that contains a multiplication
2259 and division. We don't count multiplications by powers of two here. */
2262 contains_muldiv (rtx x
)
2264 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
2266 case MOD
: case DIV
: case UMOD
: case UDIV
:
2270 return ! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
2271 && pow2p_hwi (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))));
2274 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x
, 0))
2275 || contains_muldiv (XEXP (x
, 1));
2278 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x
, 0));
2284 /* Determine whether INSN can be used in a combination. Return nonzero if
2285 not. This is used in try_combine to detect early some cases where we
2286 can't perform combinations. */
2289 cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2294 /* If this isn't really an insn, we can't do anything.
2295 This can occur when flow deletes an insn that it has merged into an
2296 auto-increment address. */
2297 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
2300 /* Never combine loads and stores involving hard regs that are likely
2301 to be spilled. The register allocator can usually handle such
2302 reg-reg moves by tying. If we allow the combiner to make
2303 substitutions of likely-spilled regs, reload might die.
2304 As an exception, we allow combinations involving fixed regs; these are
2305 not available to the register allocator so there's no risk involved. */
2307 set
= single_set (insn
);
2310 src
= SET_SRC (set
);
2311 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
2312 if (GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
)
2313 src
= SUBREG_REG (src
);
2314 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
2315 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
2316 if (REG_P (src
) && REG_P (dest
)
2317 && ((HARD_REGISTER_P (src
)
2318 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set
, REGNO (src
))
2319 && targetm
.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (src
))))
2320 || (HARD_REGISTER_P (dest
)
2321 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set
, REGNO (dest
))
2322 && targetm
.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (dest
))))))
2328 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
2330 unsigned regno
, nregs
;
2334 /* Called via note_stores by likely_spilled_retval_p. Remove from info->mask
2335 hard registers that are known to be written to / clobbered in full. */
2337 likely_spilled_retval_1 (rtx x
, const_rtx set
, void *data
)
2339 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
*const info
=
2340 (struct likely_spilled_retval_info
*) data
;
2341 unsigned regno
, nregs
;
2344 if (!REG_P (XEXP (set
, 0)))
2347 if (regno
>= info
->regno
+ info
->nregs
)
2349 nregs
= REG_NREGS (x
);
2350 if (regno
+ nregs
<= info
->regno
)
2352 new_mask
= (2U << (nregs
- 1)) - 1;
2353 if (regno
< info
->regno
)
2354 new_mask
>>= info
->regno
- regno
;
2356 new_mask
<<= regno
- info
->regno
;
2357 info
->mask
&= ~new_mask
;
2360 /* Return nonzero iff part of the return value is live during INSN, and
2361 it is likely spilled. This can happen when more than one insn is needed
2362 to copy the return value, e.g. when we consider to combine into the
2363 second copy insn for a complex value. */
2366 likely_spilled_retval_p (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2368 rtx_insn
*use
= BB_END (this_basic_block
);
2371 unsigned regno
, nregs
;
2372 /* We assume here that no machine mode needs more than
2373 32 hard registers when the value overlaps with a register
2374 for which TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P is true. */
2376 struct likely_spilled_retval_info info
;
2378 if (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (use
) || GET_CODE (PATTERN (use
)) != USE
|| insn
== use
)
2380 reg
= XEXP (PATTERN (use
), 0);
2381 if (!REG_P (reg
) || !targetm
.calls
.function_value_regno_p (REGNO (reg
)))
2383 regno
= REGNO (reg
);
2384 nregs
= REG_NREGS (reg
);
2387 mask
= (2U << (nregs
- 1)) - 1;
2389 /* Disregard parts of the return value that are set later. */
2393 for (p
= PREV_INSN (use
); info
.mask
&& p
!= insn
; p
= PREV_INSN (p
))
2395 note_stores (PATTERN (p
), likely_spilled_retval_1
, &info
);
2398 /* Check if any of the (probably) live return value registers is
2403 if ((mask
& 1 << nregs
)
2404 && targetm
.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno
+ nregs
)))
2410 /* Adjust INSN after we made a change to its destination.
2412 Changing the destination can invalidate notes that say something about
2413 the results of the insn and a LOG_LINK pointing to the insn. */
2416 adjust_for_new_dest (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2418 /* For notes, be conservative and simply remove them. */
2419 remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes (insn
);
2421 /* The new insn will have a destination that was previously the destination
2422 of an insn just above it. Call distribute_links to make a LOG_LINK from
2423 the next use of that destination. */
2425 rtx set
= single_set (insn
);
2428 rtx reg
= SET_DEST (set
);
2430 while (GET_CODE (reg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
2431 || GET_CODE (reg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2432 || GET_CODE (reg
) == SUBREG
)
2433 reg
= XEXP (reg
, 0);
2434 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg
));
2436 distribute_links (alloc_insn_link (insn
, REGNO (reg
), NULL
));
2438 df_insn_rescan (insn
);
2441 /* Return TRUE if combine can reuse reg X in mode MODE.
2442 ADDED_SETS is nonzero if the original set is still required. */
2444 can_change_dest_mode (rtx x
, int added_sets
, machine_mode mode
)
2452 /* Allow hard registers if the new mode is legal, and occupies no more
2453 registers than the old mode. */
2454 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2455 return (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno
, mode
)
2456 && REG_NREGS (x
) >= hard_regno_nregs
[regno
][mode
]);
2458 /* Or a pseudo that is only used once. */
2459 return (regno
< reg_n_sets_max
2460 && REG_N_SETS (regno
) == 1
2462 && !REG_USERVAR_P (x
));
2466 /* Check whether X, the destination of a set, refers to part of
2467 the register specified by REG. */
2470 reg_subword_p (rtx x
, rtx reg
)
2472 /* Check that reg is an integer mode register. */
2473 if (!REG_P (reg
) || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (reg
)) != MODE_INT
)
2476 if (GET_CODE (x
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2477 || GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
2480 return GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
2481 && SUBREG_REG (x
) == reg
2482 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
)) == MODE_INT
;
2485 /* Delete the unconditional jump INSN and adjust the CFG correspondingly.
2486 Note that the INSN should be deleted *after* removing dead edges, so
2487 that the kept edge is the fallthrough edge for a (set (pc) (pc))
2488 but not for a (set (pc) (label_ref FOO)). */
2491 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2493 basic_block bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
);
2494 gcc_assert (BB_END (bb
) == insn
);
2496 purge_dead_edges (bb
);
2499 if (EDGE_COUNT (bb
->succs
) == 1)
2503 single_succ_edge (bb
)->flags
|= EDGE_FALLTHRU
;
2505 /* Remove barriers from the footer if there are any. */
2506 for (insn
= BB_FOOTER (bb
); insn
; insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
2507 if (BARRIER_P (insn
))
2509 if (PREV_INSN (insn
))
2510 SET_NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn
)) = NEXT_INSN (insn
);
2512 BB_FOOTER (bb
) = NEXT_INSN (insn
);
2513 if (NEXT_INSN (insn
))
2514 SET_PREV_INSN (NEXT_INSN (insn
)) = PREV_INSN (insn
);
2516 else if (LABEL_P (insn
))
2521 /* Return whether PAT is a PARALLEL of exactly N register SETs followed
2522 by an arbitrary number of CLOBBERs. */
2524 is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx pat
, int n
)
2526 if (GET_CODE (pat
) != PARALLEL
)
2529 int len
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0);
2534 for (i
= 0; i
< n
; i
++)
2535 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) != SET
2536 || !REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
))))
2538 for ( ; i
< len
; i
++)
2539 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) != CLOBBER
2540 || XEXP (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
), 0) == const0_rtx
)
2546 /* Return whether INSN, a PARALLEL of N register SETs (and maybe some
2547 CLOBBERs), can be split into individual SETs in that order, without
2548 changing semantics. */
2550 can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx_insn
*insn
, int n
)
2552 if (!insn_nothrow_p (insn
))
2555 rtx pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
2558 for (i
= 0; i
< n
; i
++)
2560 if (side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
))))
2563 rtx reg
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
));
2565 for (j
= i
+ 1; j
< n
; j
++)
2566 if (reg_referenced_p (reg
, XVECEXP (pat
, 0, j
)))
2573 /* Try to combine the insns I0, I1 and I2 into I3.
2574 Here I0, I1 and I2 appear earlier than I3.
2575 I0 and I1 can be zero; then we combine just I2 into I3, or I1 and I2 into
2578 If we are combining more than two insns and the resulting insn is not
2579 recognized, try splitting it into two insns. If that happens, I2 and I3
2580 are retained and I1/I0 are pseudo-deleted by turning them into a NOTE.
2581 Otherwise, I0, I1 and I2 are pseudo-deleted.
2583 Return 0 if the combination does not work. Then nothing is changed.
2584 If we did the combination, return the insn at which combine should
2587 Set NEW_DIRECT_JUMP_P to a nonzero value if try_combine creates a
2588 new direct jump instruction.
2590 LAST_COMBINED_INSN is either I3, or some insn after I3 that has
2591 been I3 passed to an earlier try_combine within the same basic
2595 try_combine (rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx_insn
*i2
, rtx_insn
*i1
, rtx_insn
*i0
,
2596 int *new_direct_jump_p
, rtx_insn
*last_combined_insn
)
2598 /* New patterns for I3 and I2, respectively. */
2599 rtx newpat
, newi2pat
= 0;
2600 rtvec newpat_vec_with_clobbers
= 0;
2601 int substed_i2
= 0, substed_i1
= 0, substed_i0
= 0;
2602 /* Indicates need to preserve SET in I0, I1 or I2 in I3 if it is not
2604 int added_sets_0
, added_sets_1
, added_sets_2
;
2605 /* Total number of SETs to put into I3. */
2607 /* Nonzero if I2's or I1's body now appears in I3. */
2608 int i2_is_used
= 0, i1_is_used
= 0;
2609 /* INSN_CODEs for new I3, new I2, and user of condition code. */
2610 int insn_code_number
, i2_code_number
= 0, other_code_number
= 0;
2611 /* Contains I3 if the destination of I3 is used in its source, which means
2612 that the old life of I3 is being killed. If that usage is placed into
2613 I2 and not in I3, a REG_DEAD note must be made. */
2614 rtx i3dest_killed
= 0;
2615 /* SET_DEST and SET_SRC of I2, I1 and I0. */
2616 rtx i2dest
= 0, i2src
= 0, i1dest
= 0, i1src
= 0, i0dest
= 0, i0src
= 0;
2617 /* Copy of SET_SRC of I1 and I0, if needed. */
2618 rtx i1src_copy
= 0, i0src_copy
= 0, i0src_copy2
= 0;
2619 /* Set if I2DEST was reused as a scratch register. */
2620 bool i2scratch
= false;
2621 /* The PATTERNs of I0, I1, and I2, or a copy of them in certain cases. */
2622 rtx i0pat
= 0, i1pat
= 0, i2pat
= 0;
2623 /* Indicates if I2DEST or I1DEST is in I2SRC or I1_SRC. */
2624 int i2dest_in_i2src
= 0, i1dest_in_i1src
= 0, i2dest_in_i1src
= 0;
2625 int i0dest_in_i0src
= 0, i1dest_in_i0src
= 0, i2dest_in_i0src
= 0;
2626 int i2dest_killed
= 0, i1dest_killed
= 0, i0dest_killed
= 0;
2627 int i1_feeds_i2_n
= 0, i0_feeds_i2_n
= 0, i0_feeds_i1_n
= 0;
2628 /* Notes that must be added to REG_NOTES in I3 and I2. */
2629 rtx new_i3_notes
, new_i2_notes
;
2630 /* Notes that we substituted I3 into I2 instead of the normal case. */
2631 int i3_subst_into_i2
= 0;
2632 /* Notes that I1, I2 or I3 is a MULT operation. */
2635 int changed_i3_dest
= 0;
2638 rtx_insn
*temp_insn
;
2640 struct insn_link
*link
;
2642 rtx new_other_notes
;
2645 /* Immediately return if any of I0,I1,I2 are the same insn (I3 can
2647 if (i1
== i2
|| i0
== i2
|| (i0
&& i0
== i1
))
2650 /* Only try four-insn combinations when there's high likelihood of
2651 success. Look for simple insns, such as loads of constants or
2652 binary operations involving a constant. */
2660 if (!flag_expensive_optimizations
)
2663 for (i
= 0; i
< 4; i
++)
2665 rtx_insn
*insn
= i
== 0 ? i0
: i
== 1 ? i1
: i
== 2 ? i2
: i3
;
2666 rtx set
= single_set (insn
);
2670 src
= SET_SRC (set
);
2671 if (CONSTANT_P (src
))
2676 else if (BINARY_P (src
) && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (src
, 1)))
2678 else if (GET_CODE (src
) == ASHIFT
|| GET_CODE (src
) == ASHIFTRT
2679 || GET_CODE (src
) == LSHIFTRT
)
2683 /* If I0 loads a memory and I3 sets the same memory, then I1 and I2
2684 are likely manipulating its value. Ideally we'll be able to combine
2685 all four insns into a bitfield insertion of some kind.
2687 Note the source in I0 might be inside a sign/zero extension and the
2688 memory modes in I0 and I3 might be different. So extract the address
2689 from the destination of I3 and search for it in the source of I0.
2691 In the event that there's a match but the source/dest do not actually
2692 refer to the same memory, the worst that happens is we try some
2693 combinations that we wouldn't have otherwise. */
2694 if ((set0
= single_set (i0
))
2695 /* Ensure the source of SET0 is a MEM, possibly buried inside
2697 && (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0
)) == MEM
2698 || ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0
)) == ZERO_EXTEND
2699 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0
)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
2700 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set0
), 0)) == MEM
))
2701 && (set3
= single_set (i3
))
2702 /* Ensure the destination of SET3 is a MEM. */
2703 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set3
)) == MEM
2704 /* Would it be better to extract the base address for the MEM
2705 in SET3 and look for that? I don't have cases where it matters
2706 but I could envision such cases. */
2707 && rtx_referenced_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (set3
), 0), SET_SRC (set0
)))
2710 if (ngood
< 2 && nshift
< 2)
2714 /* Exit early if one of the insns involved can't be used for
2717 || (i1
&& CALL_P (i1
))
2718 || (i0
&& CALL_P (i0
))
2719 || cant_combine_insn_p (i3
)
2720 || cant_combine_insn_p (i2
)
2721 || (i1
&& cant_combine_insn_p (i1
))
2722 || (i0
&& cant_combine_insn_p (i0
))
2723 || likely_spilled_retval_p (i3
))
2727 undobuf
.other_insn
= 0;
2729 /* Reset the hard register usage information. */
2730 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs
);
2732 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
2735 fprintf (dump_file
, "\nTrying %d, %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2736 INSN_UID (i0
), INSN_UID (i1
), INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
2738 fprintf (dump_file
, "\nTrying %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2739 INSN_UID (i1
), INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
2741 fprintf (dump_file
, "\nTrying %d -> %d:\n",
2742 INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
2745 /* If multiple insns feed into one of I2 or I3, they can be in any
2746 order. To simplify the code below, reorder them in sequence. */
2747 if (i0
&& DF_INSN_LUID (i0
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
2749 if (i0
&& DF_INSN_LUID (i0
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i1
))
2751 if (i1
&& DF_INSN_LUID (i1
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
2754 added_links_insn
= 0;
2756 /* First check for one important special case that the code below will
2757 not handle. Namely, the case where I1 is zero, I2 is a PARALLEL
2758 and I3 is a SET whose SET_SRC is a SET_DEST in I2. In that case,
2759 we may be able to replace that destination with the destination of I3.
2760 This occurs in the common code where we compute both a quotient and
2761 remainder into a structure, in which case we want to do the computation
2762 directly into the structure to avoid register-register copies.
2764 Note that this case handles both multiple sets in I2 and also cases
2765 where I2 has a number of CLOBBERs inside the PARALLEL.
2767 We make very conservative checks below and only try to handle the
2768 most common cases of this. For example, we only handle the case
2769 where I2 and I3 are adjacent to avoid making difficult register
2772 if (i1
== 0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (i3
) && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
2773 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2774 && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2775 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_DEAD
, SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2776 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2
)) == PARALLEL
2777 && ! side_effects_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)))
2778 /* If the dest of I3 is a ZERO_EXTRACT or STRICT_LOW_PART, the code
2779 below would need to check what is inside (and reg_overlap_mentioned_p
2780 doesn't support those codes anyway). Don't allow those destinations;
2781 the resulting insn isn't likely to be recognized anyway. */
2782 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
2783 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
2784 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)),
2785 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)))
2786 && next_active_insn (i2
) == i3
)
2788 rtx p2
= PATTERN (i2
);
2790 /* Make sure that the destination of I3,
2791 which we are going to substitute into one output of I2,
2792 is not used within another output of I2. We must avoid making this:
2793 (parallel [(set (mem (reg 69)) ...)
2794 (set (reg 69) ...)])
2795 which is not well-defined as to order of actions.
2796 (Besides, reload can't handle output reloads for this.)
2798 The problem can also happen if the dest of I3 is a memory ref,
2799 if another dest in I2 is an indirect memory ref.
2801 Neither can this PARALLEL be an asm. We do not allow combining
2802 that usually (see can_combine_p), so do not here either. */
2804 for (i
= 0; ok
&& i
< XVECLEN (p2
, 0); i
++)
2806 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET
2807 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
2808 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)),
2809 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
))))
2811 else if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET
2812 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
))) == ASM_OPERANDS
)
2817 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (p2
, 0); i
++)
2818 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET
2819 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2824 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
2826 added_sets_2
= added_sets_1
= added_sets_0
= 0;
2827 i2src
= SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
));
2828 i2dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
));
2829 i2dest_killed
= dead_or_set_p (i2
, i2dest
);
2831 /* Replace the dest in I2 with our dest and make the resulting
2832 insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we validate
2833 the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2834 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)), SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)));
2836 i3_subst_into_i2
= 1;
2837 goto validate_replacement
;
2841 /* If I2 is setting a pseudo to a constant and I3 is setting some
2842 sub-part of it to another constant, merge them by making a new
2845 && (temp_expr
= single_set (i2
)) != 0
2846 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (temp_expr
))
2847 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
2848 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2849 && reg_subword_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)), SET_DEST (temp_expr
)))
2851 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
));
2855 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
2857 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest
, 1))
2858 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest
, 2)))
2860 width
= INTVAL (XEXP (dest
, 1));
2861 offset
= INTVAL (XEXP (dest
, 2));
2862 dest
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
2863 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
2864 offset
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
)) - width
- offset
;
2869 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
2870 dest
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
2871 width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
));
2877 /* If this is the low part, we're done. */
2878 if (subreg_lowpart_p (dest
))
2880 /* Handle the case where inner is twice the size of outer. */
2881 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr
)))
2882 == 2 * GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
)))
2883 offset
+= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
));
2884 /* Otherwise give up for now. */
2891 rtx inner
= SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
));
2892 rtx outer
= SET_SRC (temp_expr
);
2895 = wi::insert (rtx_mode_t (outer
, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr
))),
2896 rtx_mode_t (inner
, GET_MODE (dest
)),
2901 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
2902 added_sets_2
= added_sets_1
= added_sets_0
= 0;
2903 i2dest
= SET_DEST (temp_expr
);
2904 i2dest_killed
= dead_or_set_p (i2
, i2dest
);
2906 /* Replace the source in I2 with the new constant and make the
2907 resulting insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we
2908 validate the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2909 SUBST (SET_SRC (temp_expr
),
2910 immed_wide_int_const (o
, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr
))));
2912 newpat
= PATTERN (i2
);
2914 /* The dest of I3 has been replaced with the dest of I2. */
2915 changed_i3_dest
= 1;
2916 goto validate_replacement
;
2920 /* If we have no I1 and I2 looks like:
2921 (parallel [(set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC OP (const_int 0)))
2923 make up a dummy I1 that is
2926 (set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC Y (const_int 0)))
2928 (We can ignore any trailing CLOBBERs.)
2930 This undoes a previous combination and allows us to match a branch-and-
2933 if (!HAVE_cc0
&& i1
== 0
2934 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2
), 2)
2935 && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0))))
2937 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0))) == COMPARE
2938 && XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), 1) == const0_rtx
2939 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), 0),
2940 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)))
2941 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), i2
, i3
)
2942 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)), i2
, i3
))
2944 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2945 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2946 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2947 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2949 i1
= gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode
, NULL
, i2
, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2
),
2950 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1), INSN_LOCATION (i2
),
2952 INSN_UID (i1
) = INSN_UID (i2
);
2954 SUBST (PATTERN (i2
), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0));
2955 SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i2
)), 0),
2956 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1
)));
2957 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1
)));
2958 SUBST_LINK (LOG_LINKS (i2
),
2959 alloc_insn_link (i1
, regno
, LOG_LINKS (i2
)));
2962 /* If I2 is a PARALLEL of two SETs of REGs (and perhaps some CLOBBERs),
2963 make those two SETs separate I1 and I2 insns, and make an I0 that is
2965 if (!HAVE_cc0
&& i0
== 0
2966 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2
), 2)
2967 && can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (i2
, 2)
2968 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), i2
, i3
)
2969 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)), i2
, i3
))
2971 /* If there is no I1, there is no I0 either. */
2974 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2975 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2976 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2977 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2979 i1
= gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode
, NULL
, i2
, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2
),
2980 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0), INSN_LOCATION (i2
),
2982 INSN_UID (i1
) = INSN_UID (i2
);
2984 SUBST (PATTERN (i2
), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1));
2987 /* Verify that I2 and I1 are valid for combining. */
2988 if (! can_combine_p (i2
, i3
, i0
, i1
, NULL
, NULL
, &i2dest
, &i2src
)
2989 || (i1
&& ! can_combine_p (i1
, i3
, i0
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
,
2991 || (i0
&& ! can_combine_p (i0
, i3
, NULL
, NULL
, i1
, i2
,
2998 /* Record whether I2DEST is used in I2SRC and similarly for the other
2999 cases. Knowing this will help in register status updating below. */
3000 i2dest_in_i2src
= reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, i2src
);
3001 i1dest_in_i1src
= i1
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, i1src
);
3002 i2dest_in_i1src
= i1
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, i1src
);
3003 i0dest_in_i0src
= i0
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, i0src
);
3004 i1dest_in_i0src
= i0
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, i0src
);
3005 i2dest_in_i0src
= i0
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, i0src
);
3006 i2dest_killed
= dead_or_set_p (i2
, i2dest
);
3007 i1dest_killed
= i1
&& dead_or_set_p (i1
, i1dest
);
3008 i0dest_killed
= i0
&& dead_or_set_p (i0
, i0dest
);
3010 /* For the earlier insns, determine which of the subsequent ones they
3012 i1_feeds_i2_n
= i1
&& insn_a_feeds_b (i1
, i2
);
3013 i0_feeds_i1_n
= i0
&& insn_a_feeds_b (i0
, i1
);
3014 i0_feeds_i2_n
= (i0
&& (!i0_feeds_i1_n
? insn_a_feeds_b (i0
, i2
)
3015 : (!reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, i0dest
)
3016 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, i2src
))));
3018 /* Ensure that I3's pattern can be the destination of combines. */
3019 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3
, &PATTERN (i3
), i2dest
, i1dest
, i0dest
,
3020 i1
&& i2dest_in_i1src
&& !i1_feeds_i2_n
,
3021 i0
&& ((i2dest_in_i0src
&& !i0_feeds_i2_n
)
3022 || (i1dest_in_i0src
&& !i0_feeds_i1_n
)),
3029 /* See if any of the insns is a MULT operation. Unless one is, we will
3030 reject a combination that is, since it must be slower. Be conservative
3032 if (GET_CODE (i2src
) == MULT
3033 || (i1
!= 0 && GET_CODE (i1src
) == MULT
)
3034 || (i0
!= 0 && GET_CODE (i0src
) == MULT
)
3035 || (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
3036 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
))) == MULT
))
3039 /* If I3 has an inc, then give up if I1 or I2 uses the reg that is inc'd.
3040 We used to do this EXCEPT in one case: I3 has a post-inc in an
3041 output operand. However, that exception can give rise to insns like
3043 which is a famous insn on the PDP-11 where the value of r3 used as the
3044 source was model-dependent. Avoid this sort of thing. */
3047 if (!(GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
3048 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
3049 && MEM_P (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)))
3050 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)), 0)) == POST_INC
3051 || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)), 0)) == POST_DEC
)))
3052 /* It's not the exception. */
3057 for (link
= REG_NOTES (i3
); link
; link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
3058 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_INC
3059 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (i2
))
3061 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (i1
)))))
3068 /* See if the SETs in I1 or I2 need to be kept around in the merged
3069 instruction: whenever the value set there is still needed past I3.
3070 For the SET in I2, this is easy: we see if I2DEST dies or is set in I3.
3072 For the SET in I1, we have two cases: if I1 and I2 independently feed
3073 into I3, the set in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies
3074 or is set in I3. Otherwise (if I1 feeds I2 which feeds I3), the set
3075 in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies or is set in either
3076 I2 or I3. The same considerations apply to I0. */
3078 added_sets_2
= !dead_or_set_p (i3
, i2dest
);
3081 added_sets_1
= !(dead_or_set_p (i3
, i1dest
)
3082 || (i1_feeds_i2_n
&& dead_or_set_p (i2
, i1dest
)));
3087 added_sets_0
= !(dead_or_set_p (i3
, i0dest
)
3088 || (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& dead_or_set_p (i1
, i0dest
))
3089 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n
|| (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
))
3090 && dead_or_set_p (i2
, i0dest
)));
3094 /* We are about to copy insns for the case where they need to be kept
3095 around. Check that they can be copied in the merged instruction. */
3097 if (targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p
3098 && ((added_sets_2
&& targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p (i2
))
3099 || (i1
&& added_sets_1
&& targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p (i1
))
3100 || (i0
&& added_sets_0
&& targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p (i0
))))
3106 /* If the set in I2 needs to be kept around, we must make a copy of
3107 PATTERN (I2), so that when we substitute I1SRC for I1DEST in
3108 PATTERN (I2), we are only substituting for the original I1DEST, not into
3109 an already-substituted copy. This also prevents making self-referential
3110 rtx. If I2 is a PARALLEL, we just need the piece that assigns I2SRC to
3115 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2
)) == PARALLEL
)
3116 i2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i2dest
, copy_rtx (i2src
));
3118 i2pat
= copy_rtx (PATTERN (i2
));
3123 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i1
)) == PARALLEL
)
3124 i1pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i1dest
, copy_rtx (i1src
));
3126 i1pat
= copy_rtx (PATTERN (i1
));
3131 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i0
)) == PARALLEL
)
3132 i0pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i0dest
, copy_rtx (i0src
));
3134 i0pat
= copy_rtx (PATTERN (i0
));
3139 /* Substitute in the latest insn for the regs set by the earlier ones. */
3141 maxreg
= max_reg_num ();
3145 /* Many machines that don't use CC0 have insns that can both perform an
3146 arithmetic operation and set the condition code. These operations will
3147 be represented as a PARALLEL with the first element of the vector
3148 being a COMPARE of an arithmetic operation with the constant zero.
3149 The second element of the vector will set some pseudo to the result
3150 of the same arithmetic operation. If we simplify the COMPARE, we won't
3151 match such a pattern and so will generate an extra insn. Here we test
3152 for this case, where both the comparison and the operation result are
3153 needed, and make the PARALLEL by just replacing I2DEST in I3SRC with
3154 I2SRC. Later we will make the PARALLEL that contains I2. */
3156 if (!HAVE_cc0
&& i1
== 0 && added_sets_2
&& GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
3157 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
))) == COMPARE
3158 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)), 1))
3159 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)), 0), i2dest
))
3162 rtx
*cc_use_loc
= NULL
;
3163 rtx_insn
*cc_use_insn
= NULL
;
3164 rtx op0
= i2src
, op1
= XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)), 1);
3165 machine_mode compare_mode
, orig_compare_mode
;
3166 enum rtx_code compare_code
= UNKNOWN
, orig_compare_code
= UNKNOWN
;
3168 newpat
= PATTERN (i3
);
3169 newpat_dest
= SET_DEST (newpat
);
3170 compare_mode
= orig_compare_mode
= GET_MODE (newpat_dest
);
3172 if (undobuf
.other_insn
== 0
3173 && (cc_use_loc
= find_single_use (SET_DEST (newpat
), i3
,
3176 compare_code
= orig_compare_code
= GET_CODE (*cc_use_loc
);
3177 compare_code
= simplify_compare_const (compare_code
,
3178 GET_MODE (i2dest
), op0
, &op1
);
3179 target_canonicalize_comparison (&compare_code
, &op0
, &op1
, 1);
3182 /* Do the rest only if op1 is const0_rtx, which may be the
3183 result of simplification. */
3184 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
3186 /* If a single use of the CC is found, prepare to modify it
3187 when SELECT_CC_MODE returns a new CC-class mode, or when
3188 the above simplify_compare_const() returned a new comparison
3189 operator. undobuf.other_insn is assigned the CC use insn
3190 when modifying it. */
3193 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
3194 machine_mode new_mode
3195 = SELECT_CC_MODE (compare_code
, op0
, op1
);
3196 if (new_mode
!= orig_compare_mode
3197 && can_change_dest_mode (SET_DEST (newpat
),
3198 added_sets_2
, new_mode
))
3200 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (newpat_dest
);
3201 compare_mode
= new_mode
;
3202 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3203 newpat_dest
= gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode
, regno
);
3206 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx
[regno
], compare_mode
);
3207 newpat_dest
= regno_reg_rtx
[regno
];
3211 /* Cases for modifying the CC-using comparison. */
3212 if (compare_code
!= orig_compare_code
3213 /* ??? Do we need to verify the zero rtx? */
3214 && XEXP (*cc_use_loc
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
3216 /* Replace cc_use_loc with entire new RTX. */
3218 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code
, compare_mode
,
3219 newpat_dest
, const0_rtx
));
3220 undobuf
.other_insn
= cc_use_insn
;
3222 else if (compare_mode
!= orig_compare_mode
)
3224 /* Just replace the CC reg with a new mode. */
3225 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use_loc
, 0), newpat_dest
);
3226 undobuf
.other_insn
= cc_use_insn
;
3230 /* Now we modify the current newpat:
3231 First, SET_DEST(newpat) is updated if the CC mode has been
3232 altered. For targets without SELECT_CC_MODE, this should be
3234 if (compare_mode
!= orig_compare_mode
)
3235 SUBST (SET_DEST (newpat
), newpat_dest
);
3236 /* This is always done to propagate i2src into newpat. */
3237 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat
),
3238 gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode
, op0
, op1
));
3239 /* Create new version of i2pat if needed; the below PARALLEL
3240 creation needs this to work correctly. */
3241 if (! rtx_equal_p (i2src
, op0
))
3242 i2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i2dest
, op0
);
3247 if (i2_is_used
== 0)
3249 /* It is possible that the source of I2 or I1 may be performing
3250 an unneeded operation, such as a ZERO_EXTEND of something
3251 that is known to have the high part zero. Handle that case
3252 by letting subst look at the inner insns.
3254 Another way to do this would be to have a function that tries
3255 to simplify a single insn instead of merging two or more
3256 insns. We don't do this because of the potential of infinite
3257 loops and because of the potential extra memory required.
3258 However, doing it the way we are is a bit of a kludge and
3259 doesn't catch all cases.
3261 But only do this if -fexpensive-optimizations since it slows
3262 things down and doesn't usually win.
3264 This is not done in the COMPARE case above because the
3265 unmodified I2PAT is used in the PARALLEL and so a pattern
3266 with a modified I2SRC would not match. */
3268 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
)
3270 /* Pass pc_rtx so no substitutions are done, just
3274 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i1
);
3275 i1src
= subst (i1src
, pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
3278 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
3279 i2src
= subst (i2src
, pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
3282 n_occurrences
= 0; /* `subst' counts here */
3283 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
3285 /* If I1 feeds into I2 and I1DEST is in I1SRC, we need to make a unique
3286 copy of I2SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3287 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I1SRC for I1DEST
3288 later. Likewise if I0 feeds into I2, either directly or indirectly
3289 through I1, and I0DEST is in I0SRC. */
3290 newpat
= subst (PATTERN (i3
), i2dest
, i2src
, 0, 0,
3291 (i1_feeds_i2_n
&& i1dest_in_i1src
)
3292 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n
|| (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
))
3293 && i0dest_in_i0src
));
3296 /* Record whether I2's body now appears within I3's body. */
3297 i2_is_used
= n_occurrences
;
3300 /* If we already got a failure, don't try to do more. Otherwise, try to
3301 substitute I1 if we have it. */
3303 if (i1
&& GET_CODE (newpat
) != CLOBBER
)
3305 /* Check that an autoincrement side-effect on I1 has not been lost.
3306 This happens if I1DEST is mentioned in I2 and dies there, and
3307 has disappeared from the new pattern. */
3308 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3310 && dead_or_set_p (i2
, i1dest
)
3311 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, newpat
))
3312 /* Before we can do this substitution, we must redo the test done
3313 above (see detailed comments there) that ensures I1DEST isn't
3314 mentioned in any SETs in NEWPAT that are field assignments. */
3315 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL
, &newpat
, i1dest
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
3323 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i1
);
3325 /* If the following substitution will modify I1SRC, make a copy of it
3326 for the case where it is substituted for I1DEST in I2PAT later. */
3327 if (added_sets_2
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
)
3328 i1src_copy
= copy_rtx (i1src
);
3330 /* If I0 feeds into I1 and I0DEST is in I0SRC, we need to make a unique
3331 copy of I1SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3332 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I0SRC for I0DEST
3334 newpat
= subst (newpat
, i1dest
, i1src
, 0, 0,
3335 i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i0dest_in_i0src
);
3338 /* Record whether I1's body now appears within I3's body. */
3339 i1_is_used
= n_occurrences
;
3342 /* Likewise for I0 if we have it. */
3344 if (i0
&& GET_CODE (newpat
) != CLOBBER
)
3346 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3347 && ((i0_feeds_i2_n
&& dead_or_set_p (i2
, i0dest
))
3348 || (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& dead_or_set_p (i1
, i0dest
)))
3349 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, newpat
))
3350 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL
, &newpat
, i0dest
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
3357 /* If the following substitution will modify I0SRC, make a copy of it
3358 for the case where it is substituted for I0DEST in I1PAT later. */
3359 if (added_sets_1
&& i0_feeds_i1_n
)
3360 i0src_copy
= copy_rtx (i0src
);
3361 /* And a copy for I0DEST in I2PAT substitution. */
3362 if (added_sets_2
&& ((i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
)
3363 || (i0_feeds_i2_n
)))
3364 i0src_copy2
= copy_rtx (i0src
);
3367 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i0
);
3368 newpat
= subst (newpat
, i0dest
, i0src
, 0, 0, 0);
3372 /* Fail if an autoincrement side-effect has been duplicated. Be careful
3373 to count all the ways that I2SRC and I1SRC can be used. */
3374 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i2
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3375 && i2_is_used
+ added_sets_2
> 1)
3376 || (i1
!= 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3377 && (i1_is_used
+ added_sets_1
+ (added_sets_2
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
)
3379 || (i0
!= 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3380 && (n_occurrences
+ added_sets_0
3381 + (added_sets_1
&& i0_feeds_i1_n
)
3382 + (added_sets_2
&& i0_feeds_i2_n
)
3384 /* Fail if we tried to make a new register. */
3385 || max_reg_num () != maxreg
3386 /* Fail if we couldn't do something and have a CLOBBER. */
3387 || GET_CODE (newpat
) == CLOBBER
3388 /* Fail if this new pattern is a MULT and we didn't have one before
3389 at the outer level. */
3390 || (GET_CODE (newpat
) == SET
&& GET_CODE (SET_SRC (newpat
)) == MULT
3397 /* If the actions of the earlier insns must be kept
3398 in addition to substituting them into the latest one,
3399 we must make a new PARALLEL for the latest insn
3400 to hold additional the SETs. */
3402 if (added_sets_0
|| added_sets_1
|| added_sets_2
)
3404 int extra_sets
= added_sets_0
+ added_sets_1
+ added_sets_2
;
3407 if (GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
)
3409 rtvec old
= XVEC (newpat
, 0);
3410 total_sets
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) + extra_sets
;
3411 newpat
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, rtvec_alloc (total_sets
));
3412 memcpy (XVEC (newpat
, 0)->elem
, &old
->elem
[0],
3413 sizeof (old
->elem
[0]) * old
->num_elem
);
3418 total_sets
= 1 + extra_sets
;
3419 newpat
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, rtvec_alloc (total_sets
));
3420 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0) = old
;
3424 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, --total_sets
) = i0pat
;
3430 t
= subst (t
, i0dest
, i0src_copy
? i0src_copy
: i0src
, 0, 0, 0);
3432 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, --total_sets
) = t
;
3438 t
= subst (t
, i1dest
, i1src_copy
? i1src_copy
: i1src
, 0, 0,
3439 i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i0dest_in_i0src
);
3440 if ((i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
) || i0_feeds_i2_n
)
3441 t
= subst (t
, i0dest
, i0src_copy2
? i0src_copy2
: i0src
, 0, 0, 0);
3443 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, --total_sets
) = t
;
3447 validate_replacement
:
3449 /* Note which hard regs this insn has as inputs. */
3450 mark_used_regs_combine (newpat
);
3452 /* If recog_for_combine fails, it strips existing clobbers. If we'll
3453 consider splitting this pattern, we might need these clobbers. */
3454 if (i1
&& GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
3455 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) - 1)) == CLOBBER
)
3457 int len
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0);
3459 newpat_vec_with_clobbers
= rtvec_alloc (len
);
3460 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
3461 RTVEC_ELT (newpat_vec_with_clobbers
, i
) = XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
);
3464 /* We have recognized nothing yet. */
3465 insn_code_number
= -1;
3467 /* See if this is a PARALLEL of two SETs where one SET's destination is
3468 a register that is unused and this isn't marked as an instruction that
3469 might trap in an EH region. In that case, we just need the other SET.
3470 We prefer this over the PARALLEL.
3472 This can occur when simplifying a divmod insn. We *must* test for this
3473 case here because the code below that splits two independent SETs doesn't
3474 handle this case correctly when it updates the register status.
3476 It's pointless doing this if we originally had two sets, one from
3477 i3, and one from i2. Combining then splitting the parallel results
3478 in the original i2 again plus an invalid insn (which we delete).
3479 The net effect is only to move instructions around, which makes
3480 debug info less accurate. */
3482 if (!(added_sets_2
&& i1
== 0)
3483 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (newpat
, 2)
3484 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0)
3486 rtx set0
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0);
3487 rtx set1
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1);
3488 rtx oldpat
= newpat
;
3490 if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set1
))
3491 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, SET_DEST (set1
)))
3492 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1
)) == SUBREG
3493 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1
)))))
3494 && insn_nothrow_p (i3
)
3495 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set1
)))
3498 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3501 else if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set0
))
3502 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, SET_DEST (set0
)))
3503 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0
)) == SUBREG
3504 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
,
3505 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0
)))))
3506 && insn_nothrow_p (i3
)
3507 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set0
)))
3510 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3512 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3513 changed_i3_dest
= 1;
3516 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
3520 /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */
3521 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
3522 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3524 /* If we were combining three insns and the result is a simple SET
3525 with no ASM_OPERANDS that wasn't recognized, try to split it into two
3526 insns. There are two ways to do this. It can be split using a
3527 machine-specific method (like when you have an addition of a large
3528 constant) or by combine in the function find_split_point. */
3530 if (i1
&& insn_code_number
< 0 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == SET
3531 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0)
3533 rtx parallel
, *split
;
3534 rtx_insn
*m_split_insn
;
3536 /* See if the MD file can split NEWPAT. If it can't, see if letting it
3537 use I2DEST as a scratch register will help. In the latter case,
3538 convert I2DEST to the mode of the source of NEWPAT if we can. */
3540 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (newpat
, i3
);
3542 /* We can only use I2DEST as a scratch reg if it doesn't overlap any
3543 inputs of NEWPAT. */
3545 /* ??? If I2DEST is not safe, and I1DEST exists, then it would be
3546 possible to try that as a scratch reg. This would require adding
3547 more code to make it work though. */
3549 if (m_split_insn
== 0 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, newpat
))
3551 machine_mode new_mode
= GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat
));
3553 /* ??? Reusing i2dest without resetting the reg_stat entry for it
3554 (temporarily, until we are committed to this instruction
3555 combination) does not work: for example, any call to nonzero_bits
3556 on the register (from a splitter in the MD file, for example)
3557 will get the old information, which is invalid.
3559 Since nowadays we can create registers during combine just fine,
3560 we should just create a new one here, not reuse i2dest. */
3562 /* First try to split using the original register as a
3563 scratch register. */
3564 parallel
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
,
3565 gen_rtvec (2, newpat
,
3566 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
,
3568 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (parallel
, i3
);
3570 /* If that didn't work, try changing the mode of I2DEST if
3572 if (m_split_insn
== 0
3573 && new_mode
!= GET_MODE (i2dest
)
3574 && new_mode
!= VOIDmode
3575 && can_change_dest_mode (i2dest
, added_sets_2
, new_mode
))
3577 machine_mode old_mode
= GET_MODE (i2dest
);
3580 if (REGNO (i2dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3581 ni2dest
= gen_rtx_REG (new_mode
, REGNO (i2dest
));
3584 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)], new_mode
);
3585 ni2dest
= regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)];
3588 parallel
= (gen_rtx_PARALLEL
3590 gen_rtvec (2, newpat
,
3591 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
,
3593 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (parallel
, i3
);
3595 if (m_split_insn
== 0
3596 && REGNO (i2dest
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3600 adjust_reg_mode (regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)], old_mode
);
3601 buf
= undobuf
.undos
;
3602 undobuf
.undos
= buf
->next
;
3603 buf
->next
= undobuf
.frees
;
3604 undobuf
.frees
= buf
;
3608 i2scratch
= m_split_insn
!= 0;
3611 /* If recog_for_combine has discarded clobbers, try to use them
3612 again for the split. */
3613 if (m_split_insn
== 0 && newpat_vec_with_clobbers
)
3615 parallel
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, newpat_vec_with_clobbers
);
3616 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (parallel
, i3
);
3619 if (m_split_insn
&& NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
) == NULL_RTX
)
3621 rtx m_split_pat
= PATTERN (m_split_insn
);
3622 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&m_split_pat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3623 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3624 newpat
= m_split_pat
;
3626 else if (m_split_insn
&& NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
)) == NULL_RTX
3627 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
3628 || ! use_crosses_set_p (PATTERN (m_split_insn
), DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))))
3631 rtx newi3pat
= PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
));
3632 newi2pat
= PATTERN (m_split_insn
);
3634 i3set
= single_set (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
));
3635 i2set
= single_set (m_split_insn
);
3637 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3639 /* If I2 or I3 has multiple SETs, we won't know how to track
3640 register status, so don't use these insns. If I2's destination
3641 is used between I2 and I3, we also can't use these insns. */
3643 if (i2_code_number
>= 0 && i2set
&& i3set
3644 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
3645 || ! reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (i2set
), i2
, i3
)))
3646 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi3pat
, i3
,
3648 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3651 /* It is possible that both insns now set the destination of I3.
3652 If so, we must show an extra use of it. */
3654 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3656 rtx new_i3_dest
= SET_DEST (i3set
);
3657 rtx new_i2_dest
= SET_DEST (i2set
);
3659 while (GET_CODE (new_i3_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3660 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3661 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest
) == SUBREG
)
3662 new_i3_dest
= XEXP (new_i3_dest
, 0);
3664 while (GET_CODE (new_i2_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3665 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3666 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest
) == SUBREG
)
3667 new_i2_dest
= XEXP (new_i2_dest
, 0);
3669 if (REG_P (new_i3_dest
)
3670 && REG_P (new_i2_dest
)
3671 && REGNO (new_i3_dest
) == REGNO (new_i2_dest
)
3672 && REGNO (new_i2_dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
3673 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (new_i2_dest
), 1);
3677 /* If we can split it and use I2DEST, go ahead and see if that
3678 helps things be recognized. Verify that none of the registers
3679 are set between I2 and I3. */
3680 if (insn_code_number
< 0
3681 && (split
= find_split_point (&newpat
, i3
, false)) != 0
3682 && (!HAVE_cc0
|| REG_P (i2dest
))
3683 /* We need I2DEST in the proper mode. If it is a hard register
3684 or the only use of a pseudo, we can change its mode.
3685 Make sure we don't change a hard register to have a mode that
3686 isn't valid for it, or change the number of registers. */
3687 && (GET_MODE (*split
) == GET_MODE (i2dest
)
3688 || GET_MODE (*split
) == VOIDmode
3689 || can_change_dest_mode (i2dest
, added_sets_2
,
3691 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
3692 || ! use_crosses_set_p (*split
, DF_INSN_LUID (i2
)))
3693 /* We can't overwrite I2DEST if its value is still used by
3695 && ! reg_referenced_p (i2dest
, newpat
))
3697 rtx newdest
= i2dest
;
3698 enum rtx_code split_code
= GET_CODE (*split
);
3699 machine_mode split_mode
= GET_MODE (*split
);
3700 bool subst_done
= false;
3701 newi2pat
= NULL_RTX
;
3705 /* *SPLIT may be part of I2SRC, so make sure we have the
3706 original expression around for later debug processing.
3707 We should not need I2SRC any more in other cases. */
3708 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS
)
3709 i2src
= copy_rtx (i2src
);
3713 /* Get NEWDEST as a register in the proper mode. We have already
3714 validated that we can do this. */
3715 if (GET_MODE (i2dest
) != split_mode
&& split_mode
!= VOIDmode
)
3717 if (REGNO (i2dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3718 newdest
= gen_rtx_REG (split_mode
, REGNO (i2dest
));
3721 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)], split_mode
);
3722 newdest
= regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)];
3726 /* If *SPLIT is a (mult FOO (const_int pow2)), convert it to
3727 an ASHIFT. This can occur if it was inside a PLUS and hence
3728 appeared to be a memory address. This is a kludge. */
3729 if (split_code
== MULT
3730 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*split
, 1))
3731 && INTVAL (XEXP (*split
, 1)) > 0
3732 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (*split
, 1)))) >= 0)
3734 SUBST (*split
, gen_rtx_ASHIFT (split_mode
,
3735 XEXP (*split
, 0), GEN_INT (i
)));
3736 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3738 split_code
= GET_CODE (*split
);
3741 /* Similarly for (plus (mult FOO (const_int pow2))). */
3742 if (split_code
== PLUS
3743 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*split
, 0)) == MULT
3744 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (*split
, 0), 1))
3745 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split
, 0), 1)) > 0
3746 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split
, 0), 1)))) >= 0)
3748 rtx nsplit
= XEXP (*split
, 0);
3749 SUBST (XEXP (*split
, 0), gen_rtx_ASHIFT (GET_MODE (nsplit
),
3750 XEXP (nsplit
, 0), GEN_INT (i
)));
3751 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3753 split_code
= GET_CODE (*split
);
3756 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
3757 /* If *SPLIT is a paradoxical SUBREG, when we split it, it should
3758 be written as a ZERO_EXTEND. */
3759 if (split_code
== SUBREG
&& MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (*split
)))
3761 /* Or as a SIGN_EXTEND if LOAD_EXTEND_OP says that that's
3762 what it really is. */
3763 if (load_extend_op (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*split
)))
3765 SUBST (*split
, gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (split_mode
,
3766 SUBREG_REG (*split
)));
3768 SUBST (*split
, gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (split_mode
,
3769 SUBREG_REG (*split
)));
3773 /* Attempt to split binary operators using arithmetic identities. */
3774 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (newpat
))
3775 && split_mode
== GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat
))
3776 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (newpat
)))
3778 rtx setsrc
= SET_SRC (newpat
);
3779 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (setsrc
);
3780 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (setsrc
);
3781 rtx src_op0
= XEXP (setsrc
, 0);
3782 rtx src_op1
= XEXP (setsrc
, 1);
3784 /* Split "X = Y op Y" as "Z = Y; X = Z op Z". */
3785 if (rtx_equal_p (src_op0
, src_op1
))
3787 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, src_op0
);
3788 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 0), newdest
);
3789 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 1), newdest
);
3792 /* Split "((P op Q) op R) op S" where op is PLUS or MULT. */
3793 else if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MULT
)
3794 && GET_CODE (src_op0
) == code
3795 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_op0
, 0)) == code
3796 && (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode
)
3797 || (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
)
3798 && flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)))
3800 rtx p
= XEXP (XEXP (src_op0
, 0), 0);
3801 rtx q
= XEXP (XEXP (src_op0
, 0), 1);
3802 rtx r
= XEXP (src_op0
, 1);
3805 /* Split both "((X op Y) op X) op Y" and
3806 "((X op Y) op Y) op X" as "T op T" where T is
3808 if ((rtx_equal_p (p
,r
) && rtx_equal_p (q
,s
))
3809 || (rtx_equal_p (p
,s
) && rtx_equal_p (q
,r
)))
3811 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, XEXP (src_op0
, 0));
3812 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 0), newdest
);
3813 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 1), newdest
);
3816 /* Split "((X op X) op Y) op Y)" as "T op T" where
3818 else if (rtx_equal_p (p
,q
) && rtx_equal_p (r
,s
))
3820 rtx tmp
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, p
, r
);
3821 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, tmp
);
3822 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 0), newdest
);
3823 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 1), newdest
);
3831 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, *split
);
3832 SUBST (*split
, newdest
);
3835 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3837 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3838 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3839 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat
) == PARALLEL
)
3840 for (i
= XVECLEN (newi2pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
3841 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
3843 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
), 0);
3844 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, newpat
))
3851 /* If the split point was a MULT and we didn't have one before,
3852 don't use one now. */
3853 if (i2_code_number
>= 0 && ! (split_code
== MULT
&& ! have_mult
))
3854 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3858 /* Check for a case where we loaded from memory in a narrow mode and
3859 then sign extended it, but we need both registers. In that case,
3860 we have a PARALLEL with both loads from the same memory location.
3861 We can split this into a load from memory followed by a register-register
3862 copy. This saves at least one insn, more if register allocation can
3865 We cannot do this if the destination of the first assignment is a
3866 condition code register or cc0. We eliminate this case by making sure
3867 the SET_DEST and SET_SRC have the same mode.
3869 We cannot do this if the destination of the second assignment is
3870 a register that we have already assumed is zero-extended. Similarly
3871 for a SUBREG of such a register. */
3873 else if (i1
&& insn_code_number
< 0 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0
3874 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
3875 && XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) == 2
3876 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)) == SET
3877 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))) == SIGN_EXTEND
3878 && (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)))
3879 == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))))
3880 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)) == SET
3881 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3882 XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)), 0))
3883 && ! use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3885 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3886 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3887 && ! (temp_expr
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3889 && reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
!= 0
3890 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3891 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3892 && (reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
3893 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode
))))
3894 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) == SUBREG
3895 && (temp_expr
= SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))),
3897 && reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
!= 0
3898 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3899 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3900 && (reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
3901 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode
)))))
3902 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3903 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)))
3904 && ! find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
,
3905 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))))
3909 newi2pat
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0);
3910 ni2dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0));
3911 newpat
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1);
3912 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat
),
3913 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat
)), ni2dest
));
3914 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3916 if (i2_code_number
>= 0)
3917 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3919 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3923 /* Similarly, check for a case where we have a PARALLEL of two independent
3924 SETs but we started with three insns. In this case, we can do the sets
3925 as two separate insns. This case occurs when some SET allows two
3926 other insns to combine, but the destination of that SET is still live.
3928 Also do this if we started with two insns and (at least) one of the
3929 resulting sets is a noop; this noop will be deleted later. */
3931 else if (insn_code_number
< 0 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0
3932 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
3933 && XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) == 2
3934 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)) == SET
3935 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)) == SET
3936 && (i1
|| set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))
3937 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)))
3938 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3939 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3940 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3941 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3942 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3943 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))
3944 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)),
3945 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))
3946 && ! (contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)))
3947 && contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)))))
3949 rtx set0
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0);
3950 rtx set1
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1);
3952 /* Normally, it doesn't matter which of the two is done first,
3953 but the one that references cc0 can't be the second, and
3954 one which uses any regs/memory set in between i2 and i3 can't
3955 be first. The PARALLEL might also have been pre-existing in i3,
3956 so we need to make sure that we won't wrongly hoist a SET to i2
3957 that would conflict with a death note present in there. */
3958 if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set1
), DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
3959 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set1
))
3960 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
, SET_DEST (set1
)))
3961 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1
)) == SUBREG
3962 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
,
3963 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1
))))
3964 && (!HAVE_cc0
|| !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx
, set0
))
3965 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set0 is a jump so that
3966 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3967 && (!JUMP_P (i3
) || SET_DEST (set0
) == pc_rtx
)
3973 else if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set0
), DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
3974 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set0
))
3975 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
, SET_DEST (set0
)))
3976 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0
)) == SUBREG
3977 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
,
3978 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0
))))
3979 && (!HAVE_cc0
|| !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx
, set1
))
3980 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set1 is a jump so that
3981 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3982 && (!JUMP_P (i3
) || SET_DEST (set1
) == pc_rtx
)
3994 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3996 if (i2_code_number
>= 0)
3998 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3999 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
4000 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat
) == PARALLEL
)
4002 for (i
= XVECLEN (newi2pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
4003 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
4005 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
), 0);
4006 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, newpat
))
4014 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
4018 /* If it still isn't recognized, fail and change things back the way they
4020 if ((insn_code_number
< 0
4021 /* Is the result a reasonable ASM_OPERANDS? */
4022 && (! check_asm_operands (newpat
) || added_sets_1
|| added_sets_2
)))
4028 /* If we had to change another insn, make sure it is valid also. */
4029 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4031 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs
);
4033 other_pat
= PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4034 other_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&other_pat
, undobuf
.other_insn
,
4037 if (other_code_number
< 0 && ! check_asm_operands (other_pat
))
4044 /* If I2 is the CC0 setter and I3 is the CC0 user then check whether
4045 they are adjacent to each other or not. */
4048 rtx_insn
*p
= prev_nonnote_insn (i3
);
4049 if (p
&& p
!= i2
&& NONJUMP_INSN_P (p
) && newi2pat
4050 && sets_cc0_p (newi2pat
))
4057 /* Only allow this combination if insn_rtx_costs reports that the
4058 replacement instructions are cheaper than the originals. */
4059 if (!combine_validate_cost (i0
, i1
, i2
, i3
, newpat
, newi2pat
, other_pat
))
4065 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS
)
4069 for (undo
= undobuf
.undos
; undo
; undo
= undo
->next
)
4070 if (undo
->kind
== UNDO_MODE
)
4072 rtx reg
= *undo
->where
.r
;
4073 machine_mode new_mode
= GET_MODE (reg
);
4074 machine_mode old_mode
= undo
->old_contents
.m
;
4076 /* Temporarily revert mode back. */
4077 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, old_mode
);
4079 if (reg
== i2dest
&& i2scratch
)
4081 /* If we used i2dest as a scratch register with a
4082 different mode, substitute it for the original
4083 i2src while its original mode is temporarily
4084 restored, and then clear i2scratch so that we don't
4085 do it again later. */
4086 propagate_for_debug (i2
, last_combined_insn
, reg
, i2src
,
4089 /* Put back the new mode. */
4090 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, new_mode
);
4094 rtx tempreg
= gen_raw_REG (old_mode
, REGNO (reg
));
4095 rtx_insn
*first
, *last
;
4100 last
= last_combined_insn
;
4105 last
= undobuf
.other_insn
;
4107 if (DF_INSN_LUID (last
)
4108 < DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn
))
4109 last
= last_combined_insn
;
4112 /* We're dealing with a reg that changed mode but not
4113 meaning, so we want to turn it into a subreg for
4114 the new mode. However, because of REG sharing and
4115 because its mode had already changed, we have to do
4116 it in two steps. First, replace any debug uses of
4117 reg, with its original mode temporarily restored,
4118 with this copy we have created; then, replace the
4119 copy with the SUBREG of the original shared reg,
4120 once again changed to the new mode. */
4121 propagate_for_debug (first
, last
, reg
, tempreg
,
4123 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, new_mode
);
4124 propagate_for_debug (first
, last
, tempreg
,
4125 lowpart_subreg (old_mode
, reg
, new_mode
),
4131 /* If we will be able to accept this, we have made a
4132 change to the destination of I3. This requires us to
4133 do a few adjustments. */
4135 if (changed_i3_dest
)
4137 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
4138 adjust_for_new_dest (i3
);
4141 /* We now know that we can do this combination. Merge the insns and
4142 update the status of registers and LOG_LINKS. */
4144 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4148 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
) = other_pat
;
4150 /* If any of the notes in OTHER_INSN were REG_DEAD or REG_UNUSED,
4151 ensure that they are still valid. Then add any non-duplicate
4152 notes added by recog_for_combine. */
4153 for (note
= REG_NOTES (undobuf
.other_insn
); note
; note
= next
)
4155 next
= XEXP (note
, 1);
4157 if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_DEAD
4158 && !reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0),
4159 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)))
4160 ||(REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_UNUSED
4161 && !reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0),
4162 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)))
4163 /* Simply drop equal note since it may be no longer valid
4164 for other_insn. It may be possible to record that CC
4165 register is changed and only discard those notes, but
4166 in practice it's unnecessary complication and doesn't
4167 give any meaningful improvement.
4170 || REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_EQUAL
4171 || REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_EQUIV
)
4172 remove_note (undobuf
.other_insn
, note
);
4175 distribute_notes (new_other_notes
, undobuf
.other_insn
,
4176 undobuf
.other_insn
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
4183 struct insn_link
*link
;
4186 /* I3 now uses what used to be its destination and which is now
4187 I2's destination. This requires us to do a few adjustments. */
4188 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
4189 adjust_for_new_dest (i3
);
4191 /* We need a LOG_LINK from I3 to I2. But we used to have one,
4194 However, some later insn might be using I2's dest and have
4195 a LOG_LINK pointing at I3. We must remove this link.
4196 The simplest way to remove the link is to point it at I1,
4197 which we know will be a NOTE. */
4199 /* newi2pat is usually a SET here; however, recog_for_combine might
4200 have added some clobbers. */
4201 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat
) == PARALLEL
)
4202 ni2dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, 0));
4204 ni2dest
= SET_DEST (newi2pat
);
4206 for (insn
= NEXT_INSN (i3
);
4207 insn
&& (this_basic_block
->next_bb
== EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)
4208 || insn
!= BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
->next_bb
));
4209 insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
4211 if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
)
4212 && reg_referenced_p (ni2dest
, PATTERN (insn
)))
4214 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, insn
)
4215 if (link
->insn
== i3
)
4224 rtx i3notes
, i2notes
, i1notes
= 0, i0notes
= 0;
4225 struct insn_link
*i3links
, *i2links
, *i1links
= 0, *i0links
= 0;
4228 /* Compute which registers we expect to eliminate. newi2pat may be setting
4229 either i3dest or i2dest, so we must check it. */
4230 rtx elim_i2
= ((newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i2dest
, newi2pat
))
4231 || i2dest_in_i2src
|| i2dest_in_i1src
|| i2dest_in_i0src
4234 /* For i1, we need to compute both local elimination and global
4235 elimination information with respect to newi2pat because i1dest
4236 may be the same as i3dest, in which case newi2pat may be setting
4237 i1dest. Global information is used when distributing REG_DEAD
4238 note for i2 and i3, in which case it does matter if newi2pat sets
4241 Local information is used when distributing REG_DEAD note for i1,
4242 in which case it doesn't matter if newi2pat sets i1dest or not.
4243 See PR62151, if we have four insns combination:
4245 i1: r1 <- i1src (using r0)
4247 i2: r0 <- i2src (using r1)
4248 i3: r3 <- i3src (using r0)
4250 From i1's point of view, r0 is eliminated, no matter if it is set
4251 by newi2pat or not. In other words, REG_DEAD info for r0 in i1
4252 should be discarded.
4254 Note local information only affects cases in forms like "I1->I2->I3",
4255 "I0->I1->I2->I3" or "I0&I1->I2, I2->I3". For other cases like
4256 "I0->I1, I1&I2->I3" or "I1&I2->I3", newi2pat won't set i1dest or
4258 rtx local_elim_i1
= (i1
== 0 || i1dest_in_i1src
|| i1dest_in_i0src
4261 rtx elim_i1
= (local_elim_i1
== 0
4262 || (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i1dest
, newi2pat
))
4264 /* Same case as i1. */
4265 rtx local_elim_i0
= (i0
== 0 || i0dest_in_i0src
|| !i0dest_killed
4267 rtx elim_i0
= (local_elim_i0
== 0
4268 || (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i0dest
, newi2pat
))
4271 /* Get the old REG_NOTES and LOG_LINKS from all our insns and
4273 i3notes
= REG_NOTES (i3
), i3links
= LOG_LINKS (i3
);
4274 i2notes
= REG_NOTES (i2
), i2links
= LOG_LINKS (i2
);
4276 i1notes
= REG_NOTES (i1
), i1links
= LOG_LINKS (i1
);
4278 i0notes
= REG_NOTES (i0
), i0links
= LOG_LINKS (i0
);
4280 /* Ensure that we do not have something that should not be shared but
4281 occurs multiple times in the new insns. Check this by first
4282 resetting all the `used' flags and then copying anything is shared. */
4284 reset_used_flags (i3notes
);
4285 reset_used_flags (i2notes
);
4286 reset_used_flags (i1notes
);
4287 reset_used_flags (i0notes
);
4288 reset_used_flags (newpat
);
4289 reset_used_flags (newi2pat
);
4290 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4291 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
));
4293 i3notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i3notes
);
4294 i2notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i2notes
);
4295 i1notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i1notes
);
4296 i0notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i0notes
);
4297 newpat
= copy_rtx_if_shared (newpat
);
4298 newi2pat
= copy_rtx_if_shared (newi2pat
);
4299 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4300 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
));
4302 INSN_CODE (i3
) = insn_code_number
;
4303 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
4305 if (CALL_P (i3
) && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3
))
4307 for (rtx link
= CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3
); link
;
4308 link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
4312 /* I2SRC must still be meaningful at this point. Some
4313 splitting operations can invalidate I2SRC, but those
4314 operations do not apply to calls. */
4316 XEXP (link
, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link
, 0),
4320 XEXP (link
, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link
, 0),
4323 XEXP (link
, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link
, 0),
4328 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4329 INSN_CODE (undobuf
.other_insn
) = other_code_number
;
4331 /* We had one special case above where I2 had more than one set and
4332 we replaced a destination of one of those sets with the destination
4333 of I3. In that case, we have to update LOG_LINKS of insns later
4334 in this basic block. Note that this (expensive) case is rare.
4336 Also, in this case, we must pretend that all REG_NOTEs for I2
4337 actually came from I3, so that REG_UNUSED notes from I2 will be
4338 properly handled. */
4340 if (i3_subst_into_i2
)
4342 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2
), 0); i
++)
4343 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)) == SET
4344 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
4345 && REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)))
4346 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)) != i2dest
4347 && ! find_reg_note (i2
, REG_UNUSED
,
4348 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
))))
4349 for (temp_insn
= NEXT_INSN (i2
);
4351 && (this_basic_block
->next_bb
== EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)
4352 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
) != temp_insn
);
4353 temp_insn
= NEXT_INSN (temp_insn
))
4354 if (temp_insn
!= i3
&& NONDEBUG_INSN_P (temp_insn
))
4355 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, temp_insn
)
4356 if (link
->insn
== i2
)
4362 while (XEXP (link
, 1))
4363 link
= XEXP (link
, 1);
4364 XEXP (link
, 1) = i2notes
;
4371 LOG_LINKS (i3
) = NULL
;
4373 LOG_LINKS (i2
) = NULL
;
4378 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS
&& i2scratch
)
4379 propagate_for_debug (i2
, last_combined_insn
, i2dest
, i2src
,
4381 INSN_CODE (i2
) = i2_code_number
;
4382 PATTERN (i2
) = newi2pat
;
4386 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS
&& i2src
)
4387 propagate_for_debug (i2
, last_combined_insn
, i2dest
, i2src
,
4389 SET_INSN_DELETED (i2
);
4394 LOG_LINKS (i1
) = NULL
;
4396 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS
)
4397 propagate_for_debug (i1
, last_combined_insn
, i1dest
, i1src
,
4399 SET_INSN_DELETED (i1
);
4404 LOG_LINKS (i0
) = NULL
;
4406 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS
)
4407 propagate_for_debug (i0
, last_combined_insn
, i0dest
, i0src
,
4409 SET_INSN_DELETED (i0
);
4412 /* Get death notes for everything that is now used in either I3 or
4413 I2 and used to die in a previous insn. If we built two new
4414 patterns, move from I1 to I2 then I2 to I3 so that we get the
4415 proper movement on registers that I2 modifies. */
4418 from_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i0
);
4420 from_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i1
);
4422 from_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
4424 move_deaths (newi2pat
, NULL_RTX
, from_luid
, i2
, &midnotes
);
4425 move_deaths (newpat
, newi2pat
, from_luid
, i3
, &midnotes
);
4427 /* Distribute all the LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES from I1, I2, and I3. */
4429 distribute_notes (i3notes
, i3
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4430 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4432 distribute_notes (i2notes
, i2
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4433 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4435 distribute_notes (i1notes
, i1
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4436 elim_i2
, local_elim_i1
, local_elim_i0
);
4438 distribute_notes (i0notes
, i0
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4439 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, local_elim_i0
);
4441 distribute_notes (midnotes
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4442 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4444 /* Distribute any notes added to I2 or I3 by recog_for_combine. We
4445 know these are REG_UNUSED and want them to go to the desired insn,
4446 so we always pass it as i3. */
4448 if (newi2pat
&& new_i2_notes
)
4449 distribute_notes (new_i2_notes
, i2
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
4453 distribute_notes (new_i3_notes
, i3
, i3
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
4456 /* If I3DEST was used in I3SRC, it really died in I3. We may need to
4457 put a REG_DEAD note for it somewhere. If NEWI2PAT exists and sets
4458 I3DEST, the death must be somewhere before I2, not I3. If we passed I3
4459 in that case, it might delete I2. Similarly for I2 and I1.
4460 Show an additional death due to the REG_DEAD note we make here. If
4461 we discard it in distribute_notes, we will decrement it again. */
4465 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i3dest_killed
, NULL_RTX
);
4466 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i3dest_killed
, newi2pat
))
4467 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, elim_i2
,
4470 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4471 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4474 if (i2dest_in_i2src
)
4476 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i2dest
, NULL_RTX
);
4477 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i2dest
, newi2pat
))
4478 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
,
4479 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4481 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4482 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4485 if (i1dest_in_i1src
)
4487 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i1dest
, NULL_RTX
);
4488 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i1dest
, newi2pat
))
4489 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
,
4490 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4492 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4493 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4496 if (i0dest_in_i0src
)
4498 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i0dest
, NULL_RTX
);
4499 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i0dest
, newi2pat
))
4500 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
,
4501 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4503 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4504 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4507 distribute_links (i3links
);
4508 distribute_links (i2links
);
4509 distribute_links (i1links
);
4510 distribute_links (i0links
);
4514 struct insn_link
*link
;
4515 rtx_insn
*i2_insn
= 0;
4516 rtx i2_val
= 0, set
;
4518 /* The insn that used to set this register doesn't exist, and
4519 this life of the register may not exist either. See if one of
4520 I3's links points to an insn that sets I2DEST. If it does,
4521 that is now the last known value for I2DEST. If we don't update
4522 this and I2 set the register to a value that depended on its old
4523 contents, we will get confused. If this insn is used, thing
4524 will be set correctly in combine_instructions. */
4525 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, i3
)
4526 if ((set
= single_set (link
->insn
)) != 0
4527 && rtx_equal_p (i2dest
, SET_DEST (set
)))
4528 i2_insn
= link
->insn
, i2_val
= SET_SRC (set
);
4530 record_value_for_reg (i2dest
, i2_insn
, i2_val
);
4532 /* If the reg formerly set in I2 died only once and that was in I3,
4533 zero its use count so it won't make `reload' do any work. */
4535 && (newi2pat
== 0 || ! reg_mentioned_p (i2dest
, newi2pat
))
4536 && ! i2dest_in_i2src
4537 && REGNO (i2dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
4538 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i2dest
), -1);
4541 if (i1
&& REG_P (i1dest
))
4543 struct insn_link
*link
;
4544 rtx_insn
*i1_insn
= 0;
4545 rtx i1_val
= 0, set
;
4547 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, i3
)
4548 if ((set
= single_set (link
->insn
)) != 0
4549 && rtx_equal_p (i1dest
, SET_DEST (set
)))
4550 i1_insn
= link
->insn
, i1_val
= SET_SRC (set
);
4552 record_value_for_reg (i1dest
, i1_insn
, i1_val
);
4555 && ! i1dest_in_i1src
4556 && REGNO (i1dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
4557 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i1dest
), -1);
4560 if (i0
&& REG_P (i0dest
))
4562 struct insn_link
*link
;
4563 rtx_insn
*i0_insn
= 0;
4564 rtx i0_val
= 0, set
;
4566 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, i3
)
4567 if ((set
= single_set (link
->insn
)) != 0
4568 && rtx_equal_p (i0dest
, SET_DEST (set
)))
4569 i0_insn
= link
->insn
, i0_val
= SET_SRC (set
);
4571 record_value_for_reg (i0dest
, i0_insn
, i0_val
);
4574 && ! i0dest_in_i0src
4575 && REGNO (i0dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
4576 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i0dest
), -1);
4579 /* Update reg_stat[].nonzero_bits et al for any changes that may have
4580 been made to this insn. The order is important, because newi2pat
4581 can affect nonzero_bits of newpat. */
4583 note_stores (newi2pat
, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies
, NULL
);
4584 note_stores (newpat
, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies
, NULL
);
4587 if (undobuf
.other_insn
!= NULL_RTX
)
4591 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying other_insn ");
4592 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, undobuf
.other_insn
);
4594 df_insn_rescan (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4597 if (i0
&& !(NOTE_P (i0
) && (NOTE_KIND (i0
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4601 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i0 ");
4602 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i0
);
4604 df_insn_rescan (i0
);
4607 if (i1
&& !(NOTE_P (i1
) && (NOTE_KIND (i1
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4611 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i1 ");
4612 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i1
);
4614 df_insn_rescan (i1
);
4617 if (i2
&& !(NOTE_P (i2
) && (NOTE_KIND (i2
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4621 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i2 ");
4622 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i2
);
4624 df_insn_rescan (i2
);
4627 if (i3
&& !(NOTE_P (i3
) && (NOTE_KIND (i3
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4631 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i3 ");
4632 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i3
);
4634 df_insn_rescan (i3
);
4637 /* Set new_direct_jump_p if a new return or simple jump instruction
4638 has been created. Adjust the CFG accordingly. */
4639 if (returnjump_p (i3
) || any_uncondjump_p (i3
))
4641 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4642 mark_jump_label (PATTERN (i3
), i3
, 0);
4643 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3
);
4646 if (undobuf
.other_insn
!= NULL_RTX
4647 && (returnjump_p (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4648 || any_uncondjump_p (undobuf
.other_insn
)))
4650 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4651 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4654 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == TRAP_IF
4655 && XEXP (PATTERN (i3
), 0) == const1_rtx
)
4657 basic_block bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i3
);
4659 remove_edge (split_block (bb
, i3
));
4660 emit_barrier_after_bb (bb
);
4661 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4664 if (undobuf
.other_insn
4665 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == TRAP_IF
4666 && XEXP (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
), 0) == const1_rtx
)
4668 basic_block bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4670 remove_edge (split_block (bb
, undobuf
.other_insn
));
4671 emit_barrier_after_bb (bb
);
4672 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4675 /* A noop might also need cleaning up of CFG, if it comes from the
4676 simplification of a jump. */
4678 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == SET
4679 && SET_SRC (newpat
) == pc_rtx
4680 && SET_DEST (newpat
) == pc_rtx
)
4682 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4683 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3
);
4686 if (undobuf
.other_insn
!= NULL_RTX
4687 && JUMP_P (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4688 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == SET
4689 && SET_SRC (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == pc_rtx
4690 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == pc_rtx
)
4692 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4693 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4696 combine_successes
++;
4699 if (added_links_insn
4700 && (newi2pat
== 0 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn
) < DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
4701 && DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn
) < DF_INSN_LUID (i3
))
4702 return added_links_insn
;
4704 return newi2pat
? i2
: i3
;
4707 /* Get a marker for undoing to the current state. */
4710 get_undo_marker (void)
4712 return undobuf
.undos
;
4715 /* Undo the modifications up to the marker. */
4718 undo_to_marker (void *marker
)
4720 struct undo
*undo
, *next
;
4722 for (undo
= undobuf
.undos
; undo
!= marker
; undo
= next
)
4730 *undo
->where
.r
= undo
->old_contents
.r
;
4733 *undo
->where
.i
= undo
->old_contents
.i
;
4736 adjust_reg_mode (*undo
->where
.r
, undo
->old_contents
.m
);
4739 *undo
->where
.l
= undo
->old_contents
.l
;
4745 undo
->next
= undobuf
.frees
;
4746 undobuf
.frees
= undo
;
4749 undobuf
.undos
= (struct undo
*) marker
;
4752 /* Undo all the modifications recorded in undobuf. */
4760 /* We've committed to accepting the changes we made. Move all
4761 of the undos to the free list. */
4766 struct undo
*undo
, *next
;
4768 for (undo
= undobuf
.undos
; undo
; undo
= next
)
4771 undo
->next
= undobuf
.frees
;
4772 undobuf
.frees
= undo
;
4777 /* Find the innermost point within the rtx at LOC, possibly LOC itself,
4778 where we have an arithmetic expression and return that point. LOC will
4781 try_combine will call this function to see if an insn can be split into
4785 find_split_point (rtx
*loc
, rtx_insn
*insn
, bool set_src
)
4788 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
4790 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
= 0;
4791 HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= 0;
4793 rtx inner
= NULL_RTX
;
4794 scalar_int_mode inner_mode
;
4796 /* First special-case some codes. */
4800 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
4801 /* If we are making a paradoxical SUBREG invalid, it becomes a split
4803 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
4806 return find_split_point (&SUBREG_REG (x
), insn
, false);
4809 /* If we have (mem (const ..)) or (mem (symbol_ref ...)), split it
4810 using LO_SUM and HIGH. */
4811 if (HAVE_lo_sum
&& (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == CONST
4812 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
))
4814 machine_mode address_mode
= get_address_mode (x
);
4817 gen_rtx_LO_SUM (address_mode
,
4818 gen_rtx_HIGH (address_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
4820 return &XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
4823 /* If we have a PLUS whose second operand is a constant and the
4824 address is not valid, perhaps will can split it up using
4825 the machine-specific way to split large constants. We use
4826 the first pseudo-reg (one of the virtual regs) as a placeholder;
4827 it will not remain in the result. */
4828 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
4829 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
4830 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
4831 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
4833 rtx reg
= regno_reg_rtx
[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
];
4834 rtx_insn
*seq
= combine_split_insns (gen_rtx_SET (reg
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
4837 /* This should have produced two insns, each of which sets our
4838 placeholder. If the source of the second is a valid address,
4839 we can make put both sources together and make a split point
4843 && NEXT_INSN (seq
) != NULL_RTX
4844 && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (seq
)) == NULL_RTX
4845 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (seq
)
4846 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq
)) == SET
4847 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (seq
)) == reg
4848 && ! reg_mentioned_p (reg
,
4849 SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq
)))
4850 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (NEXT_INSN (seq
))
4851 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
))) == SET
4852 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
))) == reg
4853 && memory_address_addr_space_p
4854 (GET_MODE (x
), SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
))),
4855 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
4857 rtx src1
= SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq
));
4858 rtx src2
= SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
)));
4860 /* Replace the placeholder in SRC2 with SRC1. If we can
4861 find where in SRC2 it was placed, that can become our
4862 split point and we can replace this address with SRC2.
4863 Just try two obvious places. */
4865 src2
= replace_rtx (src2
, reg
, src1
);
4867 if (XEXP (src2
, 0) == src1
)
4868 split
= &XEXP (src2
, 0);
4869 else if (GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (XEXP (src2
, 0)))[0] == 'e'
4870 && XEXP (XEXP (src2
, 0), 0) == src1
)
4871 split
= &XEXP (XEXP (src2
, 0), 0);
4875 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), src2
);
4880 /* If that didn't work, perhaps the first operand is complex and
4881 needs to be computed separately, so make a split point there.
4882 This will occur on machines that just support REG + CONST
4883 and have a constant moved through some previous computation. */
4885 else if (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
4886 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4887 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)))))
4888 return &XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
4891 /* If we have a PLUS whose first operand is complex, try computing it
4892 separately by making a split there. */
4893 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
4894 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
4896 && ! OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
4897 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4898 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)))))
4899 return &XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
4903 /* If SET_DEST is CC0 and SET_SRC is not an operand, a COMPARE, or a
4904 ZERO_EXTRACT, the most likely reason why this doesn't match is that
4905 we need to put the operand into a register. So split at that
4908 if (SET_DEST (x
) == cc0_rtx
4909 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x
)) != COMPARE
4910 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x
)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
4911 && !OBJECT_P (SET_SRC (x
))
4912 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x
)) == SUBREG
4913 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x
)))))
4914 return &SET_SRC (x
);
4916 /* See if we can split SET_SRC as it stands. */
4917 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
4918 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
4921 /* See if we can split SET_DEST as it stands. */
4922 split
= find_split_point (&SET_DEST (x
), insn
, false);
4923 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_DEST (x
))
4926 /* See if this is a bitfield assignment with everything constant. If
4927 so, this is an IOR of an AND, so split it into that. */
4928 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4929 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)))
4930 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1))
4931 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2))
4932 && CONST_INT_P (SET_SRC (x
))
4933 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1))
4934 + INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2)))
4935 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0))))
4936 && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)))
4938 HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2));
4939 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1));
4940 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT src
= INTVAL (SET_SRC (x
));
4941 rtx dest
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0);
4942 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (dest
);
4943 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
4944 = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1;
4947 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
4948 pos
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - len
- pos
;
4950 or_mask
= gen_int_mode (src
<< pos
, mode
);
4953 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, mode
, dest
, or_mask
));
4956 rtx negmask
= gen_int_mode (~(mask
<< pos
), mode
);
4958 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, mode
,
4959 simplify_gen_binary (AND
, mode
,
4964 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
), dest
);
4966 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
4967 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
4971 /* Otherwise, see if this is an operation that we can split into two.
4972 If so, try to split that. */
4973 code
= GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x
));
4978 /* If we are AND'ing with a large constant that is only a single
4979 bit and the result is only being used in a context where we
4980 need to know if it is zero or nonzero, replace it with a bit
4981 extraction. This will avoid the large constant, which might
4982 have taken more than one insn to make. If the constant were
4983 not a valid argument to the AND but took only one insn to make,
4984 this is no worse, but if it took more than one insn, it will
4987 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1))
4988 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))
4989 && (pos
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1)))) >= 7
4990 && REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
4991 && (split
= find_single_use (SET_DEST (x
), insn
, NULL
)) != 0
4992 && (GET_CODE (*split
) == EQ
|| GET_CODE (*split
) == NE
)
4993 && XEXP (*split
, 0) == SET_DEST (x
)
4994 && XEXP (*split
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
4996 rtx extraction
= make_extraction (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x
)),
4997 XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0),
4998 pos
, NULL_RTX
, 1, 1, 0, 0);
4999 if (extraction
!= 0)
5001 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), extraction
);
5002 return find_split_point (loc
, insn
, false);
5008 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, this is (NE X 0) and only one bit of X
5009 is known to be on, this can be converted into a NEG of a shift. */
5010 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1 && XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1) == const0_rtx
5011 && GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x
)) == GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))
5012 && 1 <= (pos
= exact_log2
5013 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0),
5014 GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))))))
5016 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0));
5020 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode
,
5021 XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0),
5024 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5025 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5031 inner
= XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0);
5033 /* We can't optimize if either mode is a partial integer
5034 mode as we don't know how many bits are significant
5036 if (!is_int_mode (GET_MODE (inner
), &inner_mode
)
5037 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x
))) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
5041 len
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
);
5047 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1))
5048 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 2)))
5050 inner
= XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0);
5051 len
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1));
5052 pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 2));
5054 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
5055 pos
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)) - len
- pos
;
5056 unsignedp
= (code
== ZERO_EXTRACT
);
5065 && pos
+ len
<= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)))
5067 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x
));
5069 /* For unsigned, we have a choice of a shift followed by an
5070 AND or two shifts. Use two shifts for field sizes where the
5071 constant might be too large. We assume here that we can
5072 always at least get 8-bit constants in an AND insn, which is
5073 true for every current RISC. */
5075 if (unsignedp
&& len
<= 8)
5077 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
5078 = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1;
5082 (mode
, gen_lowpart (mode
, inner
),
5084 gen_int_mode (mask
, mode
)));
5086 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5087 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5094 (unsignedp
? LSHIFTRT
: ASHIFTRT
, mode
,
5095 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode
,
5096 gen_lowpart (mode
, inner
),
5097 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
5099 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - len
)));
5101 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5102 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5107 /* See if this is a simple operation with a constant as the second
5108 operand. It might be that this constant is out of range and hence
5109 could be used as a split point. */
5110 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x
))
5111 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1))
5112 && (OBJECT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))
5113 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0)) == SUBREG
5114 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))))))
5115 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1);
5117 /* Finally, see if this is a simple operation with its first operand
5118 not in a register. The operation might require this operand in a
5119 register, so return it as a split point. We can always do this
5120 because if the first operand were another operation, we would have
5121 already found it as a split point. */
5122 if ((BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x
)) || UNARY_P (SET_SRC (x
)))
5123 && ! register_operand (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0), VOIDmode
))
5124 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0);
5130 /* We write NOR as (and (not A) (not B)), but if we don't have a NOR,
5131 it is better to write this as (not (ior A B)) so we can split it.
5132 Similarly for IOR. */
5133 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == NOT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == NOT
)
5136 gen_rtx_NOT (GET_MODE (x
),
5137 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
== IOR
? AND
: IOR
,
5139 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
5140 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0))));
5141 return find_split_point (loc
, insn
, set_src
);
5144 /* Many RISC machines have a large set of logical insns. If the
5145 second operand is a NOT, put it first so we will try to split the
5146 other operand first. */
5147 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == NOT
)
5149 rtx tem
= XEXP (x
, 0);
5150 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5151 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), tem
);
5157 /* Canonicalization can produce (minus A (mult B C)), where C is a
5158 constant. It may be better to try splitting (plus (mult B -C) A)
5159 instead if this isn't a multiply by a power of two. */
5160 if (set_src
&& code
== MINUS
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == MULT
5161 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT
5162 && !pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1))))
5164 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
5165 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_int
= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1));
5166 HOST_WIDE_INT other_int
= trunc_int_for_mode (-this_int
, mode
);
5167 SUBST (*loc
, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode
,
5169 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0),
5170 gen_int_mode (other_int
,
5173 return find_split_point (loc
, insn
, set_src
);
5176 /* Split at a multiply-accumulate instruction. However if this is
5177 the SET_SRC, we likely do not have such an instruction and it's
5178 worthless to try this split. */
5180 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
5181 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFT
5182 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
)))
5189 /* Otherwise, select our actions depending on our rtx class. */
5190 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
))
5192 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS
: /* This is ZERO_EXTRACT and SIGN_EXTRACT. */
5194 split
= find_split_point (&XEXP (x
, 2), insn
, false);
5199 case RTX_COMM_ARITH
:
5201 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE
:
5202 split
= find_split_point (&XEXP (x
, 1), insn
, false);
5207 /* Some machines have (and (shift ...) ...) insns. If X is not
5208 an AND, but XEXP (X, 0) is, use it as our split point. */
5209 if (GET_CODE (x
) != AND
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == AND
)
5210 return &XEXP (x
, 0);
5212 split
= find_split_point (&XEXP (x
, 0), insn
, false);
5218 /* Otherwise, we don't have a split point. */
5223 /* Throughout X, replace FROM with TO, and return the result.
5224 The result is TO if X is FROM;
5225 otherwise the result is X, but its contents may have been modified.
5226 If they were modified, a record was made in undobuf so that
5227 undo_all will (among other things) return X to its original state.
5229 If the number of changes necessary is too much to record to undo,
5230 the excess changes are not made, so the result is invalid.
5231 The changes already made can still be undone.
5232 undobuf.num_undo is incremented for such changes, so by testing that
5233 the caller can tell whether the result is valid.
5235 `n_occurrences' is incremented each time FROM is replaced.
5237 IN_DEST is nonzero if we are processing the SET_DEST of a SET.
5239 IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level of a condition.
5241 UNIQUE_COPY is nonzero if each substitution must be unique. We do this
5242 by copying if `n_occurrences' is nonzero. */
5245 subst (rtx x
, rtx from
, rtx to
, int in_dest
, int in_cond
, int unique_copy
)
5247 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5248 machine_mode op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5253 /* Two expressions are equal if they are identical copies of a shared
5254 RTX or if they are both registers with the same register number
5257 #define COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P(X,Y) \
5259 || (REG_P (X) && REG_P (Y) \
5260 && REGNO (X) == REGNO (Y) && GET_MODE (X) == GET_MODE (Y)))
5262 /* Do not substitute into clobbers of regs -- this will never result in
5264 if (GET_CODE (x
) == CLOBBER
&& REG_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5267 if (! in_dest
&& COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x
, from
))
5270 return (unique_copy
&& n_occurrences
> 1 ? copy_rtx (to
) : to
);
5273 /* If X and FROM are the same register but different modes, they
5274 will not have been seen as equal above. However, the log links code
5275 will make a LOG_LINKS entry for that case. If we do nothing, we
5276 will try to rerecognize our original insn and, when it succeeds,
5277 we will delete the feeding insn, which is incorrect.
5279 So force this insn not to match in this (rare) case. */
5280 if (! in_dest
&& code
== REG
&& REG_P (from
)
5281 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x
, from
))
5282 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x
), const0_rtx
);
5284 /* If this is an object, we are done unless it is a MEM or LO_SUM, both
5285 of which may contain things that can be combined. */
5286 if (code
!= MEM
&& code
!= LO_SUM
&& OBJECT_P (x
))
5289 /* It is possible to have a subexpression appear twice in the insn.
5290 Suppose that FROM is a register that appears within TO.
5291 Then, after that subexpression has been scanned once by `subst',
5292 the second time it is scanned, TO may be found. If we were
5293 to scan TO here, we would find FROM within it and create a
5294 self-referent rtl structure which is completely wrong. */
5295 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x
, to
))
5298 /* Parallel asm_operands need special attention because all of the
5299 inputs are shared across the arms. Furthermore, unsharing the
5300 rtl results in recognition failures. Failure to handle this case
5301 specially can result in circular rtl.
5303 Solve this by doing a normal pass across the first entry of the
5304 parallel, and only processing the SET_DESTs of the subsequent
5307 if (code
== PARALLEL
5308 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0)) == SET
5309 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0))) == ASM_OPERANDS
)
5311 new_rtx
= subst (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0), from
, to
, 0, 0, unique_copy
);
5313 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5314 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
5315 && XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5318 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0), new_rtx
);
5320 for (i
= XVECLEN (x
, 0) - 1; i
>= 1; i
--)
5322 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x
, 0, i
));
5325 && GET_CODE (dest
) != CC0
5326 && GET_CODE (dest
) != PC
)
5328 new_rtx
= subst (dest
, from
, to
, 0, 0, unique_copy
);
5330 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5331 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
5332 && XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5335 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x
, 0, i
)), new_rtx
);
5341 len
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
);
5342 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
5344 /* We don't need to process a SET_DEST that is a register, CC0,
5345 or PC, so set up to skip this common case. All other cases
5346 where we want to suppress replacing something inside a
5347 SET_SRC are handled via the IN_DEST operand. */
5349 && (REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
5350 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == CC0
5351 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == PC
))
5354 /* Trying to simplify the operands of a widening MULT is not likely
5355 to create RTL matching a machine insn. */
5357 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5358 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
5359 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5360 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
5361 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
5362 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0))
5367 /* Get the mode of operand 0 in case X is now a SIGN_EXTEND of a
5370 op0_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
5372 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
5377 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
5379 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), from
))
5381 new_rtx
= (unique_copy
&& n_occurrences
5382 ? copy_rtx (to
) : to
);
5387 new_rtx
= subst (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), from
, to
, 0, 0,
5390 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing
5392 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
5393 && XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5397 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), new_rtx
);
5400 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e')
5402 /* If this is a register being set, ignore it. */
5403 new_rtx
= XEXP (x
, i
);
5406 && (((code
== SUBREG
|| code
== ZERO_EXTRACT
)
5408 || code
== STRICT_LOW_PART
))
5411 else if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XEXP (x
, i
), from
))
5413 /* In general, don't install a subreg involving two
5414 modes not tieable. It can worsen register
5415 allocation, and can even make invalid reload
5416 insns, since the reg inside may need to be copied
5417 from in the outside mode, and that may be invalid
5418 if it is an fp reg copied in integer mode.
5420 We allow two exceptions to this: It is valid if
5421 it is inside another SUBREG and the mode of that
5422 SUBREG and the mode of the inside of TO is
5423 tieable and it is valid if X is a SET that copies
5426 if (GET_CODE (to
) == SUBREG
5427 && ! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (to
),
5428 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to
)))
5429 && ! (code
== SUBREG
5430 && MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x
),
5431 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to
))))
5435 && XEXP (x
, 0) == cc0_rtx
))))
5436 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, const0_rtx
);
5440 && REGNO (to
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5441 && simplify_subreg_regno (REGNO (to
), GET_MODE (to
),
5444 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, const0_rtx
);
5446 new_rtx
= (unique_copy
&& n_occurrences
? copy_rtx (to
) : to
);
5450 /* If we are in a SET_DEST, suppress most cases unless we
5451 have gone inside a MEM, in which case we want to
5452 simplify the address. We assume here that things that
5453 are actually part of the destination have their inner
5454 parts in the first expression. This is true for SUBREG,
5455 STRICT_LOW_PART, and ZERO_EXTRACT, which are the only
5456 things aside from REG and MEM that should appear in a
5458 new_rtx
= subst (XEXP (x
, i
), from
, to
,
5460 && (code
== SUBREG
|| code
== STRICT_LOW_PART
5461 || code
== ZERO_EXTRACT
))
5464 code
== IF_THEN_ELSE
&& i
== 0,
5467 /* If we found that we will have to reject this combination,
5468 indicate that by returning the CLOBBER ourselves, rather than
5469 an expression containing it. This will speed things up as
5470 well as prevent accidents where two CLOBBERs are considered
5471 to be equal, thus producing an incorrect simplification. */
5473 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
&& XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5476 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
))
5478 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
5480 x
= simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x
), new_rtx
,
5481 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)),
5484 x
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode
, const0_rtx
);
5486 else if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
)
5487 && GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
)
5489 x
= simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND
, GET_MODE (x
),
5490 new_rtx
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
5494 SUBST (XEXP (x
, i
), new_rtx
);
5499 /* Check if we are loading something from the constant pool via float
5500 extension; in this case we would undo compress_float_constant
5501 optimization and degenerate constant load to an immediate value. */
5502 if (GET_CODE (x
) == FLOAT_EXTEND
5503 && MEM_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5504 && MEM_READONLY_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5506 rtx tmp
= avoid_constant_pool_reference (x
);
5511 /* Try to simplify X. If the simplification changed the code, it is likely
5512 that further simplification will help, so loop, but limit the number
5513 of repetitions that will be performed. */
5515 for (i
= 0; i
< 4; i
++)
5517 /* If X is sufficiently simple, don't bother trying to do anything
5519 if (code
!= CONST_INT
&& code
!= REG
&& code
!= CLOBBER
)
5520 x
= combine_simplify_rtx (x
, op0_mode
, in_dest
, in_cond
);
5522 if (GET_CODE (x
) == code
)
5525 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5527 /* We no longer know the original mode of operand 0 since we
5528 have changed the form of X) */
5529 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5535 /* If X is a commutative operation whose operands are not in the canonical
5536 order, use substitutions to swap them. */
5539 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (rtx x
)
5541 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
)
5542 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1)))
5544 rtx temp
= XEXP (x
, 0);
5545 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5546 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), temp
);
5550 /* Simplify X, a piece of RTL. We just operate on the expression at the
5551 outer level; call `subst' to simplify recursively. Return the new
5554 OP0_MODE is the original mode of XEXP (x, 0). IN_DEST is nonzero
5555 if we are inside a SET_DEST. IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level
5559 combine_simplify_rtx (rtx x
, machine_mode op0_mode
, int in_dest
,
5562 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5563 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
5564 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
5568 /* If this is a commutative operation, put a constant last and a complex
5569 expression first. We don't need to do this for comparisons here. */
5570 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x
);
5572 /* Try to fold this expression in case we have constants that weren't
5575 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
))
5578 if (op0_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5579 op0_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
5580 temp
= simplify_unary_operation (code
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), op0_mode
);
5583 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE
:
5585 machine_mode cmp_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
5586 if (cmp_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5588 cmp_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1));
5589 if (cmp_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5590 cmp_mode
= op0_mode
;
5592 temp
= simplify_relational_operation (code
, mode
, cmp_mode
,
5593 XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5596 case RTX_COMM_ARITH
:
5598 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (code
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5600 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS
:
5602 temp
= simplify_ternary_operation (code
, mode
, op0_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
5603 XEXP (x
, 1), XEXP (x
, 2));
5612 code
= GET_CODE (temp
);
5613 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5614 mode
= GET_MODE (temp
);
5617 /* If this is a simple operation applied to an IF_THEN_ELSE, try
5618 applying it to the arms of the IF_THEN_ELSE. This often simplifies
5619 things. Check for cases where both arms are testing the same
5622 Don't do anything if all operands are very simple. */
5625 && ((!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5626 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
5627 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)))))
5628 || (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
5629 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == SUBREG
5630 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 1)))))))
5632 && (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5633 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
5634 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)))))))
5636 rtx cond
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
;
5638 cond
= if_then_else_cond (x
, &true_rtx
, &false_rtx
);
5640 /* If everything is a comparison, what we have is highly unlikely
5641 to be simpler, so don't use it. */
5642 && ! (COMPARISON_P (x
)
5643 && (COMPARISON_P (true_rtx
) || COMPARISON_P (false_rtx
))))
5645 rtx cop1
= const0_rtx
;
5646 enum rtx_code cond_code
= simplify_comparison (NE
, &cond
, &cop1
);
5648 if (cond_code
== NE
&& COMPARISON_P (cond
))
5651 /* Simplify the alternative arms; this may collapse the true and
5652 false arms to store-flag values. Be careful to use copy_rtx
5653 here since true_rtx or false_rtx might share RTL with x as a
5654 result of the if_then_else_cond call above. */
5655 true_rtx
= subst (copy_rtx (true_rtx
), pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
5656 false_rtx
= subst (copy_rtx (false_rtx
), pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
5658 /* If true_rtx and false_rtx are not general_operands, an if_then_else
5659 is unlikely to be simpler. */
5660 if (general_operand (true_rtx
, VOIDmode
)
5661 && general_operand (false_rtx
, VOIDmode
))
5663 enum rtx_code reversed
;
5665 /* Restarting if we generate a store-flag expression will cause
5666 us to loop. Just drop through in this case. */
5668 /* If the result values are STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero, we can
5669 just make the comparison operation. */
5670 if (true_rtx
== const_true_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const0_rtx
)
5671 x
= simplify_gen_relational (cond_code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
5673 else if (true_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const_true_rtx
5674 && ((reversed
= reversed_comparison_code_parts
5675 (cond_code
, cond
, cop1
, NULL
))
5677 x
= simplify_gen_relational (reversed
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
5680 /* Likewise, we can make the negate of a comparison operation
5681 if the result values are - STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero. */
5682 else if (CONST_INT_P (true_rtx
)
5683 && INTVAL (true_rtx
) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5684 && false_rtx
== const0_rtx
)
5685 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
5686 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code
,
5690 else if (CONST_INT_P (false_rtx
)
5691 && INTVAL (false_rtx
) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5692 && true_rtx
== const0_rtx
5693 && ((reversed
= reversed_comparison_code_parts
5694 (cond_code
, cond
, cop1
, NULL
))
5696 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
5697 simplify_gen_relational (reversed
,
5702 return gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (mode
,
5703 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code
,
5708 true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
5710 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5711 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5716 /* First see if we can apply the inverse distributive law. */
5717 if (code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
5718 || code
== AND
|| code
== IOR
|| code
== XOR
)
5720 x
= apply_distributive_law (x
);
5721 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5722 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5725 /* If CODE is an associative operation not otherwise handled, see if we
5726 can associate some operands. This can win if they are constants or
5727 if they are logically related (i.e. (a & b) & a). */
5728 if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
|| code
== MULT
|| code
== DIV
5729 || code
== AND
|| code
== IOR
|| code
== XOR
5730 || code
== SMAX
|| code
== SMIN
|| code
== UMAX
|| code
== UMIN
)
5731 && ((INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode
) && code
!= DIV
)
5732 || (flag_associative_math
&& FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
))))
5734 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == code
)
5736 rtx other
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
5737 rtx inner_op0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
5738 rtx inner_op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
5741 /* Make sure we pass the constant operand if any as the second
5742 one if this is a commutative operation. */
5743 if (CONSTANT_P (inner_op0
) && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
))
5744 std::swap (inner_op0
, inner_op1
);
5745 inner
= simplify_binary_operation (code
== MINUS
? PLUS
5746 : code
== DIV
? MULT
5748 mode
, inner_op0
, inner_op1
);
5750 /* For commutative operations, try the other pair if that one
5752 if (inner
== 0 && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
))
5754 other
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
5755 inner
= simplify_binary_operation (code
, mode
,
5756 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
5761 return simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, other
, inner
);
5765 /* A little bit of algebraic simplification here. */
5769 /* Ensure that our address has any ASHIFTs converted to MULT in case
5770 address-recognizing predicates are called later. */
5771 temp
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), MEM
);
5772 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), temp
);
5776 if (op0_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5777 op0_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
));
5779 /* See if this can be moved to simplify_subreg. */
5780 if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
5781 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode
, op0_mode
) == SUBREG_BYTE (x
)
5782 /* Don't call gen_lowpart if the inner mode
5783 is VOIDmode and we cannot simplify it, as SUBREG without
5784 inner mode is invalid. */
5785 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)) != VOIDmode
5786 || gen_lowpart_common (mode
, SUBREG_REG (x
))))
5787 return gen_lowpart (mode
, SUBREG_REG (x
));
5789 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))) == MODE_CC
)
5793 temp
= simplify_subreg (mode
, SUBREG_REG (x
), op0_mode
,
5798 /* If op is known to have all lower bits zero, the result is zero. */
5800 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
)
5801 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (op0_mode
)
5802 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op0_mode
)
5803 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode
, op0_mode
) == SUBREG_BYTE (x
)
5804 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op0_mode
)
5805 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x
), op0_mode
)
5806 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
5807 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
5810 /* Don't change the mode of the MEM if that would change the meaning
5812 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
5813 && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
5814 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (x
), 0),
5815 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (SUBREG_REG (x
)))))
5816 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode
, const0_rtx
);
5818 /* Note that we cannot do any narrowing for non-constants since
5819 we might have been counting on using the fact that some bits were
5820 zero. We now do this in the SET. */
5825 temp
= expand_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0));
5827 /* For C equal to the width of MODE minus 1, (neg (ashiftrt X C)) can be
5828 replaced by (lshiftrt X C). This will convert
5829 (neg (sign_extract X 1 Y)) to (zero_extract X 1 Y). */
5831 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == ASHIFTRT
5832 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (temp
, 1))
5833 && INTVAL (XEXP (temp
, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1)
5834 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, mode
, XEXP (temp
, 0),
5835 INTVAL (XEXP (temp
, 1)));
5837 /* If X has only a single bit that might be nonzero, say, bit I, convert
5838 (neg X) to (ashiftrt (ashift X C-I) C-I) where C is the bitsize of
5839 MODE minus 1. This will convert (neg (zero_extract X 1 Y)) to
5840 (sign_extract X 1 Y). But only do this if TEMP isn't a register
5841 or a SUBREG of one since we'd be making the expression more
5842 complex if it was just a register. */
5845 && ! (GET_CODE (temp
) == SUBREG
5846 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (temp
)))
5847 && (i
= exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (temp
, mode
))) >= 0)
5849 rtx temp1
= simplify_shift_const
5850 (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFTRT
, mode
,
5851 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
, temp
,
5852 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1 - i
),
5853 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1 - i
);
5855 /* If all we did was surround TEMP with the two shifts, we
5856 haven't improved anything, so don't use it. Otherwise,
5857 we are better off with TEMP1. */
5858 if (GET_CODE (temp1
) != ASHIFTRT
5859 || GET_CODE (XEXP (temp1
, 0)) != ASHIFT
5860 || XEXP (XEXP (temp1
, 0), 0) != temp
)
5866 /* We can't handle truncation to a partial integer mode here
5867 because we don't know the real bitsize of the partial
5869 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
5872 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
5874 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)),
5875 GET_MODE_MASK (mode
), 0));
5877 /* We can truncate a constant value and return it. */
5878 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5879 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 0)), mode
);
5881 /* Similarly to what we do in simplify-rtx.c, a truncate of a register
5882 whose value is a comparison can be replaced with a subreg if
5883 STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. */
5884 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
5885 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0
5886 && (temp
= get_last_value (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5887 && COMPARISON_P (temp
))
5888 return gen_lowpart (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
5892 /* (const (const X)) can become (const X). Do it this way rather than
5893 returning the inner CONST since CONST can be shared with a
5895 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == CONST
)
5896 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0));
5900 /* Convert (lo_sum (high FOO) FOO) to FOO. This is necessary so we
5901 can add in an offset. find_split_point will split this address up
5902 again if it doesn't match. */
5903 if (HAVE_lo_sum
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == HIGH
5904 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), XEXP (x
, 1)))
5909 /* (plus (xor (and <foo> (const_int pow2 - 1)) <c>) <-c>)
5910 when c is (const_int (pow2 + 1) / 2) is a sign extension of a
5911 bit-field and can be replaced by either a sign_extend or a
5912 sign_extract. The `and' may be a zero_extend and the two
5913 <c>, -<c> constants may be reversed. */
5914 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == XOR
5915 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
5916 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
5917 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) == -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
5918 && ((i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)))) >= 0
5919 || (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)))) >= 0)
5920 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
5921 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == AND
5922 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1))
5923 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1))
5924 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (i
+ 1)) - 1))
5925 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5926 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0)))
5927 == (unsigned int) i
+ 1))))
5928 return simplify_shift_const
5929 (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFTRT
, mode
,
5930 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
,
5931 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0),
5932 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - (i
+ 1)),
5933 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - (i
+ 1));
5935 /* If only the low-order bit of X is possibly nonzero, (plus x -1)
5936 can become (ashiftrt (ashift (xor x 1) C) C) where C is
5937 the bitsize of the mode - 1. This allows simplification of
5938 "a = (b & 8) == 0;" */
5939 if (XEXP (x
, 1) == constm1_rtx
5940 && !REG_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5941 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
5942 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))))
5943 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
) == 1)
5944 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFTRT
, mode
,
5945 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
,
5946 gen_rtx_XOR (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), const1_rtx
),
5947 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1),
5948 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1);
5950 /* If we are adding two things that have no bits in common, convert
5951 the addition into an IOR. This will often be further simplified,
5952 for example in cases like ((a & 1) + (a & 2)), which can
5955 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
5956 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
)
5957 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 1), mode
)) == 0)
5959 /* Try to simplify the expression further. */
5960 rtx tor
= simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5961 temp
= combine_simplify_rtx (tor
, VOIDmode
, in_dest
, 0);
5963 /* If we could, great. If not, do not go ahead with the IOR
5964 replacement, since PLUS appears in many special purpose
5965 address arithmetic instructions. */
5966 if (GET_CODE (temp
) != CLOBBER
5967 && (GET_CODE (temp
) != IOR
5968 || ((XEXP (temp
, 0) != XEXP (x
, 0)
5969 || XEXP (temp
, 1) != XEXP (x
, 1))
5970 && (XEXP (temp
, 0) != XEXP (x
, 1)
5971 || XEXP (temp
, 1) != XEXP (x
, 0)))))
5975 /* Canonicalize x + x into x << 1. */
5976 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5977 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1))
5978 && !side_effects_p (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5979 return simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), const1_rtx
);
5984 /* (minus <foo> (and <foo> (const_int -pow2))) becomes
5985 (and <foo> (const_int pow2-1)) */
5986 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == AND
5987 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1))
5988 && pow2p_hwi (-UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1)))
5989 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0), XEXP (x
, 0)))
5990 return simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
5991 -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1)) - 1);
5995 /* If we have (mult (plus A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
5996 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. This
5997 occurs mostly in addresses, often when unrolling loops. */
5999 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
)
6001 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 0);
6006 /* Try simplify a*(b/c) as (a*b)/c. */
6007 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
) && flag_associative_math
6008 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == DIV
)
6010 rtx tem
= simplify_binary_operation (MULT
, mode
,
6011 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
6014 return simplify_gen_binary (DIV
, mode
, tem
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
6019 /* If this is a divide by a power of two, treat it as a shift if
6020 its first operand is a shift. */
6021 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
6022 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)))) >= 0
6023 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFT
6024 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6025 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
6026 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ROTATE
6027 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ROTATERT
))
6028 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), i
);
6032 case GT
: case GTU
: case GE
: case GEU
:
6033 case LT
: case LTU
: case LE
: case LEU
:
6034 case UNEQ
: case LTGT
:
6035 case UNGT
: case UNGE
:
6036 case UNLT
: case UNLE
:
6037 case UNORDERED
: case ORDERED
:
6038 /* If the first operand is a condition code, we can't do anything
6040 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == COMPARE
6041 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))) != MODE_CC
6042 && ! CC0_P (XEXP (x
, 0))))
6044 rtx op0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
6045 rtx op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6046 enum rtx_code new_code
;
6048 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == COMPARE
)
6049 op1
= XEXP (op0
, 1), op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
6051 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6052 new_code
= simplify_comparison (code
, &op0
, &op1
);
6054 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1, we can convert (ne x 0) to simply X
6055 if only the low-order bit is possibly nonzero in X (such as when
6056 X is a ZERO_EXTRACT of one bit). Similarly, we can convert EQ to
6057 (xor X 1) or (minus 1 X); we use the former. Finally, if X is
6058 known to be either 0 or -1, NE becomes a NEG and EQ becomes
6061 Remove any ZERO_EXTRACT we made when thinking this was a
6062 comparison. It may now be simpler to use, e.g., an AND. If a
6063 ZERO_EXTRACT is indeed appropriate, it will be placed back by
6064 the call to make_compound_operation in the SET case.
6066 Don't apply these optimizations if the caller would
6067 prefer a comparison rather than a value.
6068 E.g., for the condition in an IF_THEN_ELSE most targets need
6069 an explicit comparison. */
6074 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6076 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6077 && op1
== const0_rtx
6078 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6079 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6080 return gen_lowpart (int_mode
,
6081 expand_compound_operation (op0
));
6083 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6085 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6086 && op1
== const0_rtx
6087 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6088 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6089 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6091 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6092 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, int_mode
,
6093 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6097 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6099 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6100 && op1
== const0_rtx
6101 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6102 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6104 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6105 return simplify_gen_binary (XOR
, int_mode
,
6106 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6110 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6112 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6113 && op1
== const0_rtx
6114 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6115 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6116 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6118 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6119 return plus_constant (int_mode
, gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
), 1);
6122 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, we have cases similar to
6127 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6129 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6130 && op1
== const0_rtx
6131 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6132 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6133 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6134 return gen_lowpart (int_mode
, expand_compound_operation (op0
));
6136 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6138 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6139 && op1
== const0_rtx
6140 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6141 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6143 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6144 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, int_mode
,
6145 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6149 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6151 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6152 && op1
== const0_rtx
6153 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6154 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6155 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6157 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6158 return simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, int_mode
,
6159 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6163 /* If X is 0/1, (eq X 0) is X-1. */
6164 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6166 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6167 && op1
== const0_rtx
6168 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6169 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6171 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6172 return plus_constant (int_mode
, gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
), -1);
6175 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE says to just test the sign bit and X has just
6176 one bit that might be nonzero, we can convert (ne x 0) to
6177 (ashift x c) where C puts the bit in the sign bit. Remove any
6178 AND with STORE_FLAG_VALUE when we are done, since we are only
6179 going to test the sign bit. */
6181 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6182 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6183 && val_signbit_p (int_mode
, STORE_FLAG_VALUE
)
6184 && op1
== const0_rtx
6185 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6186 && (i
= exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
))) >= 0)
6188 x
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, int_mode
,
6189 expand_compound_operation (op0
),
6190 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 - i
);
6191 if (GET_CODE (x
) == AND
&& XEXP (x
, 1) == const_true_rtx
)
6197 /* If the code changed, return a whole new comparison.
6198 We also need to avoid using SUBST in cases where
6199 simplify_comparison has widened a comparison with a CONST_INT,
6200 since in that case the wider CONST_INT may fail the sanity
6201 checks in do_SUBST. */
6202 if (new_code
!= code
6203 || (CONST_INT_P (op1
)
6204 && GET_MODE (op0
) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))
6205 && GET_MODE (op0
) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1))))
6206 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code
, mode
, op0
, op1
);
6208 /* Otherwise, keep this operation, but maybe change its operands.
6209 This also converts (ne (compare FOO BAR) 0) to (ne FOO BAR). */
6210 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), op0
);
6211 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), op1
);
6216 return simplify_if_then_else (x
);
6222 /* If we are processing SET_DEST, we are done. */
6226 return expand_compound_operation (x
);
6229 return simplify_set (x
);
6233 return simplify_logical (x
);
6240 /* If this is a shift by a constant amount, simplify it. */
6241 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
6242 return simplify_shift_const (x
, code
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
6243 INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)));
6245 else if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
&& !REG_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
6247 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1)),
6249 << exact_log2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x
))))
6261 /* Simplify X, an IF_THEN_ELSE expression. Return the new expression. */
6264 simplify_if_then_else (rtx x
)
6266 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
6267 rtx cond
= XEXP (x
, 0);
6268 rtx true_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6269 rtx false_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 2);
6270 enum rtx_code true_code
= GET_CODE (cond
);
6271 int comparison_p
= COMPARISON_P (cond
);
6274 enum rtx_code false_code
;
6276 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
6278 /* Simplify storing of the truth value. */
6279 if (comparison_p
&& true_rtx
== const_true_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const0_rtx
)
6280 return simplify_gen_relational (true_code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
6281 XEXP (cond
, 0), XEXP (cond
, 1));
6283 /* Also when the truth value has to be reversed. */
6285 && true_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const_true_rtx
6286 && (reversed
= reversed_comparison (cond
, mode
)))
6289 /* Sometimes we can simplify the arm of an IF_THEN_ELSE if a register used
6290 in it is being compared against certain values. Get the true and false
6291 comparisons and see if that says anything about the value of each arm. */
6294 && ((false_code
= reversed_comparison_code (cond
, NULL
))
6296 && REG_P (XEXP (cond
, 0)))
6299 rtx from
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
6300 rtx true_val
= XEXP (cond
, 1);
6301 rtx false_val
= true_val
;
6304 /* If FALSE_CODE is EQ, swap the codes and arms. */
6306 if (false_code
== EQ
)
6308 swapped
= 1, true_code
= EQ
, false_code
= NE
;
6309 std::swap (true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6312 /* If we are comparing against zero and the expression being tested has
6313 only a single bit that might be nonzero, that is its value when it is
6314 not equal to zero. Similarly if it is known to be -1 or 0. */
6316 if (true_code
== EQ
&& true_val
== const0_rtx
6317 && pow2p_hwi (nzb
= nonzero_bits (from
, GET_MODE (from
))))
6320 false_val
= gen_int_mode (nzb
, GET_MODE (from
));
6322 else if (true_code
== EQ
&& true_val
== const0_rtx
6323 && (num_sign_bit_copies (from
, GET_MODE (from
))
6324 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (from
))))
6327 false_val
= constm1_rtx
;
6330 /* Now simplify an arm if we know the value of the register in the
6331 branch and it is used in the arm. Be careful due to the potential
6332 of locally-shared RTL. */
6334 if (reg_mentioned_p (from
, true_rtx
))
6335 true_rtx
= subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (true_rtx
), true_code
,
6337 pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
6338 if (reg_mentioned_p (from
, false_rtx
))
6339 false_rtx
= subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (false_rtx
), false_code
,
6341 pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
6343 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), swapped
? false_rtx
: true_rtx
);
6344 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 2), swapped
? true_rtx
: false_rtx
);
6346 true_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6347 false_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 2);
6348 true_code
= GET_CODE (cond
);
6351 /* If we have (if_then_else FOO (pc) (label_ref BAR)) and FOO can be
6352 reversed, do so to avoid needing two sets of patterns for
6353 subtract-and-branch insns. Similarly if we have a constant in the true
6354 arm, the false arm is the same as the first operand of the comparison, or
6355 the false arm is more complicated than the true arm. */
6358 && reversed_comparison_code (cond
, NULL
) != UNKNOWN
6359 && (true_rtx
== pc_rtx
6360 || (CONSTANT_P (true_rtx
)
6361 && !CONST_INT_P (false_rtx
) && false_rtx
!= pc_rtx
)
6362 || true_rtx
== const0_rtx
6363 || (OBJECT_P (true_rtx
) && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx
))
6364 || (GET_CODE (true_rtx
) == SUBREG
&& OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (true_rtx
))
6365 && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx
))
6366 || reg_mentioned_p (true_rtx
, false_rtx
)
6367 || rtx_equal_p (false_rtx
, XEXP (cond
, 0))))
6369 true_code
= reversed_comparison_code (cond
, NULL
);
6370 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), reversed_comparison (cond
, GET_MODE (cond
)));
6371 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), false_rtx
);
6372 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 2), true_rtx
);
6374 std::swap (true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6377 /* It is possible that the conditional has been simplified out. */
6378 true_code
= GET_CODE (cond
);
6379 comparison_p
= COMPARISON_P (cond
);
6382 /* If the two arms are identical, we don't need the comparison. */
6384 if (rtx_equal_p (true_rtx
, false_rtx
) && ! side_effects_p (cond
))
6387 /* Convert a == b ? b : a to "a". */
6388 if (true_code
== EQ
&& ! side_effects_p (cond
)
6389 && !HONOR_NANS (mode
)
6390 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 0), false_rtx
)
6391 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 1), true_rtx
))
6393 else if (true_code
== NE
&& ! side_effects_p (cond
)
6394 && !HONOR_NANS (mode
)
6395 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 0), true_rtx
)
6396 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 1), false_rtx
))
6399 /* Look for cases where we have (abs x) or (neg (abs X)). */
6401 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
6403 && XEXP (cond
, 1) == const0_rtx
6404 && GET_CODE (false_rtx
) == NEG
6405 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx
, XEXP (false_rtx
, 0))
6406 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx
, XEXP (cond
, 0))
6407 && ! side_effects_p (true_rtx
))
6412 return simplify_gen_unary (ABS
, mode
, true_rtx
, mode
);
6416 simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
6417 simplify_gen_unary (ABS
, mode
, true_rtx
, mode
),
6423 /* Look for MIN or MAX. */
6425 if ((! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
) || flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)
6427 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 0), true_rtx
)
6428 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 1), false_rtx
)
6429 && ! side_effects_p (cond
))
6434 return simplify_gen_binary (SMAX
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6437 return simplify_gen_binary (SMIN
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6440 return simplify_gen_binary (UMAX
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6443 return simplify_gen_binary (UMIN
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6448 /* If we have (if_then_else COND (OP Z C1) Z) and OP is an identity when its
6449 second operand is zero, this can be done as (OP Z (mult COND C2)) where
6450 C2 = C1 * STORE_FLAG_VALUE. Similarly if OP has an outer ZERO_EXTEND or
6451 SIGN_EXTEND as long as Z is already extended (so we don't destroy it).
6452 We can do this kind of thing in some cases when STORE_FLAG_VALUE is
6453 neither 1 or -1, but it isn't worth checking for. */
6455 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
6457 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6458 && ! side_effects_p (x
))
6460 rtx t
= make_compound_operation (true_rtx
, SET
);
6461 rtx f
= make_compound_operation (false_rtx
, SET
);
6462 rtx cond_op0
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
6463 rtx cond_op1
= XEXP (cond
, 1);
6464 enum rtx_code op
= UNKNOWN
, extend_op
= UNKNOWN
;
6465 machine_mode m
= int_mode
;
6466 rtx z
= 0, c1
= NULL_RTX
;
6468 if ((GET_CODE (t
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (t
) == MINUS
6469 || GET_CODE (t
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (t
) == XOR
6470 || GET_CODE (t
) == ASHIFT
6471 || GET_CODE (t
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (t
) == ASHIFTRT
)
6472 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t
, 0), f
))
6473 c1
= XEXP (t
, 1), op
= GET_CODE (t
), z
= f
;
6475 /* If an identity-zero op is commutative, check whether there
6476 would be a match if we swapped the operands. */
6477 else if ((GET_CODE (t
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (t
) == IOR
6478 || GET_CODE (t
) == XOR
)
6479 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t
, 1), f
))
6480 c1
= XEXP (t
, 0), op
= GET_CODE (t
), z
= f
;
6481 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == SIGN_EXTEND
6482 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6483 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == MINUS
6484 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6485 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
6486 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFT
6487 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6488 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
)
6489 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6490 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0))
6491 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)), f
)
6492 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6494 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)
6495 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0))))))
6497 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6498 extend_op
= SIGN_EXTEND
;
6499 m
= GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6501 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == SIGN_EXTEND
6502 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6503 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6504 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
)
6505 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6506 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1))
6507 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)), f
)
6508 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6510 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)
6511 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1))))))
6513 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6514 extend_op
= SIGN_EXTEND
;
6515 m
= GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6517 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == ZERO_EXTEND
6518 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6519 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == MINUS
6520 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6521 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
6522 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFT
6523 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6524 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
)
6525 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6526 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6527 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0))
6528 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)), f
)
6529 && ((nonzero_bits (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6530 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0))))
6533 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6534 extend_op
= ZERO_EXTEND
;
6535 m
= GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6537 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == ZERO_EXTEND
6538 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6539 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6540 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
)
6541 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6542 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6543 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1))
6544 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)), f
)
6545 && ((nonzero_bits (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6546 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1))))
6549 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6550 extend_op
= ZERO_EXTEND
;
6551 m
= GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6556 temp
= subst (simplify_gen_relational (true_code
, m
, VOIDmode
,
6557 cond_op0
, cond_op1
),
6558 pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
6559 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, m
, temp
,
6560 simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, m
, c1
,
6562 temp
= subst (temp
, pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, 0, 0, 0);
6563 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (op
, m
, gen_lowpart (m
, z
), temp
);
6565 if (extend_op
!= UNKNOWN
)
6566 temp
= simplify_gen_unary (extend_op
, int_mode
, temp
, m
);
6572 /* If we have (if_then_else (ne A 0) C1 0) and either A is known to be 0 or
6573 1 and C1 is a single bit or A is known to be 0 or -1 and C1 is the
6574 negation of a single bit, we can convert this operation to a shift. We
6575 can actually do this more generally, but it doesn't seem worth it. */
6577 if (true_code
== NE
&& XEXP (cond
, 1) == const0_rtx
6578 && false_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& CONST_INT_P (true_rtx
)
6579 && ((1 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond
, 0), mode
)
6580 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx
))) >= 0)
6581 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (cond
, 0), mode
)
6582 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
6583 && (i
= exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (true_rtx
))) >= 0)))
6585 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
,
6586 gen_lowpart (mode
, XEXP (cond
, 0)), i
);
6588 /* (IF_THEN_ELSE (NE A 0) C1 0) is A or a zero-extend of A if the only
6589 non-zero bit in A is C1. */
6590 if (true_code
== NE
&& XEXP (cond
, 1) == const0_rtx
6591 && false_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& CONST_INT_P (true_rtx
)
6592 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (cond
, 0)))
6593 && (UINTVAL (true_rtx
) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
6594 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (cond
, 0)))
6595 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx
) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))) >= 0)
6597 rtx val
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
6598 machine_mode val_mode
= GET_MODE (val
);
6599 if (val_mode
== mode
)
6601 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (val_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
6602 return simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, mode
, val
, val_mode
);
6608 /* Simplify X, a SET expression. Return the new expression. */
6611 simplify_set (rtx x
)
6613 rtx src
= SET_SRC (x
);
6614 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
6616 = GET_MODE (src
) != VOIDmode
? GET_MODE (src
) : GET_MODE (dest
);
6617 rtx_insn
*other_insn
;
6619 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
6621 /* (set (pc) (return)) gets written as (return). */
6622 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == PC
&& ANY_RETURN_P (src
))
6625 /* Now that we know for sure which bits of SRC we are using, see if we can
6626 simplify the expression for the object knowing that we only need the
6629 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
&& HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
6631 src
= force_to_mode (src
, mode
, HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
, 0);
6632 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), src
);
6635 /* If we are setting CC0 or if the source is a COMPARE, look for the use of
6636 the comparison result and try to simplify it unless we already have used
6637 undobuf.other_insn. */
6638 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_CC
6639 || GET_CODE (src
) == COMPARE
6641 && (cc_use
= find_single_use (dest
, subst_insn
, &other_insn
)) != 0
6642 && (undobuf
.other_insn
== 0 || other_insn
== undobuf
.other_insn
)
6643 && COMPARISON_P (*cc_use
)
6644 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (*cc_use
, 0), dest
))
6646 enum rtx_code old_code
= GET_CODE (*cc_use
);
6647 enum rtx_code new_code
;
6649 int other_changed
= 0;
6650 rtx inner_compare
= NULL_RTX
;
6651 machine_mode compare_mode
= GET_MODE (dest
);
6653 if (GET_CODE (src
) == COMPARE
)
6655 op0
= XEXP (src
, 0), op1
= XEXP (src
, 1);
6656 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == COMPARE
&& op1
== const0_rtx
)
6658 inner_compare
= op0
;
6659 op0
= XEXP (inner_compare
, 0), op1
= XEXP (inner_compare
, 1);
6663 op0
= src
, op1
= CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (src
));
6665 tmp
= simplify_relational_operation (old_code
, compare_mode
, VOIDmode
,
6668 new_code
= old_code
;
6669 else if (!CONSTANT_P (tmp
))
6671 new_code
= GET_CODE (tmp
);
6672 op0
= XEXP (tmp
, 0);
6673 op1
= XEXP (tmp
, 1);
6677 rtx pat
= PATTERN (other_insn
);
6678 undobuf
.other_insn
= other_insn
;
6679 SUBST (*cc_use
, tmp
);
6681 /* Attempt to simplify CC user. */
6682 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
6684 rtx new_rtx
= simplify_rtx (SET_SRC (pat
));
6685 if (new_rtx
!= NULL_RTX
)
6686 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat
), new_rtx
);
6689 /* Convert X into a no-op move. */
6690 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
), pc_rtx
);
6691 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), pc_rtx
);
6695 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6696 new_code
= simplify_comparison (new_code
, &op0
, &op1
);
6698 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
6699 /* If this machine has CC modes other than CCmode, check to see if we
6700 need to use a different CC mode here. */
6701 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_CC
)
6702 compare_mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
6703 else if (inner_compare
6704 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner_compare
)) == MODE_CC
6705 && new_code
== old_code
6706 && op0
== XEXP (inner_compare
, 0)
6707 && op1
== XEXP (inner_compare
, 1))
6708 compare_mode
= GET_MODE (inner_compare
);
6710 compare_mode
= SELECT_CC_MODE (new_code
, op0
, op1
);
6712 /* If the mode changed, we have to change SET_DEST, the mode in the
6713 compare, and the mode in the place SET_DEST is used. If SET_DEST is
6714 a hard register, just build new versions with the proper mode. If it
6715 is a pseudo, we lose unless it is only time we set the pseudo, in
6716 which case we can safely change its mode. */
6717 if (!HAVE_cc0
&& compare_mode
!= GET_MODE (dest
))
6719 if (can_change_dest_mode (dest
, 0, compare_mode
))
6721 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (dest
);
6724 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
6725 new_dest
= gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode
, regno
);
6728 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx
[regno
], compare_mode
);
6729 new_dest
= regno_reg_rtx
[regno
];
6732 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
), new_dest
);
6733 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use
, 0), new_dest
);
6739 #endif /* SELECT_CC_MODE */
6741 /* If the code changed, we have to build a new comparison in
6742 undobuf.other_insn. */
6743 if (new_code
!= old_code
)
6745 int other_changed_previously
= other_changed
;
6746 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
6747 rtx old_cc_use
= *cc_use
;
6749 SUBST (*cc_use
, gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code
, GET_MODE (*cc_use
),
6753 /* If the only change we made was to change an EQ into an NE or
6754 vice versa, OP0 has only one bit that might be nonzero, and OP1
6755 is zero, check if changing the user of the condition code will
6756 produce a valid insn. If it won't, we can keep the original code
6757 in that insn by surrounding our operation with an XOR. */
6759 if (((old_code
== NE
&& new_code
== EQ
)
6760 || (old_code
== EQ
&& new_code
== NE
))
6761 && ! other_changed_previously
&& op1
== const0_rtx
6762 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
))
6763 && pow2p_hwi (mask
= nonzero_bits (op0
, GET_MODE (op0
))))
6765 rtx pat
= PATTERN (other_insn
), note
= 0;
6767 if ((recog_for_combine (&pat
, other_insn
, ¬e
) < 0
6768 && ! check_asm_operands (pat
)))
6770 *cc_use
= old_cc_use
;
6773 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (XOR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
6781 undobuf
.other_insn
= other_insn
;
6783 /* Don't generate a compare of a CC with 0, just use that CC. */
6784 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == compare_mode
&& op1
== const0_rtx
)
6786 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), op0
);
6789 /* Otherwise, if we didn't previously have the same COMPARE we
6790 want, create it from scratch. */
6791 else if (GET_CODE (src
) != COMPARE
|| GET_MODE (src
) != compare_mode
6792 || XEXP (src
, 0) != op0
|| XEXP (src
, 1) != op1
)
6794 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode
, op0
, op1
));
6800 /* Get SET_SRC in a form where we have placed back any
6801 compound expressions. Then do the checks below. */
6802 src
= make_compound_operation (src
, SET
);
6803 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), src
);
6806 /* If we have (set x (subreg:m1 (op:m2 ...) 0)) with OP being some operation,
6807 and X being a REG or (subreg (reg)), we may be able to convert this to
6808 (set (subreg:m2 x) (op)).
6810 We can always do this if M1 is narrower than M2 because that means that
6811 we only care about the low bits of the result.
6813 However, on machines without WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS defined, we cannot
6814 perform a narrower operation than requested since the high-order bits will
6815 be undefined. On machine where it is defined, this transformation is safe
6816 as long as M1 and M2 have the same number of words. */
6818 if (GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (src
)
6819 && !OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (src
))
6820 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
)) + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1))
6822 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)))
6823 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
))
6824 && (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
|| !paradoxical_subreg_p (src
))
6825 #ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
6826 && ! (REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6827 && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (dest
),
6828 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)),
6832 || (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
6833 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (dest
)))))
6835 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
),
6836 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)),
6838 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), SUBREG_REG (src
));
6840 src
= SET_SRC (x
), dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
6843 /* If we have (set (cc0) (subreg ...)), we try to remove the subreg
6846 && GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
6847 && subreg_lowpart_p (src
)
6848 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (src
))
6849 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)))))
6851 rtx inner
= SUBREG_REG (src
);
6852 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (inner
);
6854 /* Here we make sure that we don't have a sign bit on. */
6855 if (val_signbit_known_clear_p (GET_MODE (src
),
6856 nonzero_bits (inner
, inner_mode
)))
6858 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), inner
);
6863 /* If we have (set FOO (subreg:M (mem:N BAR) 0)) with M wider than N, this
6864 would require a paradoxical subreg. Replace the subreg with a
6865 zero_extend to avoid the reload that would otherwise be required. */
6867 enum rtx_code extend_op
;
6868 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (src
)
6869 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (src
))
6870 && (extend_op
= load_extend_op (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)))) != UNKNOWN
)
6873 gen_rtx_fmt_e (extend_op
, GET_MODE (src
), SUBREG_REG (src
)));
6878 /* If we don't have a conditional move, SET_SRC is an IF_THEN_ELSE, and we
6879 are comparing an item known to be 0 or -1 against 0, use a logical
6880 operation instead. Check for one of the arms being an IOR of the other
6881 arm with some value. We compute three terms to be IOR'ed together. In
6882 practice, at most two will be nonzero. Then we do the IOR's. */
6884 if (GET_CODE (dest
) != PC
6885 && GET_CODE (src
) == IF_THEN_ELSE
6886 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (src
), &int_mode
)
6887 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == EQ
|| GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == NE
)
6888 && XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 1) == const0_rtx
6889 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0))
6890 && (!HAVE_conditional_move
6891 || ! can_conditionally_move_p (int_mode
))
6892 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0), int_mode
)
6893 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
))
6894 && ! side_effects_p (src
))
6896 rtx true_rtx
= (GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == NE
6897 ? XEXP (src
, 1) : XEXP (src
, 2));
6898 rtx false_rtx
= (GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == NE
6899 ? XEXP (src
, 2) : XEXP (src
, 1));
6900 rtx term1
= const0_rtx
, term2
, term3
;
6902 if (GET_CODE (true_rtx
) == IOR
6903 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx
, 0), false_rtx
))
6904 term1
= false_rtx
, true_rtx
= XEXP (true_rtx
, 1), false_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
6905 else if (GET_CODE (true_rtx
) == IOR
6906 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx
, 1), false_rtx
))
6907 term1
= false_rtx
, true_rtx
= XEXP (true_rtx
, 0), false_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
6908 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx
) == IOR
6909 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx
, 0), true_rtx
))
6910 term1
= true_rtx
, false_rtx
= XEXP (false_rtx
, 1), true_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
6911 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx
) == IOR
6912 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx
, 1), true_rtx
))
6913 term1
= true_rtx
, false_rtx
= XEXP (false_rtx
, 0), true_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
6915 term2
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, int_mode
,
6916 XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0), true_rtx
);
6917 term3
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, int_mode
,
6918 simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, int_mode
,
6919 XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0),
6924 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, int_mode
,
6925 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, int_mode
,
6932 /* If either SRC or DEST is a CLOBBER of (const_int 0), make this
6933 whole thing fail. */
6934 if (GET_CODE (src
) == CLOBBER
&& XEXP (src
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
6936 else if (GET_CODE (dest
) == CLOBBER
&& XEXP (dest
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
6939 /* Convert this into a field assignment operation, if possible. */
6940 return make_field_assignment (x
);
6943 /* Simplify, X, and AND, IOR, or XOR operation, and return the simplified
6947 simplify_logical (rtx x
)
6949 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
6950 rtx op0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
6951 rtx op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6953 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
6956 /* We can call simplify_and_const_int only if we don't lose
6957 any (sign) bits when converting INTVAL (op1) to
6958 "unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT". */
6959 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
)
6960 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
6961 || INTVAL (op1
) > 0))
6963 x
= simplify_and_const_int (x
, mode
, op0
, INTVAL (op1
));
6964 if (GET_CODE (x
) != AND
)
6971 /* If we have any of (and (ior A B) C) or (and (xor A B) C),
6972 apply the distributive law and then the inverse distributive
6973 law to see if things simplify. */
6974 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == XOR
)
6976 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 0);
6980 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (op1
) == XOR
)
6982 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 1);
6989 /* If we have (ior (and A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
6990 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */
6992 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
)
6994 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 0);
6999 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == AND
)
7001 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 1);
7014 /* We consider ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, and SIGN_EXTEND as "compound
7015 operations" because they can be replaced with two more basic operations.
7016 ZERO_EXTEND is also considered "compound" because it can be replaced with
7017 an AND operation, which is simpler, though only one operation.
7019 The function expand_compound_operation is called with an rtx expression
7020 and will convert it to the appropriate shifts and AND operations,
7021 simplifying at each stage.
7023 The function make_compound_operation is called to convert an expression
7024 consisting of shifts and ANDs into the equivalent compound expression.
7025 It is the inverse of this function, loosely speaking. */
7028 expand_compound_operation (rtx x
)
7030 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= 0, len
;
7032 unsigned int modewidth
;
7035 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
7041 /* We can't necessarily use a const_int for a multiword mode;
7042 it depends on implicitly extending the value.
7043 Since we don't know the right way to extend it,
7044 we can't tell whether the implicit way is right.
7046 Even for a mode that is no wider than a const_int,
7047 we can't win, because we need to sign extend one of its bits through
7048 the rest of it, and we don't know which bit. */
7049 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7052 /* Return if (subreg:MODE FROM 0) is not a safe replacement for
7053 (zero_extend:MODE FROM) or (sign_extend:MODE FROM). It is for any MEM
7054 because (SUBREG (MEM...)) is guaranteed to cause the MEM to be
7055 reloaded. If not for that, MEM's would very rarely be safe.
7057 Reject MODEs bigger than a word, because we might not be able
7058 to reference a two-register group starting with an arbitrary register
7059 (and currently gen_lowpart might crash for a SUBREG). */
7061 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))) > UNITS_PER_WORD
)
7064 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7065 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7067 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
7070 len
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
7071 /* If the inner object has VOIDmode (the only way this can happen
7072 is if it is an ASM_OPERANDS), we can't do anything since we don't
7073 know how much masking to do. */
7085 /* If the operand is a CLOBBER, just return it. */
7086 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == CLOBBER
)
7089 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7090 || !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 2))
7091 || GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == VOIDmode
)
7094 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7095 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7097 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
7100 len
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
7101 pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 2));
7103 /* This should stay within the object being extracted, fail otherwise. */
7104 if (len
+ pos
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
7107 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7108 pos
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))) - len
- pos
;
7115 /* Convert sign extension to zero extension, if we know that the high
7116 bit is not set, as this is easier to optimize. It will be converted
7117 back to cheaper alternative in make_extraction. */
7118 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SIGN_EXTEND
7119 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
7120 && ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7121 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)
7122 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
7126 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
7127 rtx temp
= gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
7128 rtx temp2
= expand_compound_operation (temp
);
7130 /* Make sure this is a profitable operation. */
7131 if (set_src_cost (x
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7132 > set_src_cost (temp2
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7134 else if (set_src_cost (x
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7135 > set_src_cost (temp
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7141 /* We can optimize some special cases of ZERO_EXTEND. */
7142 if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
)
7144 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI if we
7145 know that the last value didn't have any inappropriate bits
7147 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7148 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x
)
7149 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
7150 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), GET_MODE (x
))
7151 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))) == 0)
7152 return XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
7154 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7155 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
7156 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))) == GET_MODE (x
)
7157 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
7158 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
7159 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)), GET_MODE (x
))
7160 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))) == 0)
7161 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
7163 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI when foo
7164 is a comparison and STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. This is like
7165 the first case, but it works even when GET_MODE (x) is larger
7166 than HOST_WIDE_INT. */
7167 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7168 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x
)
7169 && COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
7170 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7171 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7172 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))) == 0)
7173 return XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
7175 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7176 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
7177 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))) == GET_MODE (x
)
7178 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
7179 && COMPARISON_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7180 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7181 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7182 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))) == 0)
7183 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
7187 /* If we reach here, we want to return a pair of shifts. The inner
7188 shift is a left shift of BITSIZE - POS - LEN bits. The outer
7189 shift is a right shift of BITSIZE - LEN bits. It is arithmetic or
7190 logical depending on the value of UNSIGNEDP.
7192 If this was a ZERO_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTRACT, this pair of shifts will be
7193 converted into an AND of a shift.
7195 We must check for the case where the left shift would have a negative
7196 count. This can happen in a case like (x >> 31) & 255 on machines
7197 that can't shift by a constant. On those machines, we would first
7198 combine the shift with the AND to produce a variable-position
7199 extraction. Then the constant of 31 would be substituted in
7200 to produce such a position. */
7202 modewidth
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
));
7203 if (modewidth
>= pos
+ len
)
7205 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
7206 tem
= gen_lowpart (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
7207 if (!tem
|| GET_CODE (tem
) == CLOBBER
)
7209 tem
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
,
7210 tem
, modewidth
- pos
- len
);
7211 tem
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, unsignedp
? LSHIFTRT
: ASHIFTRT
,
7212 mode
, tem
, modewidth
- len
);
7214 else if (unsignedp
&& len
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7215 tem
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, GET_MODE (x
),
7216 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
,
7219 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1);
7221 /* Any other cases we can't handle. */
7224 /* If we couldn't do this for some reason, return the original
7226 if (GET_CODE (tem
) == CLOBBER
)
7232 /* X is a SET which contains an assignment of one object into
7233 a part of another (such as a bit-field assignment, STRICT_LOW_PART,
7234 or certain SUBREGS). If possible, convert it into a series of
7237 We half-heartedly support variable positions, but do not at all
7238 support variable lengths. */
7241 expand_field_assignment (const_rtx x
)
7244 rtx pos
; /* Always counts from low bit. */
7246 rtx mask
, cleared
, masked
;
7247 machine_mode compute_mode
;
7249 /* Loop until we find something we can't simplify. */
7252 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7253 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)) == SUBREG
)
7255 inner
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0));
7256 len
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)));
7257 pos
= GEN_INT (subreg_lsb (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)));
7259 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
7260 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1)))
7262 inner
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0);
7263 len
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1));
7264 pos
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2);
7266 /* A constant position should stay within the width of INNER. */
7267 if (CONST_INT_P (pos
)
7268 && INTVAL (pos
) + len
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)))
7271 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7273 if (CONST_INT_P (pos
))
7274 pos
= GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)) - len
7276 else if (GET_CODE (pos
) == MINUS
7277 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (pos
, 1))
7278 && (INTVAL (XEXP (pos
, 1))
7279 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)) - len
))
7280 /* If position is ADJUST - X, new position is X. */
7281 pos
= XEXP (pos
, 0);
7284 HOST_WIDE_INT prec
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
));
7285 pos
= simplify_gen_binary (MINUS
, GET_MODE (pos
),
7286 gen_int_mode (prec
- len
,
7293 /* A SUBREG between two modes that occupy the same numbers of words
7294 can be done by moving the SUBREG to the source. */
7295 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == SUBREG
7296 /* We need SUBREGs to compute nonzero_bits properly. */
7297 && nonzero_sign_valid
7298 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x
)))
7299 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
)
7300 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
))))
7301 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
)))
7303 x
= gen_rtx_SET (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
)),
7305 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
))),
7312 while (GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (inner
))
7313 inner
= SUBREG_REG (inner
);
7315 compute_mode
= GET_MODE (inner
);
7317 /* Don't attempt bitwise arithmetic on non scalar integer modes. */
7318 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (compute_mode
))
7320 /* Don't do anything for vector or complex integral types. */
7321 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (compute_mode
))
7324 /* Try to find an integral mode to pun with. */
7325 if (!int_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (compute_mode
), 0)
7326 .exists (&compute_mode
))
7329 inner
= gen_lowpart (compute_mode
, inner
);
7332 /* Compute a mask of LEN bits, if we can do this on the host machine. */
7333 if (len
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7336 /* Don't try to compute in too wide unsupported modes. */
7337 if (!targetm
.scalar_mode_supported_p (compute_mode
))
7340 /* Now compute the equivalent expression. Make a copy of INNER
7341 for the SET_DEST in case it is a MEM into which we will substitute;
7342 we don't want shared RTL in that case. */
7343 mask
= gen_int_mode ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1,
7345 cleared
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, compute_mode
,
7346 simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, compute_mode
,
7347 simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
,
7352 masked
= simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
, compute_mode
,
7353 simplify_gen_binary (
7355 gen_lowpart (compute_mode
, SET_SRC (x
)),
7359 x
= gen_rtx_SET (copy_rtx (inner
),
7360 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, compute_mode
,
7367 /* Return an RTX for a reference to LEN bits of INNER. If POS_RTX is nonzero,
7368 it is an RTX that represents the (variable) starting position; otherwise,
7369 POS is the (constant) starting bit position. Both are counted from the LSB.
7371 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero for an unsigned reference and zero for a signed one.
7373 IN_DEST is nonzero if this is a reference in the destination of a SET.
7374 This is used when a ZERO_ or SIGN_EXTRACT isn't needed. If nonzero,
7375 a STRICT_LOW_PART will be used, if zero, ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND will
7378 IN_COMPARE is nonzero if we are in a COMPARE. This means that a
7379 ZERO_EXTRACT should be built even for bits starting at bit 0.
7381 MODE is the desired mode of the result (if IN_DEST == 0).
7383 The result is an RTX for the extraction or NULL_RTX if the target
7387 make_extraction (machine_mode mode
, rtx inner
, HOST_WIDE_INT pos
,
7388 rtx pos_rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
, int unsignedp
,
7389 int in_dest
, int in_compare
)
7391 /* This mode describes the size of the storage area
7392 to fetch the overall value from. Within that, we
7393 ignore the POS lowest bits, etc. */
7394 machine_mode is_mode
= GET_MODE (inner
);
7395 machine_mode inner_mode
;
7396 machine_mode wanted_inner_mode
;
7397 machine_mode wanted_inner_reg_mode
= word_mode
;
7398 machine_mode pos_mode
= word_mode
;
7399 machine_mode extraction_mode
= word_mode
;
7401 rtx orig_pos_rtx
= pos_rtx
;
7402 HOST_WIDE_INT orig_pos
;
7404 if (pos_rtx
&& CONST_INT_P (pos_rtx
))
7405 pos
= INTVAL (pos_rtx
), pos_rtx
= 0;
7407 if (GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (inner
))
7409 /* If going from (subreg:SI (mem:QI ...)) to (mem:QI ...),
7410 consider just the QI as the memory to extract from.
7411 The subreg adds or removes high bits; its mode is
7412 irrelevant to the meaning of this extraction,
7413 since POS and LEN count from the lsb. */
7414 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (inner
)))
7415 is_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner
));
7416 inner
= SUBREG_REG (inner
);
7418 else if (GET_CODE (inner
) == ASHIFT
7419 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
7420 && pos_rtx
== 0 && pos
== 0
7421 && len
> UINTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)))
7423 /* We're extracting the least significant bits of an rtx
7424 (ashift X (const_int C)), where LEN > C. Extract the
7425 least significant (LEN - C) bits of X, giving an rtx
7426 whose mode is MODE, then shift it left C times. */
7427 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, XEXP (inner
, 0),
7428 0, 0, len
- INTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)),
7429 unsignedp
, in_dest
, in_compare
);
7431 return gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode
, new_rtx
, XEXP (inner
, 1));
7433 else if (GET_CODE (inner
) == TRUNCATE
)
7434 inner
= XEXP (inner
, 0);
7436 inner_mode
= GET_MODE (inner
);
7438 /* See if this can be done without an extraction. We never can if the
7439 width of the field is not the same as that of some integer mode. For
7440 registers, we can only avoid the extraction if the position is at the
7441 low-order bit and this is either not in the destination or we have the
7442 appropriate STRICT_LOW_PART operation available.
7444 For MEM, we can avoid an extract if the field starts on an appropriate
7445 boundary and we can change the mode of the memory reference. */
7447 scalar_int_mode tmode
;
7448 if (int_mode_for_size (len
, 1).exists (&tmode
)
7449 && ((pos_rtx
== 0 && (pos
% BITS_PER_WORD
) == 0
7451 && (pos
== 0 || REG_P (inner
))
7452 && (inner_mode
== tmode
7454 || TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (tmode
, inner_mode
)
7455 || reg_truncated_to_mode (tmode
, inner
))
7458 && have_insn_for (STRICT_LOW_PART
, tmode
))))
7459 || (MEM_P (inner
) && pos_rtx
== 0
7461 % (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
? GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
)
7462 : BITS_PER_UNIT
)) == 0
7463 /* We can't do this if we are widening INNER_MODE (it
7464 may not be aligned, for one thing). */
7465 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (tmode
, inner_mode
)
7466 && (inner_mode
== tmode
7467 || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner
, 0),
7468 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner
))
7469 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner
))))))
7471 /* If INNER is a MEM, make a new MEM that encompasses just the desired
7472 field. If the original and current mode are the same, we need not
7473 adjust the offset. Otherwise, we do if bytes big endian.
7475 If INNER is not a MEM, get a piece consisting of just the field
7476 of interest (in this case POS % BITS_PER_WORD must be 0). */
7480 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
7482 /* POS counts from lsb, but make OFFSET count in memory order. */
7483 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7484 offset
= (GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
) - len
- pos
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
7486 offset
= pos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
;
7488 new_rtx
= adjust_address_nv (inner
, tmode
, offset
);
7490 else if (REG_P (inner
))
7492 if (tmode
!= inner_mode
)
7494 /* We can't call gen_lowpart in a DEST since we
7495 always want a SUBREG (see below) and it would sometimes
7496 return a new hard register. */
7500 = subreg_offset_from_lsb (tmode
, inner_mode
, pos
);
7502 /* Avoid creating invalid subregs, for example when
7503 simplifying (x>>32)&255. */
7504 if (!validate_subreg (tmode
, inner_mode
, inner
, offset
))
7507 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (tmode
, inner
, offset
);
7510 new_rtx
= gen_lowpart (tmode
, inner
);
7516 new_rtx
= force_to_mode (inner
, tmode
,
7517 len
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7519 : (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1, 0);
7521 /* If this extraction is going into the destination of a SET,
7522 make a STRICT_LOW_PART unless we made a MEM. */
7525 return (MEM_P (new_rtx
) ? new_rtx
7526 : (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) != SUBREG
7527 ? gen_rtx_CLOBBER (tmode
, const0_rtx
)
7528 : gen_rtx_STRICT_LOW_PART (VOIDmode
, new_rtx
)));
7533 if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
))
7534 return simplify_unary_operation (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
,
7535 mode
, new_rtx
, tmode
);
7537 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7538 bit is not set, convert the extraction to the cheaper of
7539 sign and zero extension, that are equivalent in these cases. */
7540 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7541 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode
)
7542 && ((nonzero_bits (new_rtx
, tmode
)
7543 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)) >> 1))
7546 rtx temp
= gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode
, new_rtx
);
7547 rtx temp1
= gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (mode
, new_rtx
);
7549 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7551 if (set_src_cost (temp
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7552 <= set_src_cost (temp1
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7557 /* Otherwise, sign- or zero-extend unless we already are in the
7560 return (gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
,
7564 /* Unless this is a COMPARE or we have a funny memory reference,
7565 don't do anything with zero-extending field extracts starting at
7566 the low-order bit since they are simple AND operations. */
7567 if (pos_rtx
== 0 && pos
== 0 && ! in_dest
7568 && ! in_compare
&& unsignedp
)
7571 /* Unless INNER is not MEM, reject this if we would be spanning bytes or
7572 if the position is not a constant and the length is not 1. In all
7573 other cases, we would only be going outside our object in cases when
7574 an original shift would have been undefined. */
7576 && ((pos_rtx
== 0 && pos
+ len
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
))
7577 || (pos_rtx
!= 0 && len
!= 1)))
7580 enum extraction_pattern pattern
= (in_dest
? EP_insv
7581 : unsignedp
? EP_extzv
: EP_extv
);
7583 /* If INNER is not from memory, we want it to have the mode of a register
7584 extraction pattern's structure operand, or word_mode if there is no
7585 such pattern. The same applies to extraction_mode and pos_mode
7586 and their respective operands.
7588 For memory, assume that the desired extraction_mode and pos_mode
7589 are the same as for a register operation, since at present we don't
7590 have named patterns for aligned memory structures. */
7591 struct extraction_insn insn
;
7592 if (get_best_reg_extraction_insn (&insn
, pattern
,
7593 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode
), mode
))
7595 wanted_inner_reg_mode
= insn
.struct_mode
;
7596 pos_mode
= insn
.pos_mode
;
7597 extraction_mode
= insn
.field_mode
;
7600 /* Never narrow an object, since that might not be safe. */
7602 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
7603 && GET_MODE_SIZE (extraction_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
7604 extraction_mode
= mode
;
7607 wanted_inner_mode
= wanted_inner_reg_mode
;
7610 /* Be careful not to go beyond the extracted object and maintain the
7611 natural alignment of the memory. */
7612 wanted_inner_mode
= smallest_int_mode_for_size (len
);
7613 while (pos
% GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
) + len
7614 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
))
7615 wanted_inner_mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wanted_inner_mode
).require ();
7620 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7622 /* POS is passed as if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0, so we need to convert it to
7623 BITS_BIG_ENDIAN style. If position is constant, compute new
7624 position. Otherwise, build subtraction.
7625 Note that POS is relative to the mode of the original argument.
7626 If it's a MEM we need to recompute POS relative to that.
7627 However, if we're extracting from (or inserting into) a register,
7628 we want to recompute POS relative to wanted_inner_mode. */
7629 int width
= (MEM_P (inner
)
7630 ? GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode
)
7631 : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
));
7634 pos
= width
- len
- pos
;
7637 = gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
),
7638 gen_int_mode (width
- len
, GET_MODE (pos_rtx
)),
7640 /* POS may be less than 0 now, but we check for that below.
7641 Note that it can only be less than 0 if !MEM_P (inner). */
7644 /* If INNER has a wider mode, and this is a constant extraction, try to
7645 make it smaller and adjust the byte to point to the byte containing
7647 if (wanted_inner_mode
!= VOIDmode
7648 && inner_mode
!= wanted_inner_mode
7650 && GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode
)
7652 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner
, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner
))
7653 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner
))
7657 /* The computations below will be correct if the machine is big
7658 endian in both bits and bytes or little endian in bits and bytes.
7659 If it is mixed, we must adjust. */
7661 /* If bytes are big endian and we had a paradoxical SUBREG, we must
7662 adjust OFFSET to compensate. */
7663 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7664 && paradoxical_subreg_p (is_mode
, inner_mode
))
7665 offset
-= GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode
) - GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
);
7667 /* We can now move to the desired byte. */
7668 offset
+= (pos
/ GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
))
7669 * GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode
);
7670 pos
%= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
);
7672 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
!= BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
7673 && is_mode
!= wanted_inner_mode
)
7674 offset
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode
)
7675 - GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode
) - offset
);
7677 inner
= adjust_address_nv (inner
, wanted_inner_mode
, offset
);
7680 /* If INNER is not memory, get it into the proper mode. If we are changing
7681 its mode, POS must be a constant and smaller than the size of the new
7683 else if (!MEM_P (inner
))
7685 /* On the LHS, don't create paradoxical subregs implicitely truncating
7686 the register unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION. */
7688 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (GET_MODE (inner
),
7692 if (GET_MODE (inner
) != wanted_inner_mode
7694 || orig_pos
+ len
> GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
)))
7700 inner
= force_to_mode (inner
, wanted_inner_mode
,
7702 || len
+ orig_pos
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7704 : (((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1)
7709 /* Adjust mode of POS_RTX, if needed. If we want a wider mode, we
7710 have to zero extend. Otherwise, we can just use a SUBREG. */
7712 && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode
) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
)))
7714 rtx temp
= simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, pos_mode
, pos_rtx
,
7715 GET_MODE (pos_rtx
));
7717 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7718 bit is not set, convert extraction to cheaper one - either
7719 SIGN_EXTENSION or ZERO_EXTENSION, that are equivalent in these
7721 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7722 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
))
7723 && ((nonzero_bits (pos_rtx
, GET_MODE (pos_rtx
))
7724 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)
7725 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
)))
7729 rtx temp1
= simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND
, pos_mode
, pos_rtx
,
7730 GET_MODE (pos_rtx
));
7732 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7734 if (set_src_cost (temp1
, pos_mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7735 < set_src_cost (temp
, pos_mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7741 /* Make POS_RTX unless we already have it and it is correct. If we don't
7742 have a POS_RTX but we do have an ORIG_POS_RTX, the latter must
7744 if (pos_rtx
== 0 && orig_pos_rtx
!= 0 && INTVAL (orig_pos_rtx
) == pos
)
7745 pos_rtx
= orig_pos_rtx
;
7747 else if (pos_rtx
== 0)
7748 pos_rtx
= GEN_INT (pos
);
7750 /* Make the required operation. See if we can use existing rtx. */
7751 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_fmt_eee (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTRACT
: SIGN_EXTRACT
,
7752 extraction_mode
, inner
, GEN_INT (len
), pos_rtx
);
7754 new_rtx
= gen_lowpart (mode
, new_rtx
);
7759 /* See if X contains an ASHIFT of COUNT or more bits that can be commuted
7760 with any other operations in X. Return X without that shift if so. */
7763 extract_left_shift (rtx x
, int count
)
7765 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
7766 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
7772 /* This is the shift itself. If it is wide enough, we will return
7773 either the value being shifted if the shift count is equal to
7774 COUNT or a shift for the difference. */
7775 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7776 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= count
)
7777 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
7778 INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) - count
);
7782 if ((tem
= extract_left_shift (XEXP (x
, 0), count
)) != 0)
7783 return simplify_gen_unary (code
, mode
, tem
, mode
);
7787 case PLUS
: case IOR
: case XOR
: case AND
:
7788 /* If we can safely shift this constant and we find the inner shift,
7789 make a new operation. */
7790 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7791 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
7792 & (((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< count
)) - 1)) == 0
7793 && (tem
= extract_left_shift (XEXP (x
, 0), count
)) != 0)
7795 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >> count
;
7796 return simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, tem
,
7797 gen_int_mode (val
, mode
));
7808 /* Subroutine of make_compound_operation. *X_PTR is the rtx at the current
7809 level of the expression and MODE is its mode. IN_CODE is as for
7810 make_compound_operation. *NEXT_CODE_PTR is the value of IN_CODE
7811 that should be used when recursing on operands of *X_PTR.
7813 There are two possible actions:
7815 - Return null. This tells the caller to recurse on *X_PTR with IN_CODE
7816 equal to *NEXT_CODE_PTR, after which *X_PTR holds the final value.
7818 - Return a new rtx, which the caller returns directly. */
7821 make_compound_operation_int (machine_mode mode
, rtx
*x_ptr
,
7822 enum rtx_code in_code
,
7823 enum rtx_code
*next_code_ptr
)
7826 enum rtx_code next_code
= *next_code_ptr
;
7827 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
7828 int mode_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
7833 bool equality_comparison
= false;
7837 equality_comparison
= true;
7841 /* Process depending on the code of this operation. If NEW is set
7842 nonzero, it will be returned. */
7847 /* Convert shifts by constants into multiplications if inside
7849 if (in_code
== MEM
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7850 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7851 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0)
7853 HOST_WIDE_INT count
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
7854 HOST_WIDE_INT multval
= HOST_WIDE_INT_1
<< count
;
7856 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), next_code
);
7857 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == NEG
)
7859 new_rtx
= XEXP (new_rtx
, 0);
7862 multval
= trunc_int_for_mode (multval
, mode
);
7863 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, new_rtx
, gen_int_mode (multval
, mode
));
7870 lhs
= make_compound_operation (lhs
, next_code
);
7871 rhs
= make_compound_operation (rhs
, next_code
);
7872 if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs
, 0)) == NEG
)
7874 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (XEXP (lhs
, 0), 0),
7876 new_rtx
= simplify_gen_binary (MINUS
, mode
, rhs
, tem
);
7878 else if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == MULT
7879 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)) < 0))
7881 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (lhs
, 0),
7882 simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
7885 new_rtx
= simplify_gen_binary (MINUS
, mode
, rhs
, tem
);
7889 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), lhs
);
7890 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), rhs
);
7892 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x
);
7898 lhs
= make_compound_operation (lhs
, next_code
);
7899 rhs
= make_compound_operation (rhs
, next_code
);
7900 if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs
, 0)) == NEG
)
7902 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (XEXP (rhs
, 0), 0),
7904 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, tem
, lhs
);
7906 else if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == MULT
7907 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs
, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs
, 1)) < 0))
7909 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (rhs
, 0),
7910 simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
7913 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, tem
, lhs
);
7917 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), lhs
);
7918 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), rhs
);
7923 /* If the second operand is not a constant, we can't do anything
7925 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
7928 /* If the constant is a power of two minus one and the first operand
7929 is a logical right shift, make an extraction. */
7930 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7931 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7933 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), next_code
);
7934 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1), i
, 1,
7935 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
7938 /* Same as previous, but for (subreg (lshiftrt ...)) in first op. */
7939 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
7940 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
7941 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))) == LSHIFTRT
7942 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7944 rtx inner_x0
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
7945 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (inner_x0
);
7946 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (inner_x0
, 0), next_code
);
7947 new_rtx
= make_extraction (inner_mode
, new_rtx
, 0,
7949 i
, 1, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
7951 /* If we narrowed the mode when dropping the subreg, then we lose. */
7952 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
7955 /* If that didn't give anything, see if the AND simplifies on
7957 if (!new_rtx
&& i
>= 0)
7959 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), next_code
);
7960 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, NULL_RTX
, i
, 1,
7961 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
7964 /* Same as previous, but for (xor/ior (lshiftrt...) (lshiftrt...)). */
7965 else if ((GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == XOR
7966 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == IOR
)
7967 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7968 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) == LSHIFTRT
7969 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7971 /* Apply the distributive law, and then try to make extractions. */
7972 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), mode
,
7973 gen_rtx_AND (mode
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
7975 gen_rtx_AND (mode
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1),
7977 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (new_rtx
, in_code
);
7980 /* If we are have (and (rotate X C) M) and C is larger than the number
7981 of bits in M, this is an extraction. */
7983 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ROTATE
7984 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
7985 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0
7986 && i
<= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)))
7988 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), next_code
);
7989 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
,
7990 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
7991 - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))),
7992 NULL_RTX
, i
, 1, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
7995 /* On machines without logical shifts, if the operand of the AND is
7996 a logical shift and our mask turns off all the propagated sign
7997 bits, we can replace the logical shift with an arithmetic shift. */
7998 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7999 && !have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT
, mode
)
8000 && have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT
, mode
)
8001 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8002 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) >= 0
8003 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8004 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
8006 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
8008 mask
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
8009 if ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & ~mask
) == 0)
8011 gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode
,
8012 make_compound_operation
8013 (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), next_code
),
8014 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)));
8017 /* If the constant is one less than a power of two, this might be
8018 representable by an extraction even if no shift is present.
8019 If it doesn't end up being a ZERO_EXTEND, we will ignore it unless
8020 we are in a COMPARE. */
8021 else if ((i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
8022 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
,
8023 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0),
8025 0, NULL_RTX
, i
, 1, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8027 /* If we are in a comparison and this is an AND with a power of two,
8028 convert this into the appropriate bit extract. */
8029 else if (in_code
== COMPARE
8030 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)))) >= 0
8031 && (equality_comparison
|| i
< GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1))
8032 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
,
8033 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0),
8035 i
, NULL_RTX
, 1, 1, 0, 1);
8037 /* If the one operand is a paradoxical subreg of a register or memory and
8038 the constant (limited to the smaller mode) has only zero bits where
8039 the sub expression has known zero bits, this can be expressed as
8041 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
)
8045 sub
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
8046 machine_mode sub_mode
= GET_MODE (sub
);
8047 if ((REG_P (sub
) || MEM_P (sub
))
8048 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (sub_mode
) < mode_width
)
8050 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mode_mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (sub_mode
);
8051 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
8053 /* original AND constant with all the known zero bits set */
8054 mask
= UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) | (~nonzero_bits (sub
, sub_mode
));
8055 if ((mask
& mode_mask
) == mode_mask
)
8057 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (sub
, next_code
);
8058 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, 0,
8059 GET_MODE_PRECISION (sub_mode
),
8060 1, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8068 /* If the sign bit is known to be zero, replace this with an
8069 arithmetic shift. */
8070 if (have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT
, mode
)
8071 && ! have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT
, mode
)
8072 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8073 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
) & (1 << (mode_width
- 1))) == 0)
8075 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode
,
8076 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0),
8088 /* If we have (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) with C2 >= C1,
8089 this is a SIGN_EXTRACT. */
8090 if (CONST_INT_P (rhs
)
8091 && GET_CODE (lhs
) == ASHIFT
8092 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
8093 && INTVAL (rhs
) >= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
8094 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)) >= 0
8095 && INTVAL (rhs
) < mode_width
)
8097 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (lhs
, 0), next_code
);
8098 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
,
8099 INTVAL (rhs
) - INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)),
8100 NULL_RTX
, mode_width
- INTVAL (rhs
),
8101 code
== LSHIFTRT
, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8105 /* See if we have operations between an ASHIFTRT and an ASHIFT.
8106 If so, try to merge the shifts into a SIGN_EXTEND. We could
8107 also do this for some cases of SIGN_EXTRACT, but it doesn't
8108 seem worth the effort; the case checked for occurs on Alpha. */
8111 && ! (GET_CODE (lhs
) == SUBREG
8112 && (OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (lhs
))))
8113 && CONST_INT_P (rhs
)
8114 && INTVAL (rhs
) >= 0
8115 && INTVAL (rhs
) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8116 && INTVAL (rhs
) < mode_width
8117 && (new_rtx
= extract_left_shift (lhs
, INTVAL (rhs
))) != 0)
8118 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, make_compound_operation (new_rtx
, next_code
),
8119 0, NULL_RTX
, mode_width
- INTVAL (rhs
),
8120 code
== LSHIFTRT
, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8125 /* Call ourselves recursively on the inner expression. If we are
8126 narrowing the object and it has a different RTL code from
8127 what it originally did, do this SUBREG as a force_to_mode. */
8129 rtx inner
= SUBREG_REG (x
), simplified
;
8130 enum rtx_code subreg_code
= in_code
;
8132 /* If the SUBREG is masking of a logical right shift,
8133 make an extraction. */
8134 if (GET_CODE (inner
) == LSHIFTRT
8135 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
8136 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner
))
8137 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1))
8138 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)))
8139 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
))
8141 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (inner
, 0), next_code
);
8142 int width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
))
8143 - INTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1));
8144 if (width
> mode_width
)
8146 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, XEXP (inner
, 1),
8147 width
, 1, 0, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8151 /* If in_code is COMPARE, it isn't always safe to pass it through
8152 to the recursive make_compound_operation call. */
8153 if (subreg_code
== COMPARE
8154 && (!subreg_lowpart_p (x
)
8155 || GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
8156 /* (subreg:SI (and:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 0x800000000)) 0)
8157 is (const_int 0), rather than
8158 (subreg:SI (lshiftrt:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 35)) 0).
8159 Similarly (subreg:QI (and:SI (reg:SI) (const_int 0x80)) 0)
8160 for non-equality comparisons against 0 is not equivalent
8161 to (subreg:QI (lshiftrt:SI (reg:SI) (const_int 7)) 0). */
8162 || (GET_CODE (inner
) == AND
8163 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
8164 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner
))
8165 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)))
8166 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) - 1)))
8169 tem
= make_compound_operation (inner
, subreg_code
);
8172 = simplify_subreg (mode
, tem
, GET_MODE (inner
), SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
8176 if (GET_CODE (tem
) != GET_CODE (inner
)
8177 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner
))
8178 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
))
8181 = force_to_mode (tem
, mode
, HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
, 0);
8183 /* If we have something other than a SUBREG, we might have
8184 done an expansion, so rerun ourselves. */
8185 if (GET_CODE (newer
) != SUBREG
)
8186 newer
= make_compound_operation (newer
, in_code
);
8188 /* force_to_mode can expand compounds. If it just re-expanded the
8189 compound, use gen_lowpart to convert to the desired mode. */
8190 if (rtx_equal_p (newer
, x
)
8191 /* Likewise if it re-expanded the compound only partially.
8192 This happens for SUBREG of ZERO_EXTRACT if they extract
8193 the same number of bits. */
8194 || (GET_CODE (newer
) == SUBREG
8195 && (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer
)) == LSHIFTRT
8196 || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer
)) == ASHIFTRT
)
8197 && GET_CODE (inner
) == AND
8198 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (newer
), XEXP (inner
, 0))))
8199 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x
), tem
);
8214 *x_ptr
= gen_lowpart (mode
, new_rtx
);
8215 *next_code_ptr
= next_code
;
8219 /* Look at the expression rooted at X. Look for expressions
8220 equivalent to ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, ZERO_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTEND.
8221 Form these expressions.
8223 Return the new rtx, usually just X.
8225 Also, for machines like the VAX that don't have logical shift insns,
8226 try to convert logical to arithmetic shift operations in cases where
8227 they are equivalent. This undoes the canonicalizations to logical
8228 shifts done elsewhere.
8230 We try, as much as possible, to re-use rtl expressions to save memory.
8232 IN_CODE says what kind of expression we are processing. Normally, it is
8233 SET. In a memory address it is MEM. When processing the arguments of
8234 a comparison or a COMPARE against zero, it is COMPARE, or EQ if more
8235 precisely it is an equality comparison against zero. */
8238 make_compound_operation (rtx x
, enum rtx_code in_code
)
8240 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8243 enum rtx_code next_code
;
8246 /* Select the code to be used in recursive calls. Once we are inside an
8247 address, we stay there. If we have a comparison, set to COMPARE,
8248 but once inside, go back to our default of SET. */
8250 next_code
= (code
== MEM
? MEM
8251 : ((code
== COMPARE
|| COMPARISON_P (x
))
8252 && XEXP (x
, 1) == const0_rtx
) ? COMPARE
8253 : in_code
== COMPARE
|| in_code
== EQ
? SET
: in_code
);
8255 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)))
8257 rtx new_rtx
= make_compound_operation_int (GET_MODE (x
), &x
,
8258 in_code
, &next_code
);
8261 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8264 /* Now recursively process each operand of this operation. We need to
8265 handle ZERO_EXTEND specially so that we don't lose track of the
8267 if (code
== ZERO_EXTEND
)
8269 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), next_code
);
8270 tem
= simplify_const_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND
, GET_MODE (x
),
8271 new_rtx
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
8274 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), new_rtx
);
8278 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
8279 for (i
= 0; i
< GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
); i
++)
8282 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, i
), next_code
);
8283 SUBST (XEXP (x
, i
), new_rtx
);
8285 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
8286 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
8288 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), next_code
);
8289 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), new_rtx
);
8292 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x
);
8296 /* Given M see if it is a value that would select a field of bits
8297 within an item, but not the entire word. Return -1 if not.
8298 Otherwise, return the starting position of the field, where 0 is the
8301 *PLEN is set to the length of the field. */
8304 get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*plen
)
8306 /* Get the bit number of the first 1 bit from the right, -1 if none. */
8307 int pos
= m
? ctz_hwi (m
) : -1;
8311 /* Now shift off the low-order zero bits and see if we have a
8312 power of two minus 1. */
8313 len
= exact_log2 ((m
>> pos
) + 1);
8322 /* If X refers to a register that equals REG in value, replace these
8323 references with REG. */
8325 canon_reg_for_combine (rtx x
, rtx reg
)
8332 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8333 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
))
8336 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8337 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8338 return simplify_gen_unary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
), op0
,
8343 case RTX_COMM_ARITH
:
8344 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8345 op1
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 1), reg
);
8346 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
8347 return simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
), op0
, op1
);
8351 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE
:
8352 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8353 op1
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 1), reg
);
8354 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
8355 return simplify_gen_relational (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
),
8356 GET_MODE (op0
), op0
, op1
);
8360 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS
:
8361 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8362 op1
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 1), reg
);
8363 op2
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 2), reg
);
8364 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1) || op2
!= XEXP (x
, 2))
8365 return simplify_gen_ternary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
),
8366 GET_MODE (op0
), op0
, op1
, op2
);
8372 if (rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (reg
), x
)
8373 || rtx_equal_p (reg
, get_last_value (x
)))
8382 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
8384 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
8387 rtx op
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, i
), reg
);
8388 if (op
!= XEXP (x
, i
))
8398 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
8401 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
8403 rtx op
= canon_reg_for_combine (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), reg
);
8404 if (op
!= XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
))
8411 XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
) = op
;
8422 /* Return X converted to MODE. If the value is already truncated to
8423 MODE we can just return a subreg even though in the general case we
8424 would need an explicit truncation. */
8427 gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode mode
, rtx x
)
8429 if (!CONST_INT_P (x
)
8430 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
))
8431 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
, GET_MODE (x
))
8432 && !(REG_P (x
) && reg_truncated_to_mode (mode
, x
)))
8434 /* Bit-cast X into an integer mode. */
8435 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)))
8436 x
= gen_lowpart (int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (x
)).require (), x
);
8437 x
= simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE
, int_mode_for_mode (mode
).require (),
8441 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
8444 /* See if X can be simplified knowing that we will only refer to it in
8445 MODE and will only refer to those bits that are nonzero in MASK.
8446 If other bits are being computed or if masking operations are done
8447 that select a superset of the bits in MASK, they can sometimes be
8450 Return a possibly simplified expression, but always convert X to
8451 MODE. If X is a CONST_INT, AND the CONST_INT with MASK.
8453 If JUST_SELECT is nonzero, don't optimize by noticing that bits in MASK
8454 are all off in X. This is used when X will be complemented, by either
8455 NOT, NEG, or XOR. */
8458 force_to_mode (rtx x
, machine_mode mode
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
,
8461 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8462 int next_select
= just_select
|| code
== XOR
|| code
== NOT
|| code
== NEG
;
8463 machine_mode op_mode
;
8464 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT fuller_mask
, nonzero
;
8467 /* If this is a CALL or ASM_OPERANDS, don't do anything. Some of the
8468 code below will do the wrong thing since the mode of such an
8469 expression is VOIDmode.
8471 Also do nothing if X is a CLOBBER; this can happen if X was
8472 the return value from a call to gen_lowpart. */
8473 if (code
== CALL
|| code
== ASM_OPERANDS
|| code
== CLOBBER
)
8476 /* We want to perform the operation in its present mode unless we know
8477 that the operation is valid in MODE, in which case we do the operation
8479 op_mode
= ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
))
8480 && have_insn_for (code
, mode
))
8481 ? mode
: GET_MODE (x
));
8483 /* It is not valid to do a right-shift in a narrower mode
8484 than the one it came in with. */
8485 if ((code
== LSHIFTRT
|| code
== ASHIFTRT
)
8486 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
8487 op_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
8489 /* Truncate MASK to fit OP_MODE. */
8491 mask
&= GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode
);
8493 /* When we have an arithmetic operation, or a shift whose count we
8494 do not know, we need to assume that all bits up to the highest-order
8495 bit in MASK will be needed. This is how we form such a mask. */
8496 if (mask
& (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
- 1)))
8497 fuller_mask
= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
;
8499 fuller_mask
= ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (floor_log2 (mask
) + 1))
8502 /* Determine what bits of X are guaranteed to be (non)zero. */
8503 nonzero
= nonzero_bits (x
, mode
);
8505 /* If none of the bits in X are needed, return a zero. */
8506 if (!just_select
&& (nonzero
& mask
) == 0 && !side_effects_p (x
))
8509 /* If X is a CONST_INT, return a new one. Do this here since the
8510 test below will fail. */
8511 if (CONST_INT_P (x
))
8513 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
))
8514 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (x
) & mask
, mode
);
8517 x
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (x
) & mask
);
8518 return gen_lowpart_common (mode
, x
);
8522 /* If X is narrower than MODE and we want all the bits in X's mode, just
8523 get X in the proper mode. */
8524 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (mode
, GET_MODE (x
))
8525 && (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
)) & ~mask
) == 0)
8526 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
8528 /* We can ignore the effect of a SUBREG if it narrows the mode or
8529 if the constant masks to zero all the bits the mode doesn't have. */
8530 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
8531 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
)
8532 && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
))
8533 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))))
8535 & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
))
8536 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)))))))
8537 return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x
), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8539 /* The arithmetic simplifications here only work for scalar integer modes. */
8540 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
) || !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)))
8541 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode
, x
);
8546 /* If X is a (clobber (const_int)), return it since we know we are
8547 generating something that won't match. */
8554 x
= expand_compound_operation (x
);
8555 if (GET_CODE (x
) != code
)
8556 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8560 /* Similarly for a truncate. */
8561 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8564 /* If this is an AND with a constant, convert it into an AND
8565 whose constant is the AND of that constant with MASK. If it
8566 remains an AND of MASK, delete it since it is redundant. */
8568 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
8570 x
= simplify_and_const_int (x
, op_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
8571 mask
& INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)));
8573 /* If X is still an AND, see if it is an AND with a mask that
8574 is just some low-order bits. If so, and it is MASK, we don't
8577 if (GET_CODE (x
) == AND
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8578 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
)))
8582 /* If it remains an AND, try making another AND with the bits
8583 in the mode mask that aren't in MASK turned on. If the
8584 constant in the AND is wide enough, this might make a
8585 cheaper constant. */
8587 if (GET_CODE (x
) == AND
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8588 && GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
)) != mask
8589 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)))
8591 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT cval
8592 = UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8593 | (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
)) & ~mask
);
8596 y
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
8597 gen_int_mode (cval
, GET_MODE (x
)));
8598 if (set_src_cost (y
, GET_MODE (x
), optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
8599 < set_src_cost (x
, GET_MODE (x
), optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
8609 /* In (and (plus FOO C1) M), if M is a mask that just turns off
8610 low-order bits (as in an alignment operation) and FOO is already
8611 aligned to that boundary, mask C1 to that boundary as well.
8612 This may eliminate that PLUS and, later, the AND. */
8615 unsigned int width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
8616 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT smask
= mask
;
8618 /* If MODE is narrower than HOST_WIDE_INT and mask is a negative
8619 number, sign extend it. */
8621 if (width
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8622 && (smask
& (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (width
- 1))) != 0)
8623 smask
|= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
<< width
;
8625 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8626 && pow2p_hwi (- smask
)
8627 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
) & ~smask
) == 0
8628 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & ~smask
) != 0)
8629 return force_to_mode (plus_constant (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
8630 (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & smask
)),
8631 mode
, smask
, next_select
);
8637 /* Substituting into the operands of a widening MULT is not likely to
8638 create RTL matching a machine insn. */
8640 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8641 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
8642 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8643 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
8644 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
8645 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0)))
8646 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode
, x
);
8648 /* For PLUS, MINUS and MULT, we need any bits less significant than the
8649 most significant bit in MASK since carries from those bits will
8650 affect the bits we are interested in. */
8655 /* If X is (minus C Y) where C's least set bit is larger than any bit
8656 in the mask, then we may replace with (neg Y). */
8657 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
8658 && least_bit_hwi (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 0))) > mask
)
8660 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 1),
8662 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8665 /* Similarly, if C contains every bit in the fuller_mask, then we may
8666 replace with (not Y). */
8667 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
8668 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 0)) | fuller_mask
) == UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 0))))
8670 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, GET_MODE (x
),
8671 XEXP (x
, 1), GET_MODE (x
));
8672 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8680 /* If X is (ior (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2), try to commute the IOR and
8681 LSHIFTRT so we end up with an (and (lshiftrt (ior ...) ...) ...)
8682 operation which may be a bitfield extraction. Ensure that the
8683 constant we form is not wider than the mode of X. */
8685 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8686 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8687 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) >= 0
8688 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8689 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8690 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8691 + floor_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))))
8692 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
8693 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8694 & ~nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (x
))) == 0)
8696 temp
= gen_int_mode ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & mask
)
8697 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)),
8699 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
),
8700 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), temp
);
8701 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (x
), temp
,
8702 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
8703 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8707 /* For most binary operations, just propagate into the operation and
8708 change the mode if we have an operation of that mode. */
8710 op0
= force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8711 op1
= force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 1), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8713 /* If we ended up truncating both operands, truncate the result of the
8714 operation instead. */
8715 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == TRUNCATE
8716 && GET_CODE (op1
) == TRUNCATE
)
8718 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
8719 op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0);
8722 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
, op0
);
8723 op1
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
, op1
);
8725 if (op_mode
!= GET_MODE (x
) || op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
8726 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, op_mode
, op0
, op1
);
8730 /* For left shifts, do the same, but just for the first operand.
8731 However, we cannot do anything with shifts where we cannot
8732 guarantee that the counts are smaller than the size of the mode
8733 because such a count will have a different meaning in a
8736 if (! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8737 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8738 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
8739 && ! (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) != VOIDmode
8740 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1)))
8741 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))))
8744 /* If the shift count is a constant and we can do arithmetic in
8745 the mode of the shift, refine which bits we need. Otherwise, use the
8746 conservative form of the mask. */
8747 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8748 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8749 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op_mode
)
8750 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode
))
8751 mask
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
8755 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
,
8756 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), op_mode
,
8757 mask
, next_select
));
8759 if (op_mode
!= GET_MODE (x
) || op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8760 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, op_mode
, op0
, XEXP (x
, 1));
8764 /* Here we can only do something if the shift count is a constant,
8765 this shift constant is valid for the host, and we can do arithmetic
8768 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8769 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8770 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8771 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode
))
8773 rtx inner
= XEXP (x
, 0);
8774 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_mask
;
8776 /* Select the mask of the bits we need for the shift operand. */
8777 inner_mask
= mask
<< INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
8779 /* We can only change the mode of the shift if we can do arithmetic
8780 in the mode of the shift and INNER_MASK is no wider than the
8781 width of X's mode. */
8782 if ((inner_mask
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
))) != 0)
8783 op_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
8785 inner
= force_to_mode (inner
, op_mode
, inner_mask
, next_select
);
8787 if (GET_MODE (x
) != op_mode
|| inner
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8788 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, op_mode
, inner
, XEXP (x
, 1));
8791 /* If we have (and (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2) where the combination of the
8792 shift and AND produces only copies of the sign bit (C2 is one less
8793 than a power of two), we can do this with just a shift. */
8795 if (GET_CODE (x
) == LSHIFTRT
8796 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8797 /* The shift puts one of the sign bit copies in the least significant
8799 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8800 + num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
8801 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
8802 && pow2p_hwi (mask
+ 1)
8803 /* Number of bits left after the shift must be more than the mask
8805 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + exact_log2 (mask
+ 1))
8806 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
8807 /* Must be more sign bit copies than the mask needs. */
8808 && ((int) num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
8809 >= exact_log2 (mask
+ 1)))
8810 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
8811 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
))
8812 - exact_log2 (mask
+ 1)));
8817 /* If we are just looking for the sign bit, we don't need this shift at
8818 all, even if it has a variable count. */
8819 if (val_signbit_p (GET_MODE (x
), mask
))
8820 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8822 /* If this is a shift by a constant, get a mask that contains those bits
8823 that are not copies of the sign bit. We then have two cases: If
8824 MASK only includes those bits, this can be a logical shift, which may
8825 allow simplifications. If MASK is a single-bit field not within
8826 those bits, we are requesting a copy of the sign bit and hence can
8827 shift the sign bit to the appropriate location. */
8829 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8830 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
8834 /* If the considered data is wider than HOST_WIDE_INT, we can't
8835 represent a mask for all its bits in a single scalar.
8836 But we only care about the lower bits, so calculate these. */
8838 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
8840 nonzero
= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
;
8842 /* GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8843 is the number of bits a full-width mask would have set.
8844 We need only shift if these are fewer than nonzero can
8845 hold. If not, we must keep all bits set in nonzero. */
8847 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8848 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
8849 nonzero
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8850 + HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8851 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) ;
8855 nonzero
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
));
8856 nonzero
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
8859 if ((mask
& ~nonzero
) == 0)
8861 x
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (x
),
8862 XEXP (x
, 0), INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)));
8863 if (GET_CODE (x
) != ASHIFTRT
)
8864 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8867 else if ((i
= exact_log2 (mask
)) >= 0)
8869 x
= simplify_shift_const
8870 (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
8871 GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) - 1 - i
);
8873 if (GET_CODE (x
) != ASHIFTRT
)
8874 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8878 /* If MASK is 1, convert this to an LSHIFTRT. This can be done
8879 even if the shift count isn't a constant. */
8881 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (x
),
8882 XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
8886 /* If this is a zero- or sign-extension operation that just affects bits
8887 we don't care about, remove it. Be sure the call above returned
8888 something that is still a shift. */
8890 if ((GET_CODE (x
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (x
) == ASHIFTRT
)
8891 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8892 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8893 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8894 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) - (floor_log2 (mask
) + 1))
8895 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFT
8896 && XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1) == XEXP (x
, 1))
8897 return force_to_mode (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), mode
, mask
,
8904 /* If the shift count is constant and we can do computations
8905 in the mode of X, compute where the bits we care about are.
8906 Otherwise, we can't do anything. Don't change the mode of
8907 the shift or propagate MODE into the shift, though. */
8908 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8909 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0)
8911 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (code
== ROTATE
? ROTATERT
: ROTATE
,
8913 gen_int_mode (mask
, GET_MODE (x
)),
8915 if (temp
&& CONST_INT_P (temp
))
8916 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, GET_MODE (x
),
8917 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (x
),
8918 INTVAL (temp
), next_select
),
8924 /* If we just want the low-order bit, the NEG isn't needed since it
8925 won't change the low-order bit. */
8927 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, just_select
);
8929 /* We need any bits less significant than the most significant bit in
8930 MASK since carries from those bits will affect the bits we are
8936 /* (not FOO) is (xor FOO CONST), so if FOO is an LSHIFTRT, we can do the
8937 same as the XOR case above. Ensure that the constant we form is not
8938 wider than the mode of X. */
8940 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8941 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8942 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) >= 0
8943 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) + floor_log2 (mask
)
8944 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
8945 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
8947 temp
= gen_int_mode (mask
<< INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)),
8949 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (XOR
, GET_MODE (x
),
8950 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), temp
);
8951 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (x
),
8952 temp
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
8954 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8957 /* (and (not FOO) CONST) is (not (or FOO (not CONST))), so we must
8958 use the full mask inside the NOT. */
8962 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
,
8963 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
,
8965 if (op_mode
!= GET_MODE (x
) || op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8966 x
= simplify_gen_unary (code
, op_mode
, op0
, op_mode
);
8970 /* (and (ne FOO 0) CONST) can be (and FOO CONST) if CONST is included
8971 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE and FOO has a single bit that might be nonzero,
8972 which is equal to STORE_FLAG_VALUE. */
8973 if ((mask
& ~STORE_FLAG_VALUE
) == 0
8974 && XEXP (x
, 1) == const0_rtx
8975 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == mode
8976 && pow2p_hwi (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
))
8977 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
)
8978 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) STORE_FLAG_VALUE
))
8979 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8984 /* We have no way of knowing if the IF_THEN_ELSE can itself be
8985 written in a narrower mode. We play it safe and do not do so. */
8987 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x
),
8988 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 1), mode
,
8989 mask
, next_select
));
8990 op1
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x
),
8991 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 2), mode
,
8992 mask
, next_select
));
8993 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 1) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 2))
8994 x
= simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE
, GET_MODE (x
),
8995 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), XEXP (x
, 0),
9003 /* Ensure we return a value of the proper mode. */
9004 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode
, x
);
9007 /* Return nonzero if X is an expression that has one of two values depending on
9008 whether some other value is zero or nonzero. In that case, we return the
9009 value that is being tested, *PTRUE is set to the value if the rtx being
9010 returned has a nonzero value, and *PFALSE is set to the other alternative.
9012 If we return zero, we set *PTRUE and *PFALSE to X. */
9015 if_then_else_cond (rtx x
, rtx
*ptrue
, rtx
*pfalse
)
9017 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
9018 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9019 rtx cond0
, cond1
, true0
, true1
, false0
, false1
;
9020 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz
;
9022 /* If we are comparing a value against zero, we are done. */
9023 if ((code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
9024 && XEXP (x
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
9026 *ptrue
= (code
== NE
) ? const_true_rtx
: const0_rtx
;
9027 *pfalse
= (code
== NE
) ? const0_rtx
: const_true_rtx
;
9031 /* If this is a unary operation whose operand has one of two values, apply
9032 our opcode to compute those values. */
9033 else if (UNARY_P (x
)
9034 && (cond0
= if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x
, 0), &true0
, &false0
)) != 0)
9036 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_unary (code
, mode
, true0
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
9037 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_unary (code
, mode
, false0
,
9038 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
9042 /* If this is a COMPARE, do nothing, since the IF_THEN_ELSE we would
9043 make can't possibly match and would suppress other optimizations. */
9044 else if (code
== COMPARE
)
9047 /* If this is a binary operation, see if either side has only one of two
9048 values. If either one does or if both do and they are conditional on
9049 the same value, compute the new true and false values. */
9050 else if (BINARY_P (x
))
9052 rtx op0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
9053 rtx op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
9054 cond0
= if_then_else_cond (op0
, &true0
, &false0
);
9055 cond1
= if_then_else_cond (op1
, &true1
, &false1
);
9057 if ((cond0
!= 0 && cond1
!= 0 && !rtx_equal_p (cond0
, cond1
))
9058 && (REG_P (op0
) || REG_P (op1
)))
9060 /* Try to enable a simplification by undoing work done by
9061 if_then_else_cond if it converted a REG into something more
9066 true0
= false0
= op0
;
9071 true1
= false1
= op1
;
9075 if ((cond0
!= 0 || cond1
!= 0)
9076 && ! (cond0
!= 0 && cond1
!= 0 && !rtx_equal_p (cond0
, cond1
)))
9078 /* If if_then_else_cond returned zero, then true/false are the
9079 same rtl. We must copy one of them to prevent invalid rtl
9082 true0
= copy_rtx (true0
);
9083 else if (cond1
== 0)
9084 true1
= copy_rtx (true1
);
9086 if (COMPARISON_P (x
))
9088 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_relational (code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
9090 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_relational (code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
9095 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, true0
, true1
);
9096 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, false0
, false1
);
9099 return cond0
? cond0
: cond1
;
9102 /* See if we have PLUS, IOR, XOR, MINUS or UMAX, where one of the
9103 operands is zero when the other is nonzero, and vice-versa,
9104 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or -1. */
9106 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
9107 && (code
== PLUS
|| code
== IOR
|| code
== XOR
|| code
== MINUS
9109 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == MULT
)
9111 rtx op0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
9112 rtx op1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1);
9114 cond0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
9115 cond1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0);
9117 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0
)
9118 && COMPARISON_P (cond1
)
9119 && ((GET_CODE (cond0
) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
)
9120 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 0))
9121 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 1)))
9122 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0
))
9123 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
))
9124 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 1))
9125 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 0))))
9126 && ! side_effects_p (x
))
9128 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, op0
, const_true_rtx
);
9129 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
,
9131 ? simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
9139 /* Similarly for MULT, AND and UMIN, except that for these the result
9141 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
9142 && (code
== MULT
|| code
== AND
|| code
== UMIN
)
9143 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == MULT
)
9145 cond0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
9146 cond1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0);
9148 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0
)
9149 && COMPARISON_P (cond1
)
9150 && ((GET_CODE (cond0
) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
)
9151 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 0))
9152 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 1)))
9153 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0
))
9154 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
))
9155 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 1))
9156 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 0))))
9157 && ! side_effects_p (x
))
9159 *ptrue
= *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9165 else if (code
== IF_THEN_ELSE
)
9167 /* If we have IF_THEN_ELSE already, extract the condition and
9168 canonicalize it if it is NE or EQ. */
9169 cond0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
9170 *ptrue
= XEXP (x
, 1), *pfalse
= XEXP (x
, 2);
9171 if (GET_CODE (cond0
) == NE
&& XEXP (cond0
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
9172 return XEXP (cond0
, 0);
9173 else if (GET_CODE (cond0
) == EQ
&& XEXP (cond0
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
9175 *ptrue
= XEXP (x
, 2), *pfalse
= XEXP (x
, 1);
9176 return XEXP (cond0
, 0);
9182 /* If X is a SUBREG, we can narrow both the true and false values
9183 if the inner expression, if there is a condition. */
9184 else if (code
== SUBREG
9185 && 0 != (cond0
= if_then_else_cond (SUBREG_REG (x
),
9188 true0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, true0
,
9189 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)), SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
9190 false0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, false0
,
9191 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)), SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
9192 if (true0
&& false0
)
9200 /* If X is a constant, this isn't special and will cause confusions
9201 if we treat it as such. Likewise if it is equivalent to a constant. */
9202 else if (CONSTANT_P (x
)
9203 || ((cond0
= get_last_value (x
)) != 0 && CONSTANT_P (cond0
)))
9206 /* If we're in BImode, canonicalize on 0 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE, as that
9207 will be least confusing to the rest of the compiler. */
9208 else if (mode
== BImode
)
9210 *ptrue
= GEN_INT (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
), *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9214 /* If X is known to be either 0 or -1, those are the true and
9215 false values when testing X. */
9216 else if (x
== constm1_rtx
|| x
== const0_rtx
9217 || (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
9218 && num_sign_bit_copies (x
, mode
) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))
9220 *ptrue
= constm1_rtx
, *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9224 /* Likewise for 0 or a single bit. */
9225 else if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
9226 && pow2p_hwi (nz
= nonzero_bits (x
, mode
)))
9228 *ptrue
= gen_int_mode (nz
, mode
), *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9232 /* Otherwise fail; show no condition with true and false values the same. */
9233 *ptrue
= *pfalse
= x
;
9237 /* Return the value of expression X given the fact that condition COND
9238 is known to be true when applied to REG as its first operand and VAL
9239 as its second. X is known to not be shared and so can be modified in
9242 We only handle the simplest cases, and specifically those cases that
9243 arise with IF_THEN_ELSE expressions. */
9246 known_cond (rtx x
, enum rtx_code cond
, rtx reg
, rtx val
)
9248 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9252 if (side_effects_p (x
))
9255 /* If either operand of the condition is a floating point value,
9256 then we have to avoid collapsing an EQ comparison. */
9258 && rtx_equal_p (x
, reg
)
9259 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
9260 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (val
)))
9263 if (cond
== UNEQ
&& rtx_equal_p (x
, reg
))
9266 /* If X is (abs REG) and we know something about REG's relationship
9267 with zero, we may be able to simplify this. */
9269 if (code
== ABS
&& rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
) && val
== const0_rtx
)
9272 case GE
: case GT
: case EQ
:
9275 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)),
9277 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
9282 /* The only other cases we handle are MIN, MAX, and comparisons if the
9283 operands are the same as REG and VAL. */
9285 else if (COMPARISON_P (x
) || COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
))
9287 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), val
))
9289 std::swap (val
, reg
);
9290 cond
= swap_condition (cond
);
9293 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
) && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 1), val
))
9295 if (COMPARISON_P (x
))
9297 if (comparison_dominates_p (cond
, code
))
9298 return const_true_rtx
;
9300 code
= reversed_comparison_code (x
, NULL
);
9302 && comparison_dominates_p (cond
, code
))
9307 else if (code
== SMAX
|| code
== SMIN
9308 || code
== UMIN
|| code
== UMAX
)
9310 int unsignedp
= (code
== UMIN
|| code
== UMAX
);
9312 /* Do not reverse the condition when it is NE or EQ.
9313 This is because we cannot conclude anything about
9314 the value of 'SMAX (x, y)' when x is not equal to y,
9315 but we can when x equals y. */
9316 if ((code
== SMAX
|| code
== UMAX
)
9317 && ! (cond
== EQ
|| cond
== NE
))
9318 cond
= reverse_condition (cond
);
9323 return unsignedp
? x
: XEXP (x
, 1);
9325 return unsignedp
? x
: XEXP (x
, 0);
9327 return unsignedp
? XEXP (x
, 1) : x
;
9329 return unsignedp
? XEXP (x
, 0) : x
;
9336 else if (code
== SUBREG
)
9338 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
));
9339 rtx new_rtx
, r
= known_cond (SUBREG_REG (x
), cond
, reg
, val
);
9341 if (SUBREG_REG (x
) != r
)
9343 /* We must simplify subreg here, before we lose track of the
9344 original inner_mode. */
9345 new_rtx
= simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x
), r
,
9346 inner_mode
, SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
9350 SUBST (SUBREG_REG (x
), r
);
9355 /* We don't have to handle SIGN_EXTEND here, because even in the
9356 case of replacing something with a modeless CONST_INT, a
9357 CONST_INT is already (supposed to be) a valid sign extension for
9358 its narrower mode, which implies it's already properly
9359 sign-extended for the wider mode. Now, for ZERO_EXTEND, the
9360 story is different. */
9361 else if (code
== ZERO_EXTEND
)
9363 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
9364 rtx new_rtx
, r
= known_cond (XEXP (x
, 0), cond
, reg
, val
);
9366 if (XEXP (x
, 0) != r
)
9368 /* We must simplify the zero_extend here, before we lose
9369 track of the original inner_mode. */
9370 new_rtx
= simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND
, GET_MODE (x
),
9375 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), r
);
9381 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
9382 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
9385 SUBST (XEXP (x
, i
), known_cond (XEXP (x
, i
), cond
, reg
, val
));
9386 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
9387 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
9388 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), known_cond (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
),
9395 /* See if X and Y are equal for the purposes of seeing if we can rewrite an
9396 assignment as a field assignment. */
9399 rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx x
, rtx y
, bool widen_x
)
9401 if (widen_x
&& GET_MODE (x
) != GET_MODE (y
))
9403 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (GET_MODE (x
), GET_MODE (y
)))
9405 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
!= WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
9407 /* For big endian, adjust the memory offset. */
9408 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
9409 x
= adjust_address_nv (x
, GET_MODE (y
),
9410 -subreg_lowpart_offset (GET_MODE (x
),
9413 x
= adjust_address_nv (x
, GET_MODE (y
), 0);
9416 if (x
== y
|| rtx_equal_p (x
, y
))
9419 if (x
== 0 || y
== 0 || GET_MODE (x
) != GET_MODE (y
))
9422 /* Check for a paradoxical SUBREG of a MEM compared with the MEM.
9423 Note that all SUBREGs of MEM are paradoxical; otherwise they
9424 would have been rewritten. */
9425 if (MEM_P (x
) && GET_CODE (y
) == SUBREG
9426 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (y
))
9427 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (y
),
9428 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y
)), x
)))
9431 if (MEM_P (y
) && GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
9432 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
9433 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (x
),
9434 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)), y
)))
9437 /* We used to see if get_last_value of X and Y were the same but that's
9438 not correct. In one direction, we'll cause the assignment to have
9439 the wrong destination and in the case, we'll import a register into this
9440 insn that might have already have been dead. So fail if none of the
9441 above cases are true. */
9445 /* See if X, a SET operation, can be rewritten as a bit-field assignment.
9446 Return that assignment if so.
9448 We only handle the most common cases. */
9451 make_field_assignment (rtx x
)
9453 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
9454 rtx src
= SET_SRC (x
);
9459 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
9463 /* If SRC was (and (not (ashift (const_int 1) POS)) DEST), this is
9464 a clear of a one-bit field. We will have changed it to
9465 (and (rotate (const_int -2) POS) DEST), so check for that. Also check
9468 if (GET_CODE (src
) == AND
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == ROTATE
9469 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0))
9470 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0)) == -2
9471 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest
, XEXP (src
, 1)))
9473 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 1),
9476 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, const0_rtx
);
9480 if (GET_CODE (src
) == AND
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == SUBREG
9481 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (src
, 0))
9482 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 0)))
9483 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)))))
9484 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0))) == ROTATE
9485 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)), 0))
9486 && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)), 0)) == -2
9487 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest
, XEXP (src
, 1)))
9489 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, 0,
9490 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)), 1),
9493 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, const0_rtx
);
9497 /* If SRC is (ior (ashift (const_int 1) POS) DEST), this is a set of a
9499 if (GET_CODE (src
) == IOR
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == ASHIFT
9500 && XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
9501 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest
, XEXP (src
, 1)))
9503 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 1),
9506 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, const1_rtx
);
9510 /* If DEST is already a field assignment, i.e. ZERO_EXTRACT, and the
9511 SRC is an AND with all bits of that field set, then we can discard
9513 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9514 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest
, 1))
9515 && GET_CODE (src
) == AND
9516 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src
, 1)))
9518 HOST_WIDE_INT width
= INTVAL (XEXP (dest
, 1));
9519 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT and_mask
= INTVAL (XEXP (src
, 1));
9520 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ze_mask
;
9522 if (width
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9525 ze_mask
= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)1 << width
) - 1;
9527 /* Complete overlap. We can remove the source AND. */
9528 if ((and_mask
& ze_mask
) == ze_mask
)
9529 return gen_rtx_SET (dest
, XEXP (src
, 0));
9531 /* Partial overlap. We can reduce the source AND. */
9532 if ((and_mask
& ze_mask
) != and_mask
)
9534 mode
= GET_MODE (src
);
9535 src
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, XEXP (src
, 0),
9536 gen_int_mode (and_mask
& ze_mask
, mode
));
9537 return gen_rtx_SET (dest
, src
);
9541 /* The other case we handle is assignments into a constant-position
9542 field. They look like (ior/xor (and DEST C1) OTHER). If C1 represents
9543 a mask that has all one bits except for a group of zero bits and
9544 OTHER is known to have zeros where C1 has ones, this is such an
9545 assignment. Compute the position and length from C1. Shift OTHER
9546 to the appropriate position, force it to the required mode, and
9547 make the extraction. Check for the AND in both operands. */
9549 /* One or more SUBREGs might obscure the constant-position field
9550 assignment. The first one we are likely to encounter is an outer
9551 narrowing SUBREG, which we can just strip for the purposes of
9552 identifying the constant-field assignment. */
9553 if (GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (src
))
9554 src
= SUBREG_REG (src
);
9556 if (GET_CODE (src
) != IOR
&& GET_CODE (src
) != XOR
)
9559 rhs
= expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src
, 0));
9560 lhs
= expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src
, 1));
9562 if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == AND
9563 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs
, 1))
9564 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (rhs
, 0), dest
))
9565 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (rhs
, 1)), other
= lhs
;
9566 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9567 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9568 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9569 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9570 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9571 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9572 else if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == AND
9573 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (rhs
, 0))
9574 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs
, 0)))
9575 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs
, 1))
9576 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs
, 0)),
9578 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (rhs
, 1)), other
= lhs
;
9579 else if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == AND
9580 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
9581 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0), dest
))
9582 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)), other
= rhs
;
9583 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9584 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9585 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9586 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9587 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9588 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9589 else if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == AND
9590 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0))
9591 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs
, 0)))
9592 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
9593 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs
, 0)),
9595 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)), other
= rhs
;
9599 pos
= get_pos_from_mask ((~c1
) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (dest
)), &len
);
9600 if (pos
< 0 || pos
+ len
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
))
9601 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9602 || (c1
& nonzero_bits (other
, GET_MODE (dest
))) != 0)
9605 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, pos
, NULL_RTX
, len
, 1, 1, 0);
9609 /* The mode to use for the source is the mode of the assignment, or of
9610 what is inside a possible STRICT_LOW_PART. */
9611 mode
= (GET_CODE (assign
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
9612 ? GET_MODE (XEXP (assign
, 0)) : GET_MODE (assign
));
9614 /* Shift OTHER right POS places and make it the source, restricting it
9615 to the proper length and mode. */
9617 src
= canon_reg_for_combine (simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
,
9621 src
= force_to_mode (src
, mode
,
9622 len
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9624 : (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1,
9627 /* If SRC is masked by an AND that does not make a difference in
9628 the value being stored, strip it. */
9629 if (GET_CODE (assign
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9630 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (assign
, 1))
9631 && INTVAL (XEXP (assign
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9632 && GET_CODE (src
) == AND
9633 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src
, 1))
9634 && UINTVAL (XEXP (src
, 1))
9635 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< INTVAL (XEXP (assign
, 1))) - 1)
9636 src
= XEXP (src
, 0);
9638 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, src
);
9641 /* See if X is of the form (+ (* a c) (* b c)) and convert to (* (+ a b) c)
9645 apply_distributive_law (rtx x
)
9647 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9648 enum rtx_code inner_code
;
9649 rtx lhs
, rhs
, other
;
9652 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9653 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9654 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
9655 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)
9658 /* The outer operation can only be one of the following: */
9659 if (code
!= IOR
&& code
!= AND
&& code
!= XOR
9660 && code
!= PLUS
&& code
!= MINUS
)
9666 /* If either operand is a primitive we can't do anything, so get out
9668 if (OBJECT_P (lhs
) || OBJECT_P (rhs
))
9671 lhs
= expand_compound_operation (lhs
);
9672 rhs
= expand_compound_operation (rhs
);
9673 inner_code
= GET_CODE (lhs
);
9674 if (inner_code
!= GET_CODE (rhs
))
9677 /* See if the inner and outer operations distribute. */
9684 /* These all distribute except over PLUS. */
9685 if (code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
)
9690 if (code
!= PLUS
&& code
!= MINUS
)
9695 /* This is also a multiply, so it distributes over everything. */
9698 /* This used to handle SUBREG, but this turned out to be counter-
9699 productive, since (subreg (op ...)) usually is not handled by
9700 insn patterns, and this "optimization" therefore transformed
9701 recognizable patterns into unrecognizable ones. Therefore the
9702 SUBREG case was removed from here.
9704 It is possible that distributing SUBREG over arithmetic operations
9705 leads to an intermediate result than can then be optimized further,
9706 e.g. by moving the outer SUBREG to the other side of a SET as done
9707 in simplify_set. This seems to have been the original intent of
9708 handling SUBREGs here.
9710 However, with current GCC this does not appear to actually happen,
9711 at least on major platforms. If some case is found where removing
9712 the SUBREG case here prevents follow-on optimizations, distributing
9713 SUBREGs ought to be re-added at that place, e.g. in simplify_set. */
9719 /* Set LHS and RHS to the inner operands (A and B in the example
9720 above) and set OTHER to the common operand (C in the example).
9721 There is only one way to do this unless the inner operation is
9723 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs
)
9724 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0), XEXP (rhs
, 0)))
9725 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 1);
9726 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs
)
9727 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0), XEXP (rhs
, 1)))
9728 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 0);
9729 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs
)
9730 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 1), XEXP (rhs
, 0)))
9731 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 1);
9732 else if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 1), XEXP (rhs
, 1)))
9733 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 0);
9737 /* Form the new inner operation, seeing if it simplifies first. */
9738 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, GET_MODE (x
), lhs
, rhs
);
9740 /* There is one exception to the general way of distributing:
9741 (a | c) ^ (b | c) -> (a ^ b) & ~c */
9742 if (code
== XOR
&& inner_code
== IOR
)
9745 other
= simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, GET_MODE (x
), other
, GET_MODE (x
));
9748 /* We may be able to continuing distributing the result, so call
9749 ourselves recursively on the inner operation before forming the
9750 outer operation, which we return. */
9751 return simplify_gen_binary (inner_code
, GET_MODE (x
),
9752 apply_distributive_law (tem
), other
);
9755 /* See if X is of the form (* (+ A B) C), and if so convert to
9756 (+ (* A C) (* B C)) and try to simplify.
9758 Most of the time, this results in no change. However, if some of
9759 the operands are the same or inverses of each other, simplifications
9762 For example, (and (ior A B) (not B)) can occur as the result of
9763 expanding a bit field assignment. When we apply the distributive
9764 law to this, we get (ior (and (A (not B))) (and (B (not B)))),
9765 which then simplifies to (and (A (not B))).
9767 Note that no checks happen on the validity of applying the inverse
9768 distributive law. This is pointless since we can do it in the
9769 few places where this routine is called.
9771 N is the index of the term that is decomposed (the arithmetic operation,
9772 i.e. (+ A B) in the first example above). !N is the index of the term that
9773 is distributed, i.e. of C in the first example above. */
9775 distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx x
, int n
)
9778 enum rtx_code outer_code
, inner_code
;
9779 rtx decomposed
, distributed
, inner_op0
, inner_op1
, new_op0
, new_op1
, tmp
;
9781 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9782 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9783 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
9784 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)
9787 decomposed
= XEXP (x
, n
);
9788 if (!ARITHMETIC_P (decomposed
))
9791 mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
9792 outer_code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9793 distributed
= XEXP (x
, !n
);
9795 inner_code
= GET_CODE (decomposed
);
9796 inner_op0
= XEXP (decomposed
, 0);
9797 inner_op1
= XEXP (decomposed
, 1);
9799 /* Special case (and (xor B C) (not A)), which is equivalent to
9800 (xor (ior A B) (ior A C)) */
9801 if (outer_code
== AND
&& inner_code
== XOR
&& GET_CODE (distributed
) == NOT
)
9803 distributed
= XEXP (distributed
, 0);
9809 /* Distribute the second term. */
9810 new_op0
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, inner_op0
, distributed
);
9811 new_op1
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, inner_op1
, distributed
);
9815 /* Distribute the first term. */
9816 new_op0
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, distributed
, inner_op0
);
9817 new_op1
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, distributed
, inner_op1
);
9820 tmp
= apply_distributive_law (simplify_gen_binary (inner_code
, mode
,
9822 if (GET_CODE (tmp
) != outer_code
9823 && (set_src_cost (tmp
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
9824 < set_src_cost (x
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)))
9830 /* Simplify a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9831 in MODE. Return an equivalent form, if different from (and VAROP
9832 (const_int CONSTOP)). Otherwise, return NULL_RTX. */
9835 simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode mode
, rtx varop
,
9836 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop
)
9838 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero
;
9839 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT orig_constop
;
9844 orig_constop
= constop
;
9845 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
9848 /* Simplify VAROP knowing that we will be only looking at some of the
9851 Note by passing in CONSTOP, we guarantee that the bits not set in
9852 CONSTOP are not significant and will never be examined. We must
9853 ensure that is the case by explicitly masking out those bits
9854 before returning. */
9855 varop
= force_to_mode (varop
, mode
, constop
, 0);
9857 /* If VAROP is a CLOBBER, we will fail so return it. */
9858 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
9861 /* If VAROP is a CONST_INT, then we need to apply the mask in CONSTOP
9862 to VAROP and return the new constant. */
9863 if (CONST_INT_P (varop
))
9864 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (varop
) & constop
, mode
);
9866 /* See what bits may be nonzero in VAROP. Unlike the general case of
9867 a call to nonzero_bits, here we don't care about bits outside
9870 nonzero
= nonzero_bits (varop
, mode
) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
9872 /* Turn off all bits in the constant that are known to already be zero.
9873 Thus, if the AND isn't needed at all, we will have CONSTOP == NONZERO_BITS
9874 which is tested below. */
9878 /* If we don't have any bits left, return zero. */
9882 /* If VAROP is a NEG of something known to be zero or 1 and CONSTOP is
9883 a power of two, we can replace this with an ASHIFT. */
9884 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == NEG
&& nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), mode
) == 1
9885 && (i
= exact_log2 (constop
)) >= 0)
9886 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
, XEXP (varop
, 0), i
);
9888 /* If VAROP is an IOR or XOR, apply the AND to both branches of the IOR
9889 or XOR, then try to apply the distributive law. This may eliminate
9890 operations if either branch can be simplified because of the AND.
9891 It may also make some cases more complex, but those cases probably
9892 won't match a pattern either with or without this. */
9894 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (varop
) == XOR
)
9898 apply_distributive_law
9899 (simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop
), GET_MODE (varop
),
9900 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
,
9904 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
,
9909 /* If VAROP is PLUS, and the constant is a mask of low bits, distribute
9910 the AND and see if one of the operands simplifies to zero. If so, we
9911 may eliminate it. */
9913 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == PLUS
9914 && pow2p_hwi (constop
+ 1))
9918 o0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (varop
, 0), constop
);
9919 o1
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (varop
, 1), constop
);
9920 if (o0
== const0_rtx
)
9922 if (o1
== const0_rtx
)
9926 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
9927 varop
= gen_lowpart (mode
, varop
);
9928 if (varop
== NULL_RTX
|| GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
9931 /* If we are only masking insignificant bits, return VAROP. */
9932 if (constop
== nonzero
)
9935 if (varop
== orig_varop
&& constop
== orig_constop
)
9938 /* Otherwise, return an AND. */
9939 return simplify_gen_binary (AND
, mode
, varop
, gen_int_mode (constop
, mode
));
9943 /* We have X, a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9946 Return an equivalent form, if different from X. Otherwise, return X. If
9947 X is zero, we are to always construct the equivalent form. */
9950 simplify_and_const_int (rtx x
, machine_mode mode
, rtx varop
,
9951 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop
)
9953 rtx tem
= simplify_and_const_int_1 (mode
, varop
, constop
);
9958 x
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, GET_MODE (varop
), varop
,
9959 gen_int_mode (constop
, mode
));
9960 if (GET_MODE (x
) != mode
)
9961 x
= gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
9965 /* Given a REG, X, compute which bits in X can be nonzero.
9966 We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE.
9968 For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is
9969 a shift, AND, or zero_extract, we can do better. */
9972 reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx x
, machine_mode mode
,
9973 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
9974 machine_mode known_mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
9975 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
9976 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*nonzero
)
9981 /* If X is a register whose nonzero bits value is current, use it.
9982 Otherwise, if X is a register whose value we can find, use that
9983 value. Otherwise, use the previously-computed global nonzero bits
9984 for this register. */
9986 rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
9987 if (rsp
->last_set_value
!= 0
9988 && (rsp
->last_set_mode
== mode
9989 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (rsp
->last_set_mode
) == MODE_INT
9990 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
))
9991 && ((rsp
->last_set_label
>= label_tick_ebb_start
9992 && rsp
->last_set_label
< label_tick
)
9993 || (rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
9994 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) < subst_low_luid
)
9995 || (REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
9996 && REGNO (x
) < reg_n_sets_max
9997 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x
)) == 1
9999 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
),
10002 /* Note that, even if the precision of last_set_mode is lower than that
10003 of mode, record_value_for_reg invoked nonzero_bits on the register
10004 with nonzero_bits_mode (because last_set_mode is necessarily integral
10005 and HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P in this case) so bits in nonzero_bits_mode
10006 are all valid, hence in mode too since nonzero_bits_mode is defined
10007 to the largest HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P mode. */
10008 *nonzero
&= rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
;
10012 tem
= get_last_value (x
);
10015 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
)
10016 tem
= sign_extend_short_imm (tem
, GET_MODE (x
),
10017 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
));
10022 if (nonzero_sign_valid
&& rsp
->nonzero_bits
)
10024 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= rsp
->nonzero_bits
;
10026 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
10027 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
10028 mask
|= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
));
10036 /* Return the number of bits at the high-order end of X that are known to
10037 be equal to the sign bit. X will be used in mode MODE; if MODE is
10038 VOIDmode, X will be used in its own mode. The returned value will always
10039 be between 1 and the number of bits in MODE. */
10042 reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx x
, machine_mode mode
,
10043 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
10044 machine_mode known_mode
10046 unsigned int known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
10047 unsigned int *result
)
10050 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
10052 rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
10053 if (rsp
->last_set_value
!= 0
10054 && rsp
->last_set_mode
== mode
10055 && ((rsp
->last_set_label
>= label_tick_ebb_start
10056 && rsp
->last_set_label
< label_tick
)
10057 || (rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
10058 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) < subst_low_luid
)
10059 || (REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
10060 && REGNO (x
) < reg_n_sets_max
10061 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x
)) == 1
10062 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
10063 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
),
10066 *result
= rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
;
10070 tem
= get_last_value (x
);
10074 if (nonzero_sign_valid
&& rsp
->sign_bit_copies
!= 0
10075 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
10076 *result
= rsp
->sign_bit_copies
;
10081 /* Return the number of "extended" bits there are in X, when interpreted
10082 as a quantity in MODE whose signedness is indicated by UNSIGNEDP. For
10083 unsigned quantities, this is the number of high-order zero bits.
10084 For signed quantities, this is the number of copies of the sign bit
10085 minus 1. In both case, this function returns the number of "spare"
10086 bits. For example, if two quantities for which this function returns
10087 at least 1 are added, the addition is known not to overflow.
10089 This function will always return 0 unless called during combine, which
10090 implies that it must be called from a define_split. */
10093 extended_count (const_rtx x
, machine_mode mode
, int unsignedp
)
10095 if (nonzero_sign_valid
== 0)
10099 ? (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
10100 ? (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1
10101 - floor_log2 (nonzero_bits (x
, mode
)))
10103 : num_sign_bit_copies (x
, mode
) - 1);
10106 /* This function is called from `simplify_shift_const' to merge two
10107 outer operations. Specifically, we have already found that we need
10108 to perform operation *POP0 with constant *PCONST0 at the outermost
10109 position. We would now like to also perform OP1 with constant CONST1
10110 (with *POP0 being done last).
10112 Return 1 if we can do the operation and update *POP0 and *PCONST0 with
10113 the resulting operation. *PCOMP_P is set to 1 if we would need to
10114 complement the innermost operand, otherwise it is unchanged.
10116 MODE is the mode in which the operation will be done. No bits outside
10117 the width of this mode matter. It is assumed that the width of this mode
10118 is smaller than or equal to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT.
10120 If *POP0 or OP1 are UNKNOWN, it means no operation is required. Only NEG, PLUS,
10121 IOR, XOR, and AND are supported. We may set *POP0 to SET if the proper
10122 result is simply *PCONST0.
10124 If the resulting operation cannot be expressed as one operation, we
10125 return 0 and do not change *POP0, *PCONST0, and *PCOMP_P. */
10128 merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code
*pop0
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*pconst0
, enum rtx_code op1
, HOST_WIDE_INT const1
, machine_mode mode
, int *pcomp_p
)
10130 enum rtx_code op0
= *pop0
;
10131 HOST_WIDE_INT const0
= *pconst0
;
10133 const0
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
10134 const1
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
10136 /* If OP0 is an AND, clear unimportant bits in CONST1. */
10140 /* If OP0 or OP1 is UNKNOWN, this is easy. Similarly if they are the same or
10143 if (op1
== UNKNOWN
|| op0
== SET
)
10146 else if (op0
== UNKNOWN
)
10147 op0
= op1
, const0
= const1
;
10149 else if (op0
== op1
)
10173 /* Otherwise, if either is a PLUS or NEG, we can't do anything. */
10174 else if (op0
== PLUS
|| op1
== PLUS
|| op0
== NEG
|| op1
== NEG
)
10177 /* If the two constants aren't the same, we can't do anything. The
10178 remaining six cases can all be done. */
10179 else if (const0
!= const1
)
10187 /* (a & b) | b == b */
10189 else /* op1 == XOR */
10190 /* (a ^ b) | b == a | b */
10196 /* (a & b) ^ b == (~a) & b */
10197 op0
= AND
, *pcomp_p
= 1;
10198 else /* op1 == IOR */
10199 /* (a | b) ^ b == a & ~b */
10200 op0
= AND
, const0
= ~const0
;
10205 /* (a | b) & b == b */
10207 else /* op1 == XOR */
10208 /* (a ^ b) & b) == (~a) & b */
10215 /* Check for NO-OP cases. */
10216 const0
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
10218 && (op0
== IOR
|| op0
== XOR
|| op0
== PLUS
))
10220 else if (const0
== 0 && op0
== AND
)
10222 else if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const0
== GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)
10228 /* ??? Slightly redundant with the above mask, but not entirely.
10229 Moving this above means we'd have to sign-extend the mode mask
10230 for the final test. */
10231 if (op0
!= UNKNOWN
&& op0
!= NEG
)
10232 *pconst0
= trunc_int_for_mode (const0
, mode
);
10237 /* A helper to simplify_shift_const_1 to determine the mode we can perform
10238 the shift in. The original shift operation CODE is performed on OP in
10239 ORIG_MODE. Return the wider mode MODE if we can perform the operation
10240 in that mode. Return ORIG_MODE otherwise. We can also assume that the
10241 result of the shift is subject to operation OUTER_CODE with operand
10244 static machine_mode
10245 try_widen_shift_mode (enum rtx_code code
, rtx op
, int count
,
10246 machine_mode orig_mode
, machine_mode mode
,
10247 enum rtx_code outer_code
, HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const
)
10249 if (orig_mode
== mode
)
10251 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode
));
10253 /* In general we can't perform in wider mode for right shift and rotate. */
10257 /* We can still widen if the bits brought in from the left are identical
10258 to the sign bit of ORIG_MODE. */
10259 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op
, mode
)
10260 > (unsigned) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
10261 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode
)))
10266 /* Similarly here but with zero bits. */
10267 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
10268 && (nonzero_bits (op
, mode
) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (orig_mode
)) == 0)
10271 /* We can also widen if the bits brought in will be masked off. This
10272 operation is performed in ORIG_MODE. */
10273 if (outer_code
== AND
)
10275 int care_bits
= low_bitmask_len (orig_mode
, outer_const
);
10278 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode
) - care_bits
>= count
)
10287 gcc_unreachable ();
10294 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by ORIG_COUNT bits. CODE says what kind
10295 of shift. The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. Return NULL_RTX
10296 if we cannot simplify it. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10298 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10299 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10300 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10303 simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code code
, machine_mode result_mode
,
10304 rtx varop
, int orig_count
)
10306 enum rtx_code orig_code
= code
;
10307 rtx orig_varop
= varop
;
10309 machine_mode mode
= result_mode
;
10310 machine_mode shift_mode
;
10311 scalar_int_mode tmode
, inner_mode
;
10312 unsigned int mode_words
10313 = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
10314 /* We form (outer_op (code varop count) (outer_const)). */
10315 enum rtx_code outer_op
= UNKNOWN
;
10316 HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const
= 0;
10317 int complement_p
= 0;
10320 /* Make sure and truncate the "natural" shift on the way in. We don't
10321 want to do this inside the loop as it makes it more difficult to
10323 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
)
10324 orig_count
&= GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode
) - 1;
10326 /* If we were given an invalid count, don't do anything except exactly
10327 what was requested. */
10329 if (orig_count
< 0 || orig_count
>= (int) GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode
))
10332 count
= orig_count
;
10334 /* Unless one of the branches of the `if' in this loop does a `continue',
10335 we will `break' the loop after the `if'. */
10339 /* If we have an operand of (clobber (const_int 0)), fail. */
10340 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
10343 /* Convert ROTATERT to ROTATE. */
10344 if (code
== ROTATERT
)
10346 unsigned int bitsize
= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (result_mode
);
10348 count
= bitsize
- count
;
10351 shift_mode
= try_widen_shift_mode (code
, varop
, count
, result_mode
,
10352 mode
, outer_op
, outer_const
);
10353 machine_mode shift_unit_mode
= GET_MODE_INNER (shift_mode
);
10355 /* Handle cases where the count is greater than the size of the mode
10356 minus 1. For ASHIFT, use the size minus one as the count (this can
10357 occur when simplifying (lshiftrt (ashiftrt ..))). For rotates,
10358 take the count modulo the size. For other shifts, the result is
10361 Since these shifts are being produced by the compiler by combining
10362 multiple operations, each of which are defined, we know what the
10363 result is supposed to be. */
10365 if (count
> (GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
) - 1))
10367 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10368 count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
) - 1;
10369 else if (code
== ROTATE
|| code
== ROTATERT
)
10370 count
%= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
);
10373 /* We can't simply return zero because there may be an
10375 varop
= const0_rtx
;
10381 /* If we discovered we had to complement VAROP, leave. Making a NOT
10382 here would cause an infinite loop. */
10386 if (shift_mode
== shift_unit_mode
)
10388 /* An arithmetic right shift of a quantity known to be -1 or 0
10390 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10391 && (num_sign_bit_copies (varop
, shift_unit_mode
)
10392 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
)))
10398 /* If we are doing an arithmetic right shift and discarding all but
10399 the sign bit copies, this is equivalent to doing a shift by the
10400 bitsize minus one. Convert it into that shift because it will
10401 often allow other simplifications. */
10403 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10404 && (count
+ num_sign_bit_copies (varop
, shift_unit_mode
)
10405 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
)))
10406 count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
) - 1;
10408 /* We simplify the tests below and elsewhere by converting
10409 ASHIFTRT to LSHIFTRT if we know the sign bit is clear.
10410 `make_compound_operation' will convert it to an ASHIFTRT for
10411 those machines (such as VAX) that don't have an LSHIFTRT. */
10412 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10413 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode
)
10414 && val_signbit_known_clear_p (shift_unit_mode
,
10415 nonzero_bits (varop
,
10419 if (((code
== LSHIFTRT
10420 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode
)
10421 && !(nonzero_bits (varop
, shift_unit_mode
) >> count
))
10423 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode
)
10424 && !((nonzero_bits (varop
, shift_unit_mode
) << count
)
10425 & GET_MODE_MASK (shift_unit_mode
))))
10426 && !side_effects_p (varop
))
10427 varop
= const0_rtx
;
10430 switch (GET_CODE (varop
))
10436 new_rtx
= expand_compound_operation (varop
);
10437 if (new_rtx
!= varop
)
10445 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10446 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10449 /* If we have (xshiftrt (mem ...) C) and C is MODE_WIDTH
10450 minus the width of a smaller mode, we can do this with a
10451 SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND from the narrower memory location. */
10452 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10453 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (varop
, 0),
10454 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (varop
))
10455 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop
)
10456 && (int_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) - count
, 1)
10459 new_rtx
= adjust_address_nv (varop
, tmode
,
10460 BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? 0
10461 : count
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10463 varop
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (code
== ASHIFTRT
? SIGN_EXTEND
10464 : ZERO_EXTEND
, mode
, new_rtx
);
10471 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10472 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10475 /* If VAROP is a SUBREG, strip it as long as the inner operand has
10476 the same number of words as what we've seen so far. Then store
10477 the widest mode in MODE. */
10478 if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop
)
10479 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop
)), &inner_mode
)
10480 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop
))
10481 && (unsigned int) ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
)
10482 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
)
10484 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (varop
)) == MODE_INT
)
10486 varop
= SUBREG_REG (varop
);
10487 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) > GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
10494 /* Some machines use MULT instead of ASHIFT because MULT
10495 is cheaper. But it is still better on those machines to
10496 merge two shifts into one. */
10497 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10498 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1))) >= 0)
10501 = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
, GET_MODE (varop
),
10503 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10504 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)))));
10510 /* Similar, for when divides are cheaper. */
10511 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10512 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1))) >= 0)
10515 = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (varop
),
10517 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10518 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)))));
10524 /* If we are extracting just the sign bit of an arithmetic
10525 right shift, that shift is not needed. However, the sign
10526 bit of a wider mode may be different from what would be
10527 interpreted as the sign bit in a narrower mode, so, if
10528 the result is narrower, don't discard the shift. */
10529 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10530 && count
== (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (result_mode
) - 1)
10531 && (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (result_mode
)
10532 >= GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop
))))
10534 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10543 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10544 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10547 /* Here we have two nested shifts. The result is usually the
10548 AND of a new shift with a mask. We compute the result below. */
10549 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10550 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)) >= 0
10551 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop
))
10552 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode
)
10553 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
10555 enum rtx_code first_code
= GET_CODE (varop
);
10556 unsigned int first_count
= INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1));
10557 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
10560 /* We have one common special case. We can't do any merging if
10561 the inner code is an ASHIFTRT of a smaller mode. However, if
10562 we have (ashift:M1 (subreg:M1 (ashiftrt:M2 FOO C1) 0) C2)
10563 with C2 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M1) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M2),
10564 we can convert it to
10565 (ashiftrt:M1 (ashift:M1 (and:M1 (subreg:M1 FOO 0) C3) C2) C1).
10566 This simplifies certain SIGN_EXTEND operations. */
10567 if (code
== ASHIFT
&& first_code
== ASHIFTRT
10568 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode
)
10569 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop
))))
10571 /* C3 has the low-order C1 bits zero. */
10573 mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)
10574 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< first_count
) - 1);
10576 varop
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, result_mode
,
10577 XEXP (varop
, 0), mask
);
10578 varop
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, result_mode
,
10580 count
= first_count
;
10585 /* If this was (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) and FOO has more
10586 than C1 high-order bits equal to the sign bit, we can convert
10587 this to either an ASHIFT or an ASHIFTRT depending on the
10590 We cannot do this if VAROP's mode is not SHIFT_MODE. */
10592 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
&& first_code
== ASHIFT
10593 && GET_MODE (varop
) == shift_mode
10594 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (varop
, 0), shift_mode
)
10597 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10598 count
-= first_count
;
10608 /* There are some cases we can't do. If CODE is ASHIFTRT,
10609 we can only do this if FIRST_CODE is also ASHIFTRT.
10611 We can't do the case when CODE is ROTATE and FIRST_CODE is
10614 If the mode of this shift is not the mode of the outer shift,
10615 we can't do this if either shift is a right shift or ROTATE.
10617 Finally, we can't do any of these if the mode is too wide
10618 unless the codes are the same.
10620 Handle the case where the shift codes are the same
10623 if (code
== first_code
)
10625 if (GET_MODE (varop
) != result_mode
10626 && (code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
10627 || code
== ROTATE
))
10630 count
+= first_count
;
10631 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10635 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10636 || (code
== ROTATE
&& first_code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10637 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10638 || (GET_MODE (varop
) != result_mode
10639 && (first_code
== ASHIFTRT
|| first_code
== LSHIFTRT
10640 || first_code
== ROTATE
10641 || code
== ROTATE
)))
10644 /* To compute the mask to apply after the shift, shift the
10645 nonzero bits of the inner shift the same way the
10646 outer shift will. */
10648 mask_rtx
= gen_int_mode (nonzero_bits (varop
, GET_MODE (varop
)),
10652 = simplify_const_binary_operation (code
, result_mode
, mask_rtx
,
10655 /* Give up if we can't compute an outer operation to use. */
10657 || !CONST_INT_P (mask_rtx
)
10658 || ! merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, AND
,
10660 result_mode
, &complement_p
))
10663 /* If the shifts are in the same direction, we add the
10664 counts. Otherwise, we subtract them. */
10665 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10666 == (first_code
== ASHIFTRT
|| first_code
== LSHIFTRT
))
10667 count
+= first_count
;
10669 count
-= first_count
;
10671 /* If COUNT is positive, the new shift is usually CODE,
10672 except for the two exceptions below, in which case it is
10673 FIRST_CODE. If the count is negative, FIRST_CODE should
10676 && ((first_code
== ROTATE
&& code
== ASHIFT
)
10677 || (first_code
== ASHIFTRT
&& code
== LSHIFTRT
)))
10679 else if (count
< 0)
10680 code
= first_code
, count
= -count
;
10682 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10686 /* If we have (A << B << C) for any shift, we can convert this to
10687 (A << C << B). This wins if A is a constant. Only try this if
10688 B is not a constant. */
10690 else if (GET_CODE (varop
) == code
10691 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 0))
10692 && !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1)))
10694 /* For ((unsigned) (cstULL >> count)) >> cst2 we have to make
10695 sure the result will be masked. See PR70222. */
10696 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10697 && mode
!= result_mode
10698 && !merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, AND
,
10699 GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode
)
10700 >> orig_count
, result_mode
,
10703 /* For ((int) (cstLL >> count)) >> cst2 just give up. Queuing
10704 up outer sign extension (often left and right shift) is
10705 hardly more efficient than the original. See PR70429. */
10706 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
&& mode
!= result_mode
)
10709 rtx new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation (code
, mode
,
10712 varop
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, mode
, new_rtx
, XEXP (varop
, 1));
10719 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10720 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10723 /* Make this fit the case below. */
10724 varop
= gen_rtx_XOR (mode
, XEXP (varop
, 0), constm1_rtx
);
10730 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10731 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10734 /* If we have (xshiftrt (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) C)
10735 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10736 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10737 we have an (le X 0) operation. If we have an arithmetic shift
10738 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or we have a logical shift with
10739 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of -1, we have a (neg (le X 0)) operation. */
10741 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == IOR
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == PLUS
10742 && XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
10743 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
10744 && (code
== LSHIFTRT
|| code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10745 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop
)) - 1)
10746 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 0), XEXP (varop
, 1)))
10749 varop
= gen_rtx_LE (GET_MODE (varop
), XEXP (varop
, 1),
10752 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 ? code
== ASHIFTRT
: code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10753 varop
= gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop
), varop
);
10758 /* If we have (shift (logical)), move the logical to the outside
10759 to allow it to possibly combine with another logical and the
10760 shift to combine with another shift. This also canonicalizes to
10761 what a ZERO_EXTRACT looks like. Also, some machines have
10762 (and (shift)) insns. */
10764 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10765 /* We can't do this if we have (ashiftrt (xor)) and the
10766 constant has its sign bit set in shift_mode with shift_mode
10767 wider than result_mode. */
10768 && !(code
== ASHIFTRT
&& GET_CODE (varop
) == XOR
10769 && result_mode
!= shift_mode
10770 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)),
10772 && (new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation
10773 (code
, result_mode
,
10774 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)), result_mode
),
10775 GEN_INT (count
))) != 0
10776 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx
)
10777 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, GET_CODE (varop
),
10778 INTVAL (new_rtx
), result_mode
, &complement_p
))
10780 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10784 /* If we can't do that, try to simplify the shift in each arm of the
10785 logical expression, make a new logical expression, and apply
10786 the inverse distributive law. This also can't be done for
10787 (ashiftrt (xor)) where we've widened the shift and the constant
10788 changes the sign bit. */
10789 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10790 && !(code
== ASHIFTRT
&& GET_CODE (varop
) == XOR
10791 && result_mode
!= shift_mode
10792 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)),
10795 rtx lhs
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, code
, shift_mode
,
10796 XEXP (varop
, 0), count
);
10797 rtx rhs
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, code
, shift_mode
,
10798 XEXP (varop
, 1), count
);
10800 varop
= simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop
), shift_mode
,
10802 varop
= apply_distributive_law (varop
);
10810 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10811 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10814 /* Convert (lshiftrt (eq FOO 0) C) to (xor FOO 1) if STORE_FLAG_VALUE
10815 says that the sign bit can be tested, FOO has mode MODE, C is
10816 GET_MODE_PRECISION (MODE) - 1, and FOO has only its low-order bit
10817 that may be nonzero. */
10818 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10819 && XEXP (varop
, 1) == const0_rtx
10820 && GET_MODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == result_mode
10821 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode
) - 1)
10822 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode
)
10823 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
10824 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), result_mode
) == 1
10825 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, XOR
, 1, result_mode
,
10828 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10835 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10836 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10839 /* (lshiftrt (neg A) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C is one less
10840 than the number of bits in the mode is equivalent to A. */
10841 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10842 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode
) - 1)
10843 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), result_mode
) == 1)
10845 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10850 /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Move the
10851 NEG outside to allow shifts to combine. */
10853 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, NEG
, 0, result_mode
,
10856 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10862 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10863 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10866 /* (lshiftrt (plus A -1) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C
10867 is one less than the number of bits in the mode is
10868 equivalent to (xor A 1). */
10869 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10870 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode
) - 1)
10871 && XEXP (varop
, 1) == constm1_rtx
10872 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), result_mode
) == 1
10873 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, XOR
, 1, result_mode
,
10877 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10881 /* If we have (xshiftrt (plus FOO BAR) C), and the only bits
10882 that might be nonzero in BAR are those being shifted out and those
10883 bits are known zero in FOO, we can replace the PLUS with FOO.
10884 Similarly in the other operand order. This code occurs when
10885 we are computing the size of a variable-size array. */
10887 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10888 && count
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10889 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 1), result_mode
) >> count
== 0
10890 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 1), result_mode
)
10891 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), result_mode
)) == 0)
10893 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10896 else if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10897 && count
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10898 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode
)
10899 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), result_mode
)
10901 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), result_mode
)
10902 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 1),
10905 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 1);
10909 /* (ashift (plus foo C) N) is (plus (ashift foo N) C'). */
10911 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10912 && (new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation
10913 (ASHIFT
, result_mode
,
10914 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)), result_mode
),
10915 GEN_INT (count
))) != 0
10916 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx
)
10917 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, PLUS
,
10918 INTVAL (new_rtx
), result_mode
, &complement_p
))
10920 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10924 /* Check for 'PLUS signbit', which is the canonical form of 'XOR
10925 signbit', and attempt to change the PLUS to an XOR and move it to
10926 the outer operation as is done above in the AND/IOR/XOR case
10927 leg for shift(logical). See details in logical handling above
10928 for reasoning in doing so. */
10929 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10930 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10931 && mode_signbit_p (result_mode
, XEXP (varop
, 1))
10932 && (new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation
10933 (code
, result_mode
,
10934 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)), result_mode
),
10935 GEN_INT (count
))) != 0
10936 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx
)
10937 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, XOR
,
10938 INTVAL (new_rtx
), result_mode
, &complement_p
))
10940 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10947 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10948 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10951 /* If we have (xshiftrt (minus (ashiftrt X C)) X) C)
10952 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10953 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10954 we have a (gt X 0) operation. If the shift is arithmetic with
10955 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of 1 or logical with STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1,
10956 we have a (neg (gt X 0)) operation. */
10958 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
10959 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
10960 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop
)) - 1)
10961 && (code
== LSHIFTRT
|| code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10962 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1))
10963 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1)) == count
10964 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 0), XEXP (varop
, 1)))
10967 varop
= gen_rtx_GT (GET_MODE (varop
), XEXP (varop
, 1),
10970 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 ? code
== ASHIFTRT
: code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10971 varop
= gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop
), varop
);
10978 /* Change (lshiftrt (truncate (lshiftrt))) to (truncate (lshiftrt))
10979 if the truncate does not affect the value. */
10980 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10981 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
10982 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1))
10983 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1))
10984 >= (GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)))
10985 - GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop
)))))
10987 rtx varop_inner
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10990 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (GET_MODE (varop_inner
),
10991 XEXP (varop_inner
, 0),
10993 (count
+ INTVAL (XEXP (varop_inner
, 1))));
10994 varop
= gen_rtx_TRUNCATE (GET_MODE (varop
), varop_inner
);
11007 shift_mode
= try_widen_shift_mode (code
, varop
, count
, result_mode
, mode
,
11008 outer_op
, outer_const
);
11010 /* We have now finished analyzing the shift. The result should be
11011 a shift of type CODE with SHIFT_MODE shifting VAROP COUNT places. If
11012 OUTER_OP is non-UNKNOWN, it is an operation that needs to be applied
11013 to the result of the shift. OUTER_CONST is the relevant constant,
11014 but we must turn off all bits turned off in the shift. */
11016 if (outer_op
== UNKNOWN
11017 && orig_code
== code
&& orig_count
== count
11018 && varop
== orig_varop
11019 && shift_mode
== GET_MODE (varop
))
11022 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
11023 varop
= gen_lowpart (shift_mode
, varop
);
11024 if (varop
== NULL_RTX
|| GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
11027 /* If we have an outer operation and we just made a shift, it is
11028 possible that we could have simplified the shift were it not
11029 for the outer operation. So try to do the simplification
11032 if (outer_op
!= UNKNOWN
)
11033 x
= simplify_shift_const_1 (code
, shift_mode
, varop
, count
);
11038 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, shift_mode
, varop
, GEN_INT (count
));
11040 /* If we were doing an LSHIFTRT in a wider mode than it was originally,
11041 turn off all the bits that the shift would have turned off. */
11042 if (orig_code
== LSHIFTRT
&& result_mode
!= shift_mode
)
11043 x
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, shift_mode
, x
,
11044 GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode
) >> orig_count
);
11046 /* Do the remainder of the processing in RESULT_MODE. */
11047 x
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (result_mode
, x
);
11049 /* If COMPLEMENT_P is set, we have to complement X before doing the outer
11052 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, result_mode
, x
, result_mode
);
11054 if (outer_op
!= UNKNOWN
)
11056 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op
) != RTX_UNARY
11057 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode
) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
11058 outer_const
= trunc_int_for_mode (outer_const
, result_mode
);
11060 if (outer_op
== AND
)
11061 x
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, result_mode
, x
, outer_const
);
11062 else if (outer_op
== SET
)
11064 /* This means that we have determined that the result is
11065 equivalent to a constant. This should be rare. */
11066 if (!side_effects_p (x
))
11067 x
= GEN_INT (outer_const
);
11069 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op
) == RTX_UNARY
)
11070 x
= simplify_gen_unary (outer_op
, result_mode
, x
, result_mode
);
11072 x
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_op
, result_mode
, x
,
11073 GEN_INT (outer_const
));
11079 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by COUNT bits. CODE says what kind of shift.
11080 The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. If we cannot simplify it,
11081 return X or, if it is NULL, synthesize the expression with
11082 simplify_gen_binary. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
11084 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
11085 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
11086 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
11089 simplify_shift_const (rtx x
, enum rtx_code code
, machine_mode result_mode
,
11090 rtx varop
, int count
)
11092 rtx tem
= simplify_shift_const_1 (code
, result_mode
, varop
, count
);
11097 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, GET_MODE (varop
), varop
, GEN_INT (count
));
11098 if (GET_MODE (x
) != result_mode
)
11099 x
= gen_lowpart (result_mode
, x
);
11104 /* A subroutine of recog_for_combine. See there for arguments and
11108 recog_for_combine_1 (rtx
*pnewpat
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx
*pnotes
)
11110 rtx pat
= *pnewpat
;
11111 rtx pat_without_clobbers
;
11112 int insn_code_number
;
11113 int num_clobbers_to_add
= 0;
11115 rtx notes
= NULL_RTX
;
11116 rtx old_notes
, old_pat
;
11119 /* If PAT is a PARALLEL, check to see if it contains the CLOBBER
11120 we use to indicate that something didn't match. If we find such a
11121 thing, force rejection. */
11122 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11123 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
11124 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
11125 && XEXP (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
), 0) == const0_rtx
)
11128 old_pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
11129 old_notes
= REG_NOTES (insn
);
11130 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
11131 REG_NOTES (insn
) = NULL_RTX
;
11133 insn_code_number
= recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers_to_add
);
11134 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
11136 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
11137 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11139 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11140 print_rtl_single (dump_file
, pat
);
11143 /* If it isn't, there is the possibility that we previously had an insn
11144 that clobbered some register as a side effect, but the combined
11145 insn doesn't need to do that. So try once more without the clobbers
11146 unless this represents an ASM insn. */
11148 if (insn_code_number
< 0 && ! check_asm_operands (pat
)
11149 && GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11153 for (pos
= 0, i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
11154 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) != CLOBBER
)
11157 SUBST (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, pos
), XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
));
11161 SUBST_INT (XVECLEN (pat
, 0), pos
);
11164 pat
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 0);
11166 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
11167 insn_code_number
= recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers_to_add
);
11168 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
11170 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
11171 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11173 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11174 print_rtl_single (dump_file
, pat
);
11178 pat_without_clobbers
= pat
;
11180 PATTERN (insn
) = old_pat
;
11181 REG_NOTES (insn
) = old_notes
;
11183 /* Recognize all noop sets, these will be killed by followup pass. */
11184 if (insn_code_number
< 0 && GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
&& set_noop_p (pat
))
11185 insn_code_number
= NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE
, num_clobbers_to_add
= 0;
11187 /* If we had any clobbers to add, make a new pattern than contains
11188 them. Then check to make sure that all of them are dead. */
11189 if (num_clobbers_to_add
)
11191 rtx newpat
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
,
11192 rtvec_alloc (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
11193 ? (XVECLEN (pat
, 0)
11194 + num_clobbers_to_add
)
11195 : num_clobbers_to_add
+ 1));
11197 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11198 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
11199 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
) = XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
11201 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0) = pat
;
11203 add_clobbers (newpat
, insn_code_number
);
11205 for (i
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) - num_clobbers_to_add
;
11206 i
< XVECLEN (newpat
, 0); i
++)
11208 if (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0))
11209 && ! reg_dead_at_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0), insn
))
11211 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0)) != SCRATCH
)
11213 gcc_assert (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0)));
11214 notes
= alloc_reg_note (REG_UNUSED
,
11215 XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0), notes
);
11221 if (insn_code_number
>= 0
11222 && insn_code_number
!= NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE
)
11224 old_pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
11225 old_notes
= REG_NOTES (insn
);
11226 old_icode
= INSN_CODE (insn
);
11227 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
11228 REG_NOTES (insn
) = notes
;
11229 INSN_CODE (insn
) = insn_code_number
;
11231 /* Allow targets to reject combined insn. */
11232 if (!targetm
.legitimate_combined_insn (insn
))
11234 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
11235 fputs ("Instruction not appropriate for target.",
11238 /* Callers expect recog_for_combine to strip
11239 clobbers from the pattern on failure. */
11240 pat
= pat_without_clobbers
;
11243 insn_code_number
= -1;
11246 PATTERN (insn
) = old_pat
;
11247 REG_NOTES (insn
) = old_notes
;
11248 INSN_CODE (insn
) = old_icode
;
11254 return insn_code_number
;
11257 /* Change every ZERO_EXTRACT and ZERO_EXTEND of a SUBREG that can be
11258 expressed as an AND and maybe an LSHIFTRT, to that formulation.
11259 Return whether anything was so changed. */
11262 change_zero_ext (rtx pat
)
11264 bool changed
= false;
11265 rtx
*src
= &SET_SRC (pat
);
11267 subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array
;
11268 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter
, array
, src
, NONCONST
)
11271 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
11274 if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11275 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
11276 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 2))
11277 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) != VOIDmode
11278 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
11279 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
11281 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
11283 size
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
11285 int start
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 2));
11286 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11287 start
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) - size
- start
;
11290 x
= gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (inner_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), GEN_INT (start
));
11293 if (mode
!= inner_mode
)
11294 x
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, x
);
11296 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
11297 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
)
11298 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
11299 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))))
11300 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
11301 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0)))
11303 size
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
11304 x
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
11305 if (GET_MODE (x
) != mode
)
11306 x
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, x
);
11308 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
11309 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
)
11310 && REG_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
11311 && HARD_REGISTER_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
11312 && can_change_dest_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), 0, mode
))
11314 size
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
11315 x
= gen_rtx_REG (mode
, REGNO (XEXP (x
, 0)));
11320 if (!(GET_CODE (x
) == LSHIFTRT
11321 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
11322 && size
+ INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))
11324 wide_int mask
= wi::mask (size
, false, GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
));
11325 x
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, x
, immed_wide_int_const (mask
, mode
));
11333 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter
, array
, src
, NONCONST
)
11334 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (**iter
);
11336 rtx
*dst
= &SET_DEST (pat
);
11337 if (GET_CODE (*dst
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11338 && REG_P (XEXP (*dst
, 0))
11339 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*dst
, 1))
11340 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*dst
, 2)))
11342 rtx reg
= XEXP (*dst
, 0);
11343 int width
= INTVAL (XEXP (*dst
, 1));
11344 int offset
= INTVAL (XEXP (*dst
, 2));
11345 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (reg
);
11346 int reg_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
11347 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11348 offset
= reg_width
- width
- offset
;
11351 wide_int mask
= wi::shifted_mask (offset
, width
, true, reg_width
);
11352 wide_int mask2
= wi::shifted_mask (offset
, width
, false, reg_width
);
11353 x
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, reg
, immed_wide_int_const (mask
, mode
));
11355 y
= gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode
, SET_SRC (pat
), GEN_INT (offset
));
11358 z
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, y
, immed_wide_int_const (mask2
, mode
));
11359 w
= gen_rtx_IOR (mode
, x
, z
);
11360 SUBST (SET_DEST (pat
), reg
);
11361 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat
), w
);
11369 /* Like recog, but we receive the address of a pointer to a new pattern.
11370 We try to match the rtx that the pointer points to.
11371 If that fails, we may try to modify or replace the pattern,
11372 storing the replacement into the same pointer object.
11374 Modifications include deletion or addition of CLOBBERs. If the
11375 instruction will still not match, we change ZERO_EXTEND and ZERO_EXTRACT
11376 to the equivalent AND and perhaps LSHIFTRT patterns, and try with that
11377 (and undo if that fails).
11379 PNOTES is a pointer to a location where any REG_UNUSED notes added for
11380 the CLOBBERs are placed.
11382 The value is the final insn code from the pattern ultimately matched,
11386 recog_for_combine (rtx
*pnewpat
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx
*pnotes
)
11388 rtx pat
= *pnewpat
;
11389 int insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat
, insn
, pnotes
);
11390 if (insn_code_number
>= 0 || check_asm_operands (pat
))
11391 return insn_code_number
;
11393 void *marker
= get_undo_marker ();
11394 bool changed
= false;
11396 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
11397 changed
= change_zero_ext (pat
);
11398 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11401 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
11403 rtx set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
11404 if (GET_CODE (set
) == SET
)
11405 changed
|= change_zero_ext (set
);
11411 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat
, insn
, pnotes
);
11413 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
11414 undo_to_marker (marker
);
11417 return insn_code_number
;
11420 /* Like gen_lowpart_general but for use by combine. In combine it
11421 is not possible to create any new pseudoregs. However, it is
11422 safe to create invalid memory addresses, because combine will
11423 try to recognize them and all they will do is make the combine
11426 If for some reason this cannot do its job, an rtx
11427 (clobber (const_int 0)) is returned.
11428 An insn containing that will not be recognized. */
11431 gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode omode
, rtx x
)
11433 machine_mode imode
= GET_MODE (x
);
11434 unsigned int osize
= GET_MODE_SIZE (omode
);
11435 unsigned int isize
= GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
);
11438 if (omode
== imode
)
11441 /* We can only support MODE being wider than a word if X is a
11442 constant integer or has a mode the same size. */
11443 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (omode
) > UNITS_PER_WORD
11444 && ! (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (x
) || isize
== osize
))
11447 /* X might be a paradoxical (subreg (mem)). In that case, gen_lowpart
11448 won't know what to do. So we will strip off the SUBREG here and
11449 process normally. */
11450 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
11452 x
= SUBREG_REG (x
);
11454 /* For use in case we fall down into the address adjustments
11455 further below, we need to adjust the known mode and size of
11456 x; imode and isize, since we just adjusted x. */
11457 imode
= GET_MODE (x
);
11459 if (imode
== omode
)
11462 isize
= GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
);
11465 result
= gen_lowpart_common (omode
, x
);
11474 /* Refuse to work on a volatile memory ref or one with a mode-dependent
11476 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x
)
11477 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (x
, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
11480 /* If we want to refer to something bigger than the original memref,
11481 generate a paradoxical subreg instead. That will force a reload
11482 of the original memref X. */
11483 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (omode
, imode
))
11484 return gen_rtx_SUBREG (omode
, x
, 0);
11486 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11487 offset
= MAX (isize
, UNITS_PER_WORD
) - MAX (osize
, UNITS_PER_WORD
);
11489 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data is
11491 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11492 offset
-= MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD
, osize
) - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD
, isize
);
11494 return adjust_address_nv (x
, omode
, offset
);
11497 /* If X is a comparison operator, rewrite it in a new mode. This
11498 probably won't match, but may allow further simplifications. */
11499 else if (COMPARISON_P (x
))
11500 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (x
), omode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
11502 /* If we couldn't simplify X any other way, just enclose it in a
11503 SUBREG. Normally, this SUBREG won't match, but some patterns may
11504 include an explicit SUBREG or we may simplify it further in combine. */
11509 if (imode
== VOIDmode
)
11511 imode
= int_mode_for_mode (omode
).require ();
11512 x
= gen_lowpart_common (imode
, x
);
11516 res
= lowpart_subreg (omode
, x
, imode
);
11522 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (omode
, const0_rtx
);
11525 /* Try to simplify a comparison between OP0 and a constant OP1,
11526 where CODE is the comparison code that will be tested, into a
11527 (CODE OP0 const0_rtx) form.
11529 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use.
11530 *POP1 may be updated. */
11532 static enum rtx_code
11533 simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code code
, machine_mode mode
,
11534 rtx op0
, rtx
*pop1
)
11536 unsigned int mode_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
11537 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op
= INTVAL (*pop1
);
11539 /* Get the constant we are comparing against and turn off all bits
11540 not on in our mode. */
11541 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
)
11542 const_op
= trunc_int_for_mode (const_op
, mode
);
11544 /* If we are comparing against a constant power of two and the value
11545 being compared can only have that single bit nonzero (e.g., it was
11546 `and'ed with that bit), we can replace this with a comparison
11549 && (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
|| code
== GE
|| code
== GEU
11550 || code
== LT
|| code
== LTU
)
11551 && mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11552 && pow2p_hwi (const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
11553 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, mode
)
11554 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) (const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))))
11556 code
= (code
== EQ
|| code
== GE
|| code
== GEU
? NE
: EQ
);
11560 /* Similarly, if we are comparing a value known to be either -1 or
11561 0 with -1, change it to the opposite comparison against zero. */
11563 && (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
|| code
== GT
|| code
== LE
11564 || code
== GEU
|| code
== LTU
)
11565 && num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, mode
) == mode_width
)
11567 code
= (code
== EQ
|| code
== LE
|| code
== GEU
? NE
: EQ
);
11571 /* Do some canonicalizations based on the comparison code. We prefer
11572 comparisons against zero and then prefer equality comparisons.
11573 If we can reduce the size of a constant, we will do that too. */
11577 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1) */
11582 /* ... fall through to LE case below. */
11583 gcc_fallthrough ();
11589 /* <= C is equivalent to < (C + 1); we do this for C < 0 */
11596 /* If we are doing a <= 0 comparison on a value known to have
11597 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with == 0. */
11598 else if (const_op
== 0
11599 && mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11600 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, mode
)
11601 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)))
11607 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11612 /* ... fall through to GT below. */
11613 gcc_fallthrough ();
11619 /* > C is equivalent to >= (C + 1); we do this for C < 0. */
11626 /* If we are doing a > 0 comparison on a value known to have
11627 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with != 0. */
11628 else if (const_op
== 0
11629 && mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11630 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, mode
)
11631 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)))
11637 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1). */
11642 /* ... fall through ... */
11644 /* (unsigned) < 0x80000000 is equivalent to >= 0. */
11645 else if (mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11646 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
11647 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1))
11657 /* unsigned <= 0 is equivalent to == 0 */
11660 /* (unsigned) <= 0x7fffffff is equivalent to >= 0. */
11661 else if (mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11662 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
11663 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)) - 1)
11671 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11676 /* ... fall through ... */
11679 /* (unsigned) >= 0x80000000 is equivalent to < 0. */
11680 else if (mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11681 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
11682 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1))
11692 /* unsigned > 0 is equivalent to != 0 */
11695 /* (unsigned) > 0x7fffffff is equivalent to < 0. */
11696 else if (mode_width
- 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11697 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
11698 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)) - 1)
11709 *pop1
= GEN_INT (const_op
);
11713 /* Simplify a comparison between *POP0 and *POP1 where CODE is the
11714 comparison code that will be tested.
11716 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use. *POP0 and
11717 *POP1 may be updated.
11719 It is possible that we might detect that a comparison is either always
11720 true or always false. However, we do not perform general constant
11721 folding in combine, so this knowledge isn't useful. Such tautologies
11722 should have been detected earlier. Hence we ignore all such cases. */
11724 static enum rtx_code
11725 simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code code
, rtx
*pop0
, rtx
*pop1
)
11731 scalar_int_mode mode
, inner_mode
;
11732 machine_mode tmode
;
11734 /* Try a few ways of applying the same transformation to both operands. */
11737 /* The test below this one won't handle SIGN_EXTENDs on these machines,
11738 so check specially. */
11739 if (!WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
11740 && code
!= GTU
&& code
!= GEU
&& code
!= LTU
&& code
!= LEU
11741 && GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFTRT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == ASHIFTRT
11742 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFT
11743 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1
, 0)) == ASHIFT
11744 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11745 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11746 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0)))
11747 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 0))))
11748 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
11749 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (op1
, 1)
11750 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)
11751 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 1)
11752 && (INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))
11753 == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0
))
11754 - (GET_MODE_PRECISION
11755 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0))))))))
11757 op0
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0));
11758 op1
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 0));
11761 /* If both operands are the same constant shift, see if we can ignore the
11762 shift. We can if the shift is a rotate or if the bits shifted out of
11763 this shift are known to be zero for both inputs and if the type of
11764 comparison is compatible with the shift. */
11765 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == GET_CODE (op1
)
11766 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
))
11767 && ((GET_CODE (op0
) == ROTATE
&& (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
))
11768 || ((GET_CODE (op0
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFT
)
11769 && (code
!= GT
&& code
!= LT
&& code
!= GE
&& code
!= LE
))
11770 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFTRT
11771 && (code
!= GTU
&& code
!= LTU
11772 && code
!= GEU
&& code
!= LEU
)))
11773 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
11774 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) >= 0
11775 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11776 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (op1
, 1))
11778 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
11779 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
11780 int shift_count
= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
11782 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFTRT
)
11783 mask
&= (mask
>> shift_count
) << shift_count
;
11784 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFT
)
11785 mask
= (mask
& (mask
<< shift_count
)) >> shift_count
;
11787 if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
) & ~mask
) == 0
11788 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op1
, 0), mode
) & ~mask
) == 0)
11789 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0), op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0);
11794 /* If both operands are AND's of a paradoxical SUBREG by constant, the
11795 SUBREGs are of the same mode, and, in both cases, the AND would
11796 be redundant if the comparison was done in the narrower mode,
11797 do the comparison in the narrower mode (e.g., we are AND'ing with 1
11798 and the operand's possibly nonzero bits are 0xffffff01; in that case
11799 if we only care about QImode, we don't need the AND). This case
11800 occurs if the output mode of an scc insn is not SImode and
11801 STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 (e.g., the 386).
11803 Similarly, check for a case where the AND's are ZERO_EXTEND
11804 operations from some narrower mode even though a SUBREG is not
11807 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == AND
11808 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
11809 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op1
, 1)))
11811 rtx inner_op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
11812 rtx inner_op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0);
11813 HOST_WIDE_INT c0
= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
11814 HOST_WIDE_INT c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (op1
, 1));
11817 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (inner_op0
)
11818 && GET_CODE (inner_op1
) == SUBREG
11819 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
))
11820 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
)))
11821 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
)))
11822 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
11823 && (0 == ((~c0
) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
),
11824 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
)))))
11825 && (0 == ((~c1
) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
),
11826 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
))))))
11828 op0
= SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
);
11829 op1
= SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
);
11831 /* The resulting comparison is always unsigned since we masked
11832 off the original sign bit. */
11833 code
= unsigned_condition (code
);
11839 FOR_EACH_MODE_UNTIL (tmode
, GET_MODE (op0
))
11840 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) c0
== GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
))
11842 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode
, inner_op0
);
11843 op1
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode
, inner_op1
);
11844 code
= unsigned_condition (code
);
11853 /* If both operands are NOT, we can strip off the outer operation
11854 and adjust the comparison code for swapped operands; similarly for
11855 NEG, except that this must be an equality comparison. */
11856 else if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == NOT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == NOT
)
11857 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == NEG
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == NEG
11858 && (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
)))
11859 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0), op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0), code
= swap_condition (code
);
11865 /* If the first operand is a constant, swap the operands and adjust the
11866 comparison code appropriately, but don't do this if the second operand
11867 is already a constant integer. */
11868 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0
, op1
))
11870 std::swap (op0
, op1
);
11871 code
= swap_condition (code
);
11874 /* We now enter a loop during which we will try to simplify the comparison.
11875 For the most part, we only are concerned with comparisons with zero,
11876 but some things may really be comparisons with zero but not start
11877 out looking that way. */
11879 while (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
11881 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
11882 unsigned int mode_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
11883 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
11884 int equality_comparison_p
;
11885 int sign_bit_comparison_p
;
11886 int unsigned_comparison_p
;
11887 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op
;
11889 /* We only want to handle integral modes. This catches VOIDmode,
11890 CCmode, and the floating-point modes. An exception is that we
11891 can handle VOIDmode if OP0 is a COMPARE or a comparison
11894 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_INT
11895 && ! (mode
== VOIDmode
11896 && (GET_CODE (op0
) == COMPARE
|| COMPARISON_P (op0
))))
11899 /* Try to simplify the compare to constant, possibly changing the
11900 comparison op, and/or changing op1 to zero. */
11901 code
= simplify_compare_const (code
, mode
, op0
, &op1
);
11902 const_op
= INTVAL (op1
);
11904 /* Compute some predicates to simplify code below. */
11906 equality_comparison_p
= (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
);
11907 sign_bit_comparison_p
= ((code
== LT
|| code
== GE
) && const_op
== 0);
11908 unsigned_comparison_p
= (code
== LTU
|| code
== LEU
|| code
== GTU
11911 /* If this is a sign bit comparison and we can do arithmetic in
11912 MODE, say that we will only be needing the sign bit of OP0. */
11913 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
11914 op0
= force_to_mode (op0
, mode
,
11916 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1),
11919 /* Now try cases based on the opcode of OP0. If none of the cases
11920 does a "continue", we exit this loop immediately after the
11923 switch (GET_CODE (op0
))
11926 /* If we are extracting a single bit from a variable position in
11927 a constant that has only a single bit set and are comparing it
11928 with zero, we can convert this into an equality comparison
11929 between the position and the location of the single bit. */
11930 /* Except we can't if SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED is set, since we might
11931 have already reduced the shift count modulo the word size. */
11932 if (!SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
11933 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 0))
11934 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == const1_rtx
11935 && equality_comparison_p
&& const_op
== 0
11936 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 0)))) >= 0)
11938 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11939 i
= BITS_PER_WORD
- 1 - i
;
11941 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 2);
11945 /* Result is nonzero iff shift count is equal to I. */
11946 code
= reverse_condition (code
);
11953 tem
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
11962 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NOT of the constant. */
11963 if (equality_comparison_p
11964 && (tem
= simplify_unary_operation (NOT
, mode
, op1
, mode
)) != 0)
11966 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
11971 /* If just looking at the sign bit, reverse the sense of the
11973 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
)
11975 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
11976 code
= (code
== GE
? LT
: GE
);
11982 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NEG of the constant. */
11983 if (equality_comparison_p
11984 && (tem
= simplify_unary_operation (NEG
, mode
, op1
, mode
)) != 0)
11986 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
11991 /* The remaining cases only apply to comparisons with zero. */
11995 /* When X is ABS or is known positive,
11996 (neg X) is < 0 if and only if X != 0. */
11998 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
11999 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ABS
12000 || (mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12001 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
12002 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)))
12005 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12006 code
= (code
== LT
? NE
: EQ
);
12010 /* If we have NEG of something whose two high-order bits are the
12011 same, we know that "(-a) < 0" is equivalent to "a > 0". */
12012 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, mode
) >= 2)
12014 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12015 code
= swap_condition (code
);
12021 /* If we are testing equality and our count is a constant, we
12022 can perform the inverse operation on our RHS. */
12023 if (equality_comparison_p
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12024 && (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (ROTATERT
, mode
,
12025 op1
, XEXP (op0
, 1))) != 0)
12027 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12032 /* If we are doing a < 0 or >= 0 comparison, it means we are testing
12033 a particular bit. Convert it to an AND of a constant of that
12034 bit. This will be converted into a ZERO_EXTRACT. */
12035 if (const_op
== 0 && sign_bit_comparison_p
12036 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12037 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12039 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
12042 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)))));
12043 code
= (code
== LT
? NE
: EQ
);
12047 /* Fall through. */
12050 /* ABS is ignorable inside an equality comparison with zero. */
12051 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
)
12053 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12059 /* Can simplify (compare (zero/sign_extend FOO) CONST) to
12060 (compare FOO CONST) if CONST fits in FOO's mode and we
12061 are either testing inequality or have an unsigned
12062 comparison with ZERO_EXTEND or a signed comparison with
12063 SIGN_EXTEND. But don't do it if we don't have a compare
12064 insn of the given mode, since we'd have to revert it
12065 later on, and then we wouldn't know whether to sign- or
12067 mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0));
12068 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
12069 && ! unsigned_comparison_p
12070 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
12071 && trunc_int_for_mode (const_op
, mode
) == const_op
12072 && have_insn_for (COMPARE
, mode
))
12074 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12080 /* Check for the case where we are comparing A - C1 with C2, that is
12082 (subreg:MODE (plus (A) (-C1))) op (C2)
12084 with C1 a constant, and try to lift the SUBREG, i.e. to do the
12085 comparison in the wider mode. One of the following two conditions
12086 must be true in order for this to be valid:
12088 1. The mode extension results in the same bit pattern being added
12089 on both sides and the comparison is equality or unsigned. As
12090 C2 has been truncated to fit in MODE, the pattern can only be
12093 2. The mode extension results in the sign bit being copied on
12096 The difficulty here is that we have predicates for A but not for
12097 (A - C1) so we need to check that C1 is within proper bounds so
12098 as to perturbate A as little as possible. */
12100 if (mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12101 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0
)
12102 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
))) > mode_width
12103 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)) == PLUS
12104 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0
), 1)))
12106 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
));
12107 rtx a
= XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0
), 0);
12108 HOST_WIDE_INT c1
= -INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0
), 1));
12111 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) c1
12112 < HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)
12113 && (equality_comparison_p
|| unsigned_comparison_p
)
12114 /* (A - C1) zero-extends if it is positive and sign-extends
12115 if it is negative, C2 both zero- and sign-extends. */
12116 && ((0 == (nonzero_bits (a
, inner_mode
)
12117 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12119 /* (A - C1) sign-extends if it is positive and 1-extends
12120 if it is negative, C2 both sign- and 1-extends. */
12121 || (num_sign_bit_copies (a
, inner_mode
)
12122 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
)
12125 || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) c1
12126 < HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 2)
12127 /* (A - C1) always sign-extends, like C2. */
12128 && num_sign_bit_copies (a
, inner_mode
)
12129 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
)
12130 - (mode_width
- 1))))
12132 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
);
12137 /* If the inner mode is narrower and we are extracting the low part,
12138 we can treat the SUBREG as if it were a ZERO_EXTEND. */
12139 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0
))
12141 else if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0
)
12142 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
12143 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)), &inner_mode
)
12144 && (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
12145 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12146 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (op0
)
12147 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0
), inner_mode
)
12148 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0
))) == 0)
12150 /* Remove outer subregs that don't do anything. */
12151 tem
= gen_lowpart (inner_mode
, op1
);
12153 if ((nonzero_bits (tem
, inner_mode
)
12154 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0
))) == 0)
12156 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
);
12168 mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0));
12169 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
12170 && (unsigned_comparison_p
|| equality_comparison_p
)
12171 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
12172 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
<= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)
12174 && have_insn_for (COMPARE
, mode
))
12176 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12182 /* (eq (plus X A) B) -> (eq X (minus B A)). We can only do
12183 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
12185 if (equality_comparison_p
12186 && 0 != (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (MINUS
, mode
,
12187 op1
, XEXP (op0
, 1))))
12189 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12194 /* (plus (abs X) (const_int -1)) is < 0 if and only if X == 0. */
12195 if (const_op
== 0 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == constm1_rtx
12196 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ABS
&& sign_bit_comparison_p
)
12198 op0
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0);
12199 code
= (code
== LT
? EQ
: NE
);
12205 /* We used to optimize signed comparisons against zero, but that
12206 was incorrect. Unsigned comparisons against zero (GTU, LEU)
12207 arrive here as equality comparisons, or (GEU, LTU) are
12208 optimized away. No need to special-case them. */
12210 /* (eq (minus A B) C) -> (eq A (plus B C)) or
12211 (eq B (minus A C)), whichever simplifies. We can only do
12212 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
12214 if (equality_comparison_p
12215 && 0 != (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (PLUS
, mode
,
12216 XEXP (op0
, 1), op1
)))
12218 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12223 if (equality_comparison_p
12224 && 0 != (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (MINUS
, mode
,
12225 XEXP (op0
, 0), op1
)))
12227 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12232 /* The sign bit of (minus (ashiftrt X C) X), where C is the number
12233 of bits in X minus 1, is one iff X > 0. */
12234 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
12235 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1))
12236 && UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)) == mode_width
- 1
12237 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12239 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12240 code
= (code
== GE
? LE
: GT
);
12246 /* (eq (xor A B) C) -> (eq A (xor B C)). This is a simplification
12247 if C is zero or B is a constant. */
12248 if (equality_comparison_p
12249 && 0 != (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (XOR
, mode
,
12250 XEXP (op0
, 1), op1
)))
12252 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12259 case UNEQ
: case LTGT
:
12260 case LT
: case LTU
: case UNLT
: case LE
: case LEU
: case UNLE
:
12261 case GT
: case GTU
: case UNGT
: case GE
: case GEU
: case UNGE
:
12262 case UNORDERED
: case ORDERED
:
12263 /* We can't do anything if OP0 is a condition code value, rather
12264 than an actual data value. */
12266 || CC0_P (XEXP (op0
, 0))
12267 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0))) == MODE_CC
)
12270 /* Get the two operands being compared. */
12271 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == COMPARE
)
12272 tem
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), tem1
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12274 tem
= XEXP (op0
, 0), tem1
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12276 /* Check for the cases where we simply want the result of the
12277 earlier test or the opposite of that result. */
12278 if (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
12279 || (val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (op0
), STORE_FLAG_VALUE
)
12280 && (code
== LT
|| code
== GE
)))
12282 enum rtx_code new_code
;
12283 if (code
== LT
|| code
== NE
)
12284 new_code
= GET_CODE (op0
);
12286 new_code
= reversed_comparison_code (op0
, NULL
);
12288 if (new_code
!= UNKNOWN
)
12299 /* The sign bit of (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) is nonzero
12301 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == PLUS
12302 && XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
12303 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12305 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12306 code
= (code
== GE
? GT
: LE
);
12312 /* Convert (and (xshift 1 X) Y) to (and (lshiftrt Y X) 1). This
12313 will be converted to a ZERO_EXTRACT later. */
12314 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12315 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFT
12316 && XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
)
12318 op0
= gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode
, XEXP (op0
, 1),
12319 XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1));
12320 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, op0
, 1);
12324 /* If we are comparing (and (lshiftrt X C1) C2) for equality with
12325 zero and X is a comparison and C1 and C2 describe only bits set
12326 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE, we can compare with X. */
12327 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12328 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12329 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12330 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
12331 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1))
12332 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)) >= 0
12333 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12335 mask
= ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12336 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)));
12337 if ((~STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& mask
) == 0
12338 && (COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0))
12339 || ((tem
= get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0))) != 0
12340 && COMPARISON_P (tem
))))
12342 op0
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0);
12347 /* If we are doing an equality comparison of an AND of a bit equal
12348 to the sign bit, replace this with a LT or GE comparison of
12349 the underlying value. */
12350 if (equality_comparison_p
12352 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12353 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12354 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12355 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)))
12357 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12358 code
= (code
== EQ
? GE
: LT
);
12362 /* If this AND operation is really a ZERO_EXTEND from a narrower
12363 mode, the constant fits within that mode, and this is either an
12364 equality or unsigned comparison, try to do this comparison in
12369 (ne:DI (and:DI (reg:DI 4) (const_int 0xffffffff)) (const_int 0))
12370 -> (ne:DI (reg:SI 4) (const_int 0))
12372 unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION allows it or the register is
12373 known to hold a value of the required mode the
12374 transformation is invalid. */
12375 if ((equality_comparison_p
|| unsigned_comparison_p
)
12376 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12377 && (i
= exact_log2 ((UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12378 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12380 && const_op
>> i
== 0
12381 && int_mode_for_size (i
, 1).exists (&tmode
))
12383 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode
, XEXP (op0
, 0));
12387 /* If this is (and:M1 (subreg:M1 X:M2 0) (const_int C1)) where C1
12388 fits in both M1 and M2 and the SUBREG is either paradoxical
12389 or represents the low part, permute the SUBREG and the AND
12391 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == SUBREG
12392 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12394 tmode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0
, 0)));
12395 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12396 /* Require an integral mode, to avoid creating something like
12398 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (tmode
)
12399 /* It is unsafe to commute the AND into the SUBREG if the
12400 SUBREG is paradoxical and WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS is
12401 not defined. As originally written the upper bits
12402 have a defined value due to the AND operation.
12403 However, if we commute the AND inside the SUBREG then
12404 they no longer have defined values and the meaning of
12405 the code has been changed.
12406 Also C1 should not change value in the smaller mode,
12407 see PR67028 (a positive C1 can become negative in the
12408 smaller mode, so that the AND does no longer mask the
12410 && ((WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
12411 && mode_width
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
12412 && mode_width
<= BITS_PER_WORD
12413 && trunc_int_for_mode (c1
, tmode
) == (HOST_WIDE_INT
) c1
)
12414 || (mode_width
<= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
12415 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (op0
, 0))))
12416 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12417 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode
)
12418 && (c1
& ~mask
) == 0
12419 && (c1
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)) == 0
12421 && c1
!= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
))
12423 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, tmode
,
12424 SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0
, 0)),
12425 gen_int_mode (c1
, tmode
));
12426 op0
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op0
);
12431 /* Convert (ne (and (not X) 1) 0) to (eq (and X 1) 0). */
12432 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12433 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == const1_rtx
12434 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == NOT
)
12436 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
,
12437 XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), 1);
12438 code
= (code
== NE
? EQ
: NE
);
12442 /* Convert (ne (and (lshiftrt (not X)) 1) 0) to
12443 (eq (and (lshiftrt X) 1) 0).
12444 Also handle the case where (not X) is expressed using xor. */
12445 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12446 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == const1_rtx
12447 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
)
12449 rtx shift_op
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0);
12450 rtx shift_count
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12452 if (GET_CODE (shift_op
) == NOT
12453 || (GET_CODE (shift_op
) == XOR
12454 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (shift_op
, 1))
12455 && CONST_INT_P (shift_count
)
12456 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
12457 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (shift_op
, 1))
12458 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12459 << INTVAL (shift_count
))))
12462 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode
, XEXP (shift_op
, 0), shift_count
);
12463 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, op0
, 1);
12464 code
= (code
== NE
? EQ
: NE
);
12471 /* If we have (compare (ashift FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12472 the high order N bits of FOO (N+1 if an inequality comparison)
12473 are known to be zero, we can do this by comparing FOO with C
12474 shifted right N bits so long as the low-order N bits of C are
12476 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12477 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) >= 0
12478 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) + ! equality_comparison_p
)
12479 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12480 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12481 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12483 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12484 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
12485 & ~(mask
>> (INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12486 + ! equality_comparison_p
))) == 0)
12488 /* We must perform a logical shift, not an arithmetic one,
12489 as we want the top N bits of C to be zero. */
12490 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT temp
= const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
12492 temp
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12493 op1
= gen_int_mode (temp
, mode
);
12494 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12498 /* If we are doing a sign bit comparison, it means we are testing
12499 a particular bit. Convert it to the appropriate AND. */
12500 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12501 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12503 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
12506 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)))));
12507 code
= (code
== LT
? NE
: EQ
);
12511 /* If this an equality comparison with zero and we are shifting
12512 the low bit to the sign bit, we can convert this to an AND of the
12514 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12515 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12516 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == mode_width
- 1)
12518 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12524 /* If this is an equality comparison with zero, we can do this
12525 as a logical shift, which might be much simpler. */
12526 if (equality_comparison_p
&& const_op
== 0
12527 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12529 op0
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, mode
,
12531 INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)));
12535 /* If OP0 is a sign extension and CODE is not an unsigned comparison,
12536 do the comparison in a narrower mode. */
12537 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12538 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12539 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFT
12540 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)
12541 && (int_mode_for_size (mode_width
- INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)), 1)
12543 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12544 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
) >> 1) + 1)
12545 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)))
12547 op0
= gen_lowpart (tmode
, XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0));
12551 /* Likewise if OP0 is a PLUS of a sign extension with a
12552 constant, which is usually represented with the PLUS
12553 between the shifts. */
12554 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12555 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12556 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == PLUS
12557 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1))
12558 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT
12559 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), 1)
12560 && (int_mode_for_size (mode_width
- INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)), 1)
12562 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12563 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
) >> 1) + 1)
12564 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)))
12566 rtx inner
= XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), 0);
12567 rtx add_const
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12568 rtx new_const
= simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (op0
),
12569 add_const
, XEXP (op0
, 1));
12571 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, tmode
,
12572 gen_lowpart (tmode
, inner
),
12579 /* If we have (compare (xshiftrt FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12580 the low order N bits of FOO are known to be zero, we can do this
12581 by comparing FOO with C shifted left N bits so long as no
12582 overflow occurs. Even if the low order N bits of FOO aren't known
12583 to be zero, if the comparison is >= or < we can use the same
12584 optimization and for > or <= by setting all the low
12585 order N bits in the comparison constant. */
12586 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12587 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) > 0
12588 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12589 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12590 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12591 + (GET_CODE (op0
) != LSHIFTRT
12592 ? ((GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) >> 1)
12595 <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))))
12597 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits
12598 = (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
12599 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12600 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))) - 1));
12601 if (low_bits
== 0 || !equality_comparison_p
)
12603 /* If the shift was logical, then we must make the condition
12605 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == LSHIFTRT
)
12606 code
= unsigned_condition (code
);
12608 const_op
= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12609 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12611 && (code
== GT
|| code
== GTU
12612 || code
== LE
|| code
== LEU
))
12614 |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1
<< INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))) - 1);
12615 op1
= GEN_INT (const_op
);
12616 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12621 /* If we are using this shift to extract just the sign bit, we
12622 can replace this with an LT or GE comparison. */
12624 && (equality_comparison_p
|| sign_bit_comparison_p
)
12625 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12626 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == mode_width
- 1)
12628 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12629 code
= (code
== NE
|| code
== GT
? LT
: GE
);
12641 /* Now make any compound operations involved in this comparison. Then,
12642 check for an outmost SUBREG on OP0 that is not doing anything or is
12643 paradoxical. The latter transformation must only be performed when
12644 it is known that the "extra" bits will be the same in op0 and op1 or
12645 that they don't matter. There are three cases to consider:
12647 1. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a register. In this case the bits are don't
12648 care bits and we can assume they have any convenient value. So
12649 making the transformation is safe.
12651 2. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is UNKNOWN.
12652 In this case the upper bits of op0 are undefined. We should not make
12653 the simplification in that case as we do not know the contents of
12656 3. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is not UNKNOWN.
12657 In that case we know those bits are zeros or ones. We must also be
12658 sure that they are the same as the upper bits of op1.
12660 We can never remove a SUBREG for a non-equality comparison because
12661 the sign bit is in a different place in the underlying object. */
12663 rtx_code op0_mco_code
= SET
;
12664 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
12665 op0_mco_code
= code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
? EQ
: COMPARE
;
12667 op0
= make_compound_operation (op0
, op0_mco_code
);
12668 op1
= make_compound_operation (op1
, SET
);
12670 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (op0
)
12671 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (op0
), &mode
)
12672 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)), &inner_mode
)
12673 && (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
))
12675 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0
))
12677 /* For paradoxical subregs, allow case 1 as above. Case 3 isn't
12679 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (op0
)))
12681 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
);
12682 op1
= gen_lowpart (inner_mode
, op1
);
12685 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12686 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0
), inner_mode
)
12687 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
12689 tem
= gen_lowpart (inner_mode
, op1
);
12691 if ((nonzero_bits (tem
, inner_mode
) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
12692 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
), op1
= tem
;
12696 /* We now do the opposite procedure: Some machines don't have compare
12697 insns in all modes. If OP0's mode is an integer mode smaller than a
12698 word and we can't do a compare in that mode, see if there is a larger
12699 mode for which we can do the compare. There are a number of cases in
12700 which we can use the wider mode. */
12702 if (is_int_mode (GET_MODE (op0
), &mode
)
12703 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < UNITS_PER_WORD
12704 && ! have_insn_for (COMPARE
, mode
))
12705 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode
, mode
)
12707 if (!HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode
))
12709 if (have_insn_for (COMPARE
, tmode
))
12713 /* If this is a test for negative, we can make an explicit
12714 test of the sign bit. Test this first so we can use
12715 a paradoxical subreg to extend OP0. */
12717 if (op1
== const0_rtx
&& (code
== LT
|| code
== GE
)
12718 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
12720 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sign
12721 = HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) - 1);
12722 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, tmode
,
12723 gen_lowpart (tmode
, op0
),
12724 gen_int_mode (sign
, tmode
));
12725 code
= (code
== LT
) ? NE
: EQ
;
12729 /* If the only nonzero bits in OP0 and OP1 are those in the
12730 narrower mode and this is an equality or unsigned comparison,
12731 we can use the wider mode. Similarly for sign-extended
12732 values, in which case it is true for all comparisons. */
12733 zero_extended
= ((code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
12734 || code
== GEU
|| code
== GTU
12735 || code
== LEU
|| code
== LTU
)
12736 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, tmode
)
12737 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0
12738 && ((CONST_INT_P (op1
)
12739 || (nonzero_bits (op1
, tmode
)
12740 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)));
12743 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, tmode
)
12744 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
12745 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))
12746 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op1
, tmode
)
12747 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
12748 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))))
12750 /* If OP0 is an AND and we don't have an AND in MODE either,
12751 make a new AND in the proper mode. */
12752 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
12753 && !have_insn_for (AND
, mode
))
12754 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, tmode
,
12755 gen_lowpart (tmode
,
12757 gen_lowpart (tmode
,
12763 op0
= simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, tmode
,
12765 op1
= simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, tmode
,
12770 op0
= simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND
, tmode
,
12772 op1
= simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND
, tmode
,
12781 /* We may have changed the comparison operands. Re-canonicalize. */
12782 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0
, op1
))
12784 std::swap (op0
, op1
);
12785 code
= swap_condition (code
);
12788 /* If this machine only supports a subset of valid comparisons, see if we
12789 can convert an unsupported one into a supported one. */
12790 target_canonicalize_comparison (&code
, &op0
, &op1
, 0);
12798 /* Utility function for record_value_for_reg. Count number of
12803 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
12807 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12808 || GET_RTX_CLASS (code
) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
)
12810 rtx x0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
12811 rtx x1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
12814 return 1 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0
);
12816 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1
)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12817 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1
)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
)
12818 && (x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) || x0
== XEXP (x1
, 1)))
12819 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0
)
12820 + count_rtxs (x
== XEXP (x1
, 0)
12821 ? XEXP (x1
, 1) : XEXP (x1
, 0));
12823 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0
)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12824 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0
)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
)
12825 && (x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) || x1
== XEXP (x0
, 1)))
12826 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x1
)
12827 + count_rtxs (x
== XEXP (x0
, 0)
12828 ? XEXP (x0
, 1) : XEXP (x0
, 0));
12831 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
12832 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
12834 ret
+= count_rtxs (XEXP (x
, i
));
12835 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
12836 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
12837 ret
+= count_rtxs (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
12842 /* Utility function for following routine. Called when X is part of a value
12843 being stored into last_set_value. Sets last_set_table_tick
12844 for each register mentioned. Similar to mention_regs in cse.c */
12847 update_table_tick (rtx x
)
12849 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
12850 const char *fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
12855 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
12856 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (x
);
12859 for (r
= regno
; r
< endregno
; r
++)
12861 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[r
];
12862 rsp
->last_set_table_tick
= label_tick
;
12868 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
12871 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
12872 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
12874 if (i
== 0 && ARITHMETIC_P (x
))
12876 /* Note that at this point x1 has already been
12878 rtx x0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
12879 rtx x1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
12881 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then there is no need to
12886 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then while
12887 processing x1, x0 has already been processed. Thus we
12888 are done with x. */
12889 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1
)
12890 && (x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) || x0
== XEXP (x1
, 1)))
12893 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then we
12894 still have to process the rest of x0. */
12895 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0
)
12896 && (x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) || x1
== XEXP (x0
, 1)))
12898 update_table_tick (XEXP (x0
, x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) ? 1 : 0));
12903 update_table_tick (XEXP (x
, i
));
12905 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
12906 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
12907 update_table_tick (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
12910 /* Record that REG is set to VALUE in insn INSN. If VALUE is zero, we
12911 are saying that the register is clobbered and we no longer know its
12912 value. If INSN is zero, don't update reg_stat[].last_set; this is
12913 only permitted with VALUE also zero and is used to invalidate the
12917 record_value_for_reg (rtx reg
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx value
)
12919 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (reg
);
12920 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (reg
);
12922 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
12924 /* If VALUE contains REG and we have a previous value for REG, substitute
12925 the previous value. */
12926 if (value
&& insn
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, value
))
12930 /* Set things up so get_last_value is allowed to see anything set up to
12932 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
12933 tem
= get_last_value (reg
);
12935 /* If TEM is simply a binary operation with two CLOBBERs as operands,
12936 it isn't going to be useful and will take a lot of time to process,
12937 so just use the CLOBBER. */
12941 if (ARITHMETIC_P (tem
)
12942 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem
, 0)) == CLOBBER
12943 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem
, 1)) == CLOBBER
)
12944 tem
= XEXP (tem
, 0);
12945 else if (count_occurrences (value
, reg
, 1) >= 2)
12947 /* If there are two or more occurrences of REG in VALUE,
12948 prevent the value from growing too much. */
12949 if (count_rtxs (tem
) > MAX_LAST_VALUE_RTL
)
12950 tem
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (tem
), const0_rtx
);
12953 value
= replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value
), reg
, tem
);
12957 /* For each register modified, show we don't know its value, that
12958 we don't know about its bitwise content, that its value has been
12959 updated, and that we don't know the location of the death of the
12961 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
12963 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
12966 rsp
->last_set
= insn
;
12968 rsp
->last_set_value
= 0;
12969 rsp
->last_set_mode
= VOIDmode
;
12970 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
= 0;
12971 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
= 0;
12972 rsp
->last_death
= 0;
12973 rsp
->truncated_to_mode
= VOIDmode
;
12976 /* Mark registers that are being referenced in this value. */
12978 update_table_tick (value
);
12980 /* Now update the status of each register being set.
12981 If someone is using this register in this block, set this register
12982 to invalid since we will get confused between the two lives in this
12983 basic block. This makes using this register always invalid. In cse, we
12984 scan the table to invalidate all entries using this register, but this
12985 is too much work for us. */
12987 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
12989 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
12990 rsp
->last_set_label
= label_tick
;
12992 || (value
&& rsp
->last_set_table_tick
>= label_tick_ebb_start
))
12993 rsp
->last_set_invalid
= 1;
12995 rsp
->last_set_invalid
= 0;
12998 /* The value being assigned might refer to X (like in "x++;"). In that
12999 case, we must replace it with (clobber (const_int 0)) to prevent
13001 rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13002 if (value
&& !get_last_value_validate (&value
, insn
, label_tick
, 0))
13004 value
= copy_rtx (value
);
13005 if (!get_last_value_validate (&value
, insn
, label_tick
, 1))
13009 /* For the main register being modified, update the value, the mode, the
13010 nonzero bits, and the number of sign bit copies. */
13012 rsp
->last_set_value
= value
;
13016 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (reg
);
13017 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
13018 rsp
->last_set_mode
= mode
;
13019 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
13020 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
13021 mode
= nonzero_bits_mode
;
13022 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
= nonzero_bits (value
, mode
);
13023 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
13024 = num_sign_bit_copies (value
, GET_MODE (reg
));
13028 /* Called via note_stores from record_dead_and_set_regs to handle one
13029 SET or CLOBBER in an insn. DATA is the instruction in which the
13030 set is occurring. */
13033 record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx dest
, const_rtx setter
, void *data
)
13035 rtx_insn
*record_dead_insn
= (rtx_insn
*) data
;
13037 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
13038 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
13040 if (!record_dead_insn
)
13043 record_value_for_reg (dest
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
);
13049 /* If we are setting the whole register, we know its value. Otherwise
13050 show that we don't know the value. We can handle SUBREG in
13052 if (GET_CODE (setter
) == SET
&& dest
== SET_DEST (setter
))
13053 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
, SET_SRC (setter
));
13054 else if (GET_CODE (setter
) == SET
13055 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (setter
)) == SUBREG
13056 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (setter
)) == dest
13057 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
)) <= BITS_PER_WORD
13058 && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_DEST (setter
)))
13059 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
,
13060 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (dest
),
13061 SET_SRC (setter
)));
13063 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
, NULL_RTX
);
13065 else if (MEM_P (dest
)
13066 /* Ignore pushes, they clobber nothing. */
13067 && ! push_operand (dest
, GET_MODE (dest
)))
13068 mem_last_set
= DF_INSN_LUID (record_dead_insn
);
13071 /* Update the records of when each REG was most recently set or killed
13072 for the things done by INSN. This is the last thing done in processing
13073 INSN in the combiner loop.
13075 We update reg_stat[], in particular fields last_set, last_set_value,
13076 last_set_mode, last_set_nonzero_bits, last_set_sign_bit_copies,
13077 last_death, and also the similar information mem_last_set (which insn
13078 most recently modified memory) and last_call_luid (which insn was the
13079 most recent subroutine call). */
13082 record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn
*insn
)
13087 for (link
= REG_NOTES (insn
); link
; link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
13089 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_DEAD
13090 && REG_P (XEXP (link
, 0)))
13092 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (link
, 0));
13093 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (XEXP (link
, 0));
13095 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
13097 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13099 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
13100 rsp
->last_death
= insn
;
13103 else if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_INC
)
13104 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (link
, 0), insn
, NULL_RTX
);
13109 hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi
;
13110 EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call
, 0, i
, hrsi
)
13112 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13114 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
13115 rsp
->last_set_invalid
= 1;
13116 rsp
->last_set
= insn
;
13117 rsp
->last_set_value
= 0;
13118 rsp
->last_set_mode
= VOIDmode
;
13119 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
= 0;
13120 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
= 0;
13121 rsp
->last_death
= 0;
13122 rsp
->truncated_to_mode
= VOIDmode
;
13125 last_call_luid
= mem_last_set
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
13127 /* We can't combine into a call pattern. Remember, though, that
13128 the return value register is set at this LUID. We could
13129 still replace a register with the return value from the
13130 wrong subroutine call! */
13131 note_stores (PATTERN (insn
), record_dead_and_set_regs_1
, NULL_RTX
);
13134 note_stores (PATTERN (insn
), record_dead_and_set_regs_1
, insn
);
13137 /* If a SUBREG has the promoted bit set, it is in fact a property of the
13138 register present in the SUBREG, so for each such SUBREG go back and
13139 adjust nonzero and sign bit information of the registers that are
13140 known to have some zero/sign bits set.
13142 This is needed because when combine blows the SUBREGs away, the
13143 information on zero/sign bits is lost and further combines can be
13144 missed because of that. */
13147 record_promoted_value (rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx subreg
)
13149 struct insn_link
*links
;
13151 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (SUBREG_REG (subreg
));
13152 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (subreg
);
13154 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
13157 for (links
= LOG_LINKS (insn
); links
;)
13159 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13161 insn
= links
->insn
;
13162 set
= single_set (insn
);
13164 if (! set
|| !REG_P (SET_DEST (set
))
13165 || REGNO (SET_DEST (set
)) != regno
13166 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
)) != GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subreg
)))
13168 links
= links
->next
;
13172 rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13173 if (rsp
->last_set
== insn
)
13175 if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (subreg
))
13176 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
13179 if (REG_P (SET_SRC (set
)))
13181 regno
= REGNO (SET_SRC (set
));
13182 links
= LOG_LINKS (insn
);
13189 /* Check if X, a register, is known to contain a value already
13190 truncated to MODE. In this case we can use a subreg to refer to
13191 the truncated value even though in the generic case we would need
13192 an explicit truncation. */
13195 reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode mode
, const_rtx x
)
13197 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
13198 machine_mode truncated
= rsp
->truncated_to_mode
;
13201 || rsp
->truncation_label
< label_tick_ebb_start
)
13203 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated
) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
13205 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
, truncated
))
13210 /* If X is a hard reg or a subreg record the mode that the register is
13211 accessed in. For non-TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION targets we might be able
13212 to turn a truncate into a subreg using this information. Return true
13213 if traversing X is complete. */
13216 record_truncated_value (rtx x
)
13218 machine_mode truncated_mode
;
13219 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13221 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
13223 machine_mode original_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
));
13224 truncated_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
13226 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (original_mode
) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode
))
13229 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (truncated_mode
, original_mode
))
13232 x
= SUBREG_REG (x
);
13234 /* ??? For hard-regs we now record everything. We might be able to
13235 optimize this using last_set_mode. */
13236 else if (REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
13237 truncated_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
13241 rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
13242 if (rsp
->truncated_to_mode
== 0
13243 || rsp
->truncation_label
< label_tick_ebb_start
13244 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode
)
13245 < GET_MODE_SIZE (rsp
->truncated_to_mode
)))
13247 rsp
->truncated_to_mode
= truncated_mode
;
13248 rsp
->truncation_label
= label_tick
;
13254 /* Callback for note_uses. Find hardregs and subregs of pseudos and
13255 the modes they are used in. This can help truning TRUNCATEs into
13259 record_truncated_values (rtx
*loc
, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
13261 subrtx_var_iterator::array_type array
;
13262 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_VAR (iter
, array
, *loc
, NONCONST
)
13263 if (record_truncated_value (*iter
))
13264 iter
.skip_subrtxes ();
13267 /* Scan X for promoted SUBREGs. For each one found,
13268 note what it implies to the registers used in it. */
13271 check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx x
)
13273 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
13274 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x
)
13275 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
13276 record_promoted_value (insn
, x
);
13279 const char *format
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x
));
13282 for (i
= 0; i
< GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x
)); i
++)
13286 check_promoted_subreg (insn
, XEXP (x
, i
));
13290 if (XVEC (x
, i
) != 0)
13291 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13292 check_promoted_subreg (insn
, XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
13298 /* Verify that all the registers and memory references mentioned in *LOC are
13299 still valid. *LOC was part of a value set in INSN when label_tick was
13300 equal to TICK. Return 0 if some are not. If REPLACE is nonzero, replace
13301 the invalid references with (clobber (const_int 0)) and return 1. This
13302 replacement is useful because we often can get useful information about
13303 the form of a value (e.g., if it was produced by a shift that always
13304 produces -1 or 0) even though we don't know exactly what registers it
13305 was produced from. */
13308 get_last_value_validate (rtx
*loc
, rtx_insn
*insn
, int tick
, int replace
)
13311 const char *fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x
));
13312 int len
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x
));
13317 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
13318 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (x
);
13321 for (j
= regno
; j
< endregno
; j
++)
13323 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[j
];
13324 if (rsp
->last_set_invalid
13325 /* If this is a pseudo-register that was only set once and not
13326 live at the beginning of the function, it is always valid. */
13327 || (! (regno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13328 && regno
< reg_n_sets_max
13329 && REG_N_SETS (regno
) == 1
13330 && (!REGNO_REG_SET_P
13331 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
),
13333 && rsp
->last_set_label
> tick
))
13336 *loc
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x
), const0_rtx
);
13343 /* If this is a memory reference, make sure that there were no stores after
13344 it that might have clobbered the value. We don't have alias info, so we
13345 assume any store invalidates it. Moreover, we only have local UIDs, so
13346 we also assume that there were stores in the intervening basic blocks. */
13347 else if (MEM_P (x
) && !MEM_READONLY_P (x
)
13348 && (tick
!= label_tick
|| DF_INSN_LUID (insn
) <= mem_last_set
))
13351 *loc
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x
), const0_rtx
);
13355 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
13359 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
13360 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
13362 if (i
== 1 && ARITHMETIC_P (x
))
13364 /* Note that at this point x0 has already been checked
13365 and found valid. */
13366 rtx x0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
13367 rtx x1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
13369 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then x is also valid. */
13373 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then
13374 while checking x0, x1 has already been checked. Thus
13375 it is valid and so as x. */
13376 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0
)
13377 && (x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) || x1
== XEXP (x0
, 1)))
13380 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then x is
13381 valid iff the rest of x1 is valid. */
13382 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1
)
13383 && (x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) || x0
== XEXP (x1
, 1)))
13385 get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x1
,
13386 x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) ? 1 : 0),
13387 insn
, tick
, replace
);
13390 if (get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x
, i
), insn
, tick
,
13394 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
13395 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13396 if (get_last_value_validate (&XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
),
13397 insn
, tick
, replace
) == 0)
13401 /* If we haven't found a reason for it to be invalid, it is valid. */
13405 /* Get the last value assigned to X, if known. Some registers
13406 in the value may be replaced with (clobber (const_int 0)) if their value
13407 is known longer known reliably. */
13410 get_last_value (const_rtx x
)
13412 unsigned int regno
;
13414 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13416 /* If this is a non-paradoxical SUBREG, get the value of its operand and
13417 then convert it to the desired mode. If this is a paradoxical SUBREG,
13418 we cannot predict what values the "extra" bits might have. */
13419 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
13420 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
)
13421 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x
)
13422 && (value
= get_last_value (SUBREG_REG (x
))) != 0)
13423 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x
), value
);
13429 rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13430 value
= rsp
->last_set_value
;
13432 /* If we don't have a value, or if it isn't for this basic block and
13433 it's either a hard register, set more than once, or it's a live
13434 at the beginning of the function, return 0.
13436 Because if it's not live at the beginning of the function then the reg
13437 is always set before being used (is never used without being set).
13438 And, if it's set only once, and it's always set before use, then all
13439 uses must have the same last value, even if it's not from this basic
13443 || (rsp
->last_set_label
< label_tick_ebb_start
13444 && (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13445 || regno
>= reg_n_sets_max
13446 || REG_N_SETS (regno
) != 1
13448 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
), regno
))))
13451 /* If the value was set in a later insn than the ones we are processing,
13452 we can't use it even if the register was only set once. */
13453 if (rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
13454 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) >= subst_low_luid
)
13457 /* If fewer bits were set than what we are asked for now, we cannot use
13459 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (rsp
->last_set_mode
)
13460 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
)))
13463 /* If the value has all its registers valid, return it. */
13464 if (get_last_value_validate (&value
, rsp
->last_set
, rsp
->last_set_label
, 0))
13467 /* Otherwise, make a copy and replace any invalid register with
13468 (clobber (const_int 0)). If that fails for some reason, return 0. */
13470 value
= copy_rtx (value
);
13471 if (get_last_value_validate (&value
, rsp
->last_set
, rsp
->last_set_label
, 1))
13477 /* Return nonzero if expression X refers to a REG or to memory
13478 that is set in an instruction more recent than FROM_LUID. */
13481 use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx x
, int from_luid
)
13485 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
13489 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
13490 unsigned endreg
= END_REGNO (x
);
13492 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
13493 /* Don't allow uses of the stack pointer to be moved,
13494 because we don't know whether the move crosses a push insn. */
13495 if (regno
== STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
&& PUSH_ARGS
)
13498 for (; regno
< endreg
; regno
++)
13500 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13502 && rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
13503 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) > from_luid
)
13509 if (code
== MEM
&& mem_last_set
> from_luid
)
13512 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
13514 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
13519 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
13520 if (use_crosses_set_p (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), from_luid
))
13523 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e'
13524 && use_crosses_set_p (XEXP (x
, i
), from_luid
))
13530 /* Define three variables used for communication between the following
13533 static unsigned int reg_dead_regno
, reg_dead_endregno
;
13534 static int reg_dead_flag
;
13536 /* Function called via note_stores from reg_dead_at_p.
13538 If DEST is within [reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno), set
13539 reg_dead_flag to 1 if X is a CLOBBER and to -1 it is a SET. */
13542 reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx dest
, const_rtx x
, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
13544 unsigned int regno
, endregno
;
13549 regno
= REGNO (dest
);
13550 endregno
= END_REGNO (dest
);
13551 if (reg_dead_endregno
> regno
&& reg_dead_regno
< endregno
)
13552 reg_dead_flag
= (GET_CODE (x
) == CLOBBER
) ? 1 : -1;
13555 /* Return nonzero if REG is known to be dead at INSN.
13557 We scan backwards from INSN. If we hit a REG_DEAD note or a CLOBBER
13558 referencing REG, it is dead. If we hit a SET referencing REG, it is
13559 live. Otherwise, see if it is live or dead at the start of the basic
13560 block we are in. Hard regs marked as being live in NEWPAT_USED_REGS
13561 must be assumed to be always live. */
13564 reg_dead_at_p (rtx reg
, rtx_insn
*insn
)
13569 /* Set variables for reg_dead_at_p_1. */
13570 reg_dead_regno
= REGNO (reg
);
13571 reg_dead_endregno
= END_REGNO (reg
);
13575 /* Check that reg isn't mentioned in NEWPAT_USED_REGS. For fixed registers
13576 we allow the machine description to decide whether use-and-clobber
13577 patterns are OK. */
13578 if (reg_dead_regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
13580 for (i
= reg_dead_regno
; i
< reg_dead_endregno
; i
++)
13581 if (!fixed_regs
[i
] && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (newpat_used_regs
, i
))
13585 /* Scan backwards until we find a REG_DEAD note, SET, CLOBBER, or
13586 beginning of basic block. */
13587 block
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
);
13592 if (find_regno_note (insn
, REG_UNUSED
, reg_dead_regno
))
13595 note_stores (PATTERN (insn
), reg_dead_at_p_1
, NULL
);
13597 return reg_dead_flag
== 1 ? 1 : 0;
13599 if (find_regno_note (insn
, REG_DEAD
, reg_dead_regno
))
13603 if (insn
== BB_HEAD (block
))
13606 insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
);
13609 /* Look at live-in sets for the basic block that we were in. */
13610 for (i
= reg_dead_regno
; i
< reg_dead_endregno
; i
++)
13611 if (REGNO_REG_SET_P (df_get_live_in (block
), i
))
13617 /* Note hard registers in X that are used. */
13620 mark_used_regs_combine (rtx x
)
13622 RTX_CODE code
= GET_CODE (x
);
13623 unsigned int regno
;
13634 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC
:
13636 /* CC0 must die in the insn after it is set, so we don't need to take
13637 special note of it here. */
13642 /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any hard registers inside the
13643 address as used. */
13644 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
13645 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0));
13650 /* A hard reg in a wide mode may really be multiple registers.
13651 If so, mark all of them just like the first. */
13652 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
13654 /* None of this applies to the stack, frame or arg pointers. */
13655 if (regno
== STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
13656 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
13657 && regno
== HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
13658 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
!= ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
13659 && regno
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
&& fixed_regs
[regno
])
13660 || regno
== FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
13663 add_to_hard_reg_set (&newpat_used_regs
, GET_MODE (x
), regno
);
13669 /* If setting a MEM, or a SUBREG of a MEM, then note any hard regs in
13671 rtx testreg
= SET_DEST (x
);
13673 while (GET_CODE (testreg
) == SUBREG
13674 || GET_CODE (testreg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13675 || GET_CODE (testreg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
13676 testreg
= XEXP (testreg
, 0);
13678 if (MEM_P (testreg
))
13679 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (testreg
, 0));
13681 mark_used_regs_combine (SET_SRC (x
));
13689 /* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
13692 const char *fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
13694 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
13697 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (x
, i
));
13698 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
13702 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13703 mark_used_regs_combine (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
13709 /* Remove register number REGNO from the dead registers list of INSN.
13711 Return the note used to record the death, if there was one. */
13714 remove_death (unsigned int regno
, rtx_insn
*insn
)
13716 rtx note
= find_regno_note (insn
, REG_DEAD
, regno
);
13719 remove_note (insn
, note
);
13724 /* For each register (hardware or pseudo) used within expression X, if its
13725 death is in an instruction with luid between FROM_LUID (inclusive) and
13726 TO_INSN (exclusive), put a REG_DEAD note for that register in the
13727 list headed by PNOTES.
13729 That said, don't move registers killed by maybe_kill_insn.
13731 This is done when X is being merged by combination into TO_INSN. These
13732 notes will then be distributed as needed. */
13735 move_deaths (rtx x
, rtx maybe_kill_insn
, int from_luid
, rtx_insn
*to_insn
,
13740 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
13744 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
13745 rtx_insn
*where_dead
= reg_stat
[regno
].last_death
;
13747 /* Don't move the register if it gets killed in between from and to. */
13748 if (maybe_kill_insn
&& reg_set_p (x
, maybe_kill_insn
)
13749 && ! reg_referenced_p (x
, maybe_kill_insn
))
13753 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (where_dead
) == BLOCK_FOR_INSN (to_insn
)
13754 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead
) >= from_luid
13755 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead
) < DF_INSN_LUID (to_insn
))
13757 rtx note
= remove_death (regno
, where_dead
);
13759 /* It is possible for the call above to return 0. This can occur
13760 when last_death points to I2 or I1 that we combined with.
13761 In that case make a new note.
13763 We must also check for the case where X is a hard register
13764 and NOTE is a death note for a range of hard registers
13765 including X. In that case, we must put REG_DEAD notes for
13766 the remaining registers in place of NOTE. */
13768 if (note
!= 0 && regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13769 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0)))
13770 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
))))
13772 unsigned int deadregno
= REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
13773 unsigned int deadend
= END_REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
13774 unsigned int ourend
= END_REGNO (x
);
13777 for (i
= deadregno
; i
< deadend
; i
++)
13778 if (i
< regno
|| i
>= ourend
)
13779 add_reg_note (where_dead
, REG_DEAD
, regno_reg_rtx
[i
]);
13782 /* If we didn't find any note, or if we found a REG_DEAD note that
13783 covers only part of the given reg, and we have a multi-reg hard
13784 register, then to be safe we must check for REG_DEAD notes
13785 for each register other than the first. They could have
13786 their own REG_DEAD notes lying around. */
13787 else if ((note
== 0
13789 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0)))
13790 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
)))))
13791 && regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13792 && REG_NREGS (x
) > 1)
13794 unsigned int ourend
= END_REGNO (x
);
13795 unsigned int i
, offset
;
13799 offset
= hard_regno_nregs
[regno
][GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0))];
13803 for (i
= regno
+ offset
; i
< ourend
; i
++)
13804 move_deaths (regno_reg_rtx
[i
],
13805 maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, &oldnotes
);
13808 if (note
!= 0 && GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0)) == GET_MODE (x
))
13810 XEXP (note
, 1) = *pnotes
;
13814 *pnotes
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, x
, *pnotes
);
13820 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == SET
)
13822 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
13824 move_deaths (SET_SRC (x
), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, pnotes
);
13826 /* In the case of a ZERO_EXTRACT, a STRICT_LOW_PART, or a SUBREG
13827 that accesses one word of a multi-word item, some
13828 piece of everything register in the expression is used by
13829 this insn, so remove any old death. */
13830 /* ??? So why do we test for equality of the sizes? */
13832 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13833 || GET_CODE (dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
13834 || (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
13835 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest
))
13836 + UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
)
13837 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest
)))
13838 + UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
))))
13840 move_deaths (dest
, maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, pnotes
);
13844 /* If this is some other SUBREG, we know it replaces the entire
13845 value, so use that as the destination. */
13846 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
13847 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
13849 /* If this is a MEM, adjust deaths of anything used in the address.
13850 For a REG (the only other possibility), the entire value is
13851 being replaced so the old value is not used in this insn. */
13854 move_deaths (XEXP (dest
, 0), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
,
13859 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == CLOBBER
)
13862 len
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
);
13863 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
13865 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
13870 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
13871 move_deaths (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
,
13874 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e')
13875 move_deaths (XEXP (x
, i
), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, pnotes
);
13879 /* Return 1 if X is the target of a bit-field assignment in BODY, the
13880 pattern of an insn. X must be a REG. */
13883 reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx x
, rtx body
)
13887 if (GET_CODE (body
) == SET
)
13889 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (body
);
13891 unsigned int regno
, tregno
, endregno
, endtregno
;
13893 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
13894 target
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
13895 else if (GET_CODE (dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
13896 target
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest
, 0));
13900 if (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
)
13901 target
= SUBREG_REG (target
);
13903 if (!REG_P (target
))
13906 tregno
= REGNO (target
), regno
= REGNO (x
);
13907 if (tregno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|| regno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
13908 return target
== x
;
13910 endtregno
= end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (target
), tregno
);
13911 endregno
= end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (x
), regno
);
13913 return endregno
> tregno
&& regno
< endtregno
;
13916 else if (GET_CODE (body
) == PARALLEL
)
13917 for (i
= XVECLEN (body
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
13918 if (reg_bitfield_target_p (x
, XVECEXP (body
, 0, i
)))
13924 /* Given a chain of REG_NOTES originally from FROM_INSN, try to place them
13925 as appropriate. I3 and I2 are the insns resulting from the combination
13926 insns including FROM (I2 may be zero).
13928 ELIM_I2 and ELIM_I1 are either zero or registers that we know will
13929 not need REG_DEAD notes because they are being substituted for. This
13930 saves searching in the most common cases.
13932 Each note in the list is either ignored or placed on some insns, depending
13933 on the type of note. */
13936 distribute_notes (rtx notes
, rtx_insn
*from_insn
, rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx_insn
*i2
,
13937 rtx elim_i2
, rtx elim_i1
, rtx elim_i0
)
13939 rtx note
, next_note
;
13941 rtx_insn
*tem_insn
;
13943 for (note
= notes
; note
; note
= next_note
)
13945 rtx_insn
*place
= 0, *place2
= 0;
13947 next_note
= XEXP (note
, 1);
13948 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note
))
13952 /* Doesn't matter much where we put this, as long as it's somewhere.
13953 It is preferable to keep these notes on branches, which is most
13954 likely to be i3. */
13958 case REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO
:
13963 gcc_assert (i2
&& JUMP_P (i2
));
13968 case REG_EH_REGION
:
13969 /* These notes must remain with the call or trapping instruction. */
13972 else if (i2
&& CALL_P (i2
))
13976 gcc_assert (cfun
->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
);
13977 if (may_trap_p (i3
))
13979 else if (i2
&& may_trap_p (i2
))
13981 /* ??? Otherwise assume we've combined things such that we
13982 can now prove that the instructions can't trap. Drop the
13983 note in this case. */
13987 case REG_ARGS_SIZE
:
13988 /* ??? How to distribute between i3-i1. Assume i3 contains the
13989 entire adjustment. Assert i3 contains at least some adjust. */
13990 if (!noop_move_p (i3
))
13992 int old_size
, args_size
= INTVAL (XEXP (note
, 0));
13993 /* fixup_args_size_notes looks at REG_NORETURN note,
13994 so ensure the note is placed there first. */
13998 for (np
= &next_note
; *np
; np
= &XEXP (*np
, 1))
13999 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (*np
) == REG_NORETURN
)
14003 XEXP (n
, 1) = REG_NOTES (i3
);
14004 REG_NOTES (i3
) = n
;
14008 old_size
= fixup_args_size_notes (PREV_INSN (i3
), i3
, args_size
);
14009 /* emit_call_1 adds for !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
14010 REG_ARGS_SIZE note to all noreturn calls, allow that here. */
14011 gcc_assert (old_size
!= args_size
14013 && !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
14014 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_NORETURN
, NULL_RTX
)));
14021 case REG_CALL_DECL
:
14022 /* These notes must remain with the call. It should not be
14023 possible for both I2 and I3 to be a call. */
14028 gcc_assert (i2
&& CALL_P (i2
));
14034 /* Any clobbers for i3 may still exist, and so we must process
14035 REG_UNUSED notes from that insn.
14037 Any clobbers from i2 or i1 can only exist if they were added by
14038 recog_for_combine. In that case, recog_for_combine created the
14039 necessary REG_UNUSED notes. Trying to keep any original
14040 REG_UNUSED notes from these insns can cause incorrect output
14041 if it is for the same register as the original i3 dest.
14042 In that case, we will notice that the register is set in i3,
14043 and then add a REG_UNUSED note for the destination of i3, which
14044 is wrong. However, it is possible to have REG_UNUSED notes from
14045 i2 or i1 for register which were both used and clobbered, so
14046 we keep notes from i2 or i1 if they will turn into REG_DEAD
14049 /* If this register is set or clobbered in I3, put the note there
14050 unless there is one already. */
14051 if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
)))
14053 if (from_insn
!= i3
)
14056 if (! (REG_P (XEXP (note
, 0))
14057 ? find_regno_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)))
14058 : find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, XEXP (note
, 0))))
14061 /* Otherwise, if this register is used by I3, then this register
14062 now dies here, so we must put a REG_DEAD note here unless there
14064 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
))
14065 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (note
, 0))
14066 ? find_regno_note (i3
, REG_DEAD
,
14067 REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)))
14068 : find_reg_note (i3
, REG_DEAD
, XEXP (note
, 0))))
14070 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note
, REG_DEAD
);
14078 /* These notes say something about results of an insn. We can
14079 only support them if they used to be on I3 in which case they
14080 remain on I3. Otherwise they are ignored.
14082 If the note refers to an expression that is not a constant, we
14083 must also ignore the note since we cannot tell whether the
14084 equivalence is still true. It might be possible to do
14085 slightly better than this (we only have a problem if I2DEST
14086 or I1DEST is present in the expression), but it doesn't
14087 seem worth the trouble. */
14089 if (from_insn
== i3
14090 && (XEXP (note
, 0) == 0 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note
, 0))))
14095 /* These notes say something about how a register is used. They must
14096 be present on any use of the register in I2 or I3. */
14097 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
)))
14100 if (i2
&& reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14109 case REG_LABEL_TARGET
:
14110 case REG_LABEL_OPERAND
:
14111 /* This can show up in several ways -- either directly in the
14112 pattern, or hidden off in the constant pool with (or without?)
14113 a REG_EQUAL note. */
14114 /* ??? Ignore the without-reg_equal-note problem for now. */
14115 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
))
14116 || ((tem_note
= find_reg_note (i3
, REG_EQUAL
, NULL_RTX
))
14117 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == LABEL_REF
14118 && label_ref_label (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == XEXP (note
, 0)))
14122 && (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
))
14123 || ((tem_note
= find_reg_note (i2
, REG_EQUAL
, NULL_RTX
))
14124 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == LABEL_REF
14125 && label_ref_label (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == XEXP (note
, 0))))
14133 /* For REG_LABEL_TARGET on a JUMP_P, we prefer to put the note
14134 as a JUMP_LABEL or decrement LABEL_NUSES if it's already
14136 if (place
&& JUMP_P (place
)
14137 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
14138 && (JUMP_LABEL (place
) == NULL
14139 || JUMP_LABEL (place
) == XEXP (note
, 0)))
14141 rtx label
= JUMP_LABEL (place
);
14144 JUMP_LABEL (place
) = XEXP (note
, 0);
14145 else if (LABEL_P (label
))
14146 LABEL_NUSES (label
)--;
14149 if (place2
&& JUMP_P (place2
)
14150 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
14151 && (JUMP_LABEL (place2
) == NULL
14152 || JUMP_LABEL (place2
) == XEXP (note
, 0)))
14154 rtx label
= JUMP_LABEL (place2
);
14157 JUMP_LABEL (place2
) = XEXP (note
, 0);
14158 else if (LABEL_P (label
))
14159 LABEL_NUSES (label
)--;
14165 /* This note says something about the value of a register prior
14166 to the execution of an insn. It is too much trouble to see
14167 if the note is still correct in all situations. It is better
14168 to simply delete it. */
14172 /* If we replaced the right hand side of FROM_INSN with a
14173 REG_EQUAL note, the original use of the dying register
14174 will not have been combined into I3 and I2. In such cases,
14175 FROM_INSN is guaranteed to be the first of the combined
14176 instructions, so we simply need to search back before
14177 FROM_INSN for the previous use or set of this register,
14178 then alter the notes there appropriately.
14180 If the register is used as an input in I3, it dies there.
14181 Similarly for I2, if it is nonzero and adjacent to I3.
14183 If the register is not used as an input in either I3 or I2
14184 and it is not one of the registers we were supposed to eliminate,
14185 there are two possibilities. We might have a non-adjacent I2
14186 or we might have somehow eliminated an additional register
14187 from a computation. For example, we might have had A & B where
14188 we discover that B will always be zero. In this case we will
14189 eliminate the reference to A.
14191 In both cases, we must search to see if we can find a previous
14192 use of A and put the death note there. */
14195 && from_insn
== i2mod
14196 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), i2mod_new_rhs
))
14197 tem_insn
= from_insn
;
14201 && CALL_P (from_insn
)
14202 && find_reg_fusage (from_insn
, USE
, XEXP (note
, 0)))
14204 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
)))
14206 else if (i2
!= 0 && next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
14207 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14209 else if ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), elim_i2
)
14211 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0),
14213 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), elim_i1
)
14214 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), elim_i0
))
14217 /* If the new I2 sets the same register that is marked dead
14218 in the note, we do not know where to put the note.
14220 if (i2
!= 0 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14226 basic_block bb
= this_basic_block
;
14228 for (tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (tem_insn
); place
== 0; tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (tem_insn
))
14230 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn
))
14232 if (tem_insn
== BB_HEAD (bb
))
14237 /* If the register is being set at TEM_INSN, see if that is all
14238 TEM_INSN is doing. If so, delete TEM_INSN. Otherwise, make this
14239 into a REG_UNUSED note instead. Don't delete sets to
14240 global register vars. */
14241 if ((REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
14242 || !global_regs
[REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0))])
14243 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn
)))
14245 rtx set
= single_set (tem_insn
);
14246 rtx inner_dest
= 0;
14247 rtx_insn
*cc0_setter
= NULL
;
14250 for (inner_dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
14251 (GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14252 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == SUBREG
14253 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
);
14254 inner_dest
= XEXP (inner_dest
, 0))
14257 /* Verify that it was the set, and not a clobber that
14258 modified the register.
14260 CC0 targets must be careful to maintain setter/user
14261 pairs. If we cannot delete the setter due to side
14262 effects, mark the user with an UNUSED note instead
14265 if (set
!= 0 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set
))
14266 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), inner_dest
)
14268 || (! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx
, SET_SRC (set
))
14269 || ((cc0_setter
= prev_cc0_setter (tem_insn
)) != NULL
14270 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (cc0_setter
)) > 0))))
14272 /* Move the notes and links of TEM_INSN elsewhere.
14273 This might delete other dead insns recursively.
14274 First set the pattern to something that won't use
14276 rtx old_notes
= REG_NOTES (tem_insn
);
14278 PATTERN (tem_insn
) = pc_rtx
;
14279 REG_NOTES (tem_insn
) = NULL
;
14281 distribute_notes (old_notes
, tem_insn
, tem_insn
, NULL
,
14282 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
14283 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (tem_insn
));
14285 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14286 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
14287 if (rsp
->last_set
== tem_insn
)
14288 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (note
, 0), NULL
, NULL_RTX
);
14290 SET_INSN_DELETED (tem_insn
);
14291 if (tem_insn
== i2
)
14294 /* Delete the setter too. */
14297 PATTERN (cc0_setter
) = pc_rtx
;
14298 old_notes
= REG_NOTES (cc0_setter
);
14299 REG_NOTES (cc0_setter
) = NULL
;
14301 distribute_notes (old_notes
, cc0_setter
,
14303 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
14304 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (cc0_setter
));
14306 SET_INSN_DELETED (cc0_setter
);
14307 if (cc0_setter
== i2
)
14313 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note
, REG_UNUSED
);
14315 /* If there isn't already a REG_UNUSED note, put one
14316 here. Do not place a REG_DEAD note, even if
14317 the register is also used here; that would not
14318 match the algorithm used in lifetime analysis
14319 and can cause the consistency check in the
14320 scheduler to fail. */
14321 if (! find_regno_note (tem_insn
, REG_UNUSED
,
14322 REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0))))
14327 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn
))
14328 || (CALL_P (tem_insn
)
14329 && find_reg_fusage (tem_insn
, USE
, XEXP (note
, 0))))
14333 /* If we are doing a 3->2 combination, and we have a
14334 register which formerly died in i3 and was not used
14335 by i2, which now no longer dies in i3 and is used in
14336 i2 but does not die in i2, and place is between i2
14337 and i3, then we may need to move a link from place to
14339 if (i2
&& DF_INSN_LUID (place
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
)
14341 && DF_INSN_LUID (from_insn
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
)
14342 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14344 struct insn_link
*links
= LOG_LINKS (place
);
14345 LOG_LINKS (place
) = NULL
;
14346 distribute_links (links
);
14351 if (tem_insn
== BB_HEAD (bb
))
14357 /* If the register is set or already dead at PLACE, we needn't do
14358 anything with this note if it is still a REG_DEAD note.
14359 We check here if it is set at all, not if is it totally replaced,
14360 which is what `dead_or_set_p' checks, so also check for it being
14363 if (place
&& REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_DEAD
)
14365 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14366 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
14368 if (dead_or_set_p (place
, XEXP (note
, 0))
14369 || reg_bitfield_target_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (place
)))
14371 /* Unless the register previously died in PLACE, clear
14372 last_death. [I no longer understand why this is
14374 if (rsp
->last_death
!= place
)
14375 rsp
->last_death
= 0;
14379 rsp
->last_death
= place
;
14381 /* If this is a death note for a hard reg that is occupying
14382 multiple registers, ensure that we are still using all
14383 parts of the object. If we find a piece of the object
14384 that is unused, we must arrange for an appropriate REG_DEAD
14385 note to be added for it. However, we can't just emit a USE
14386 and tag the note to it, since the register might actually
14387 be dead; so we recourse, and the recursive call then finds
14388 the previous insn that used this register. */
14390 if (place
&& REG_NREGS (XEXP (note
, 0)) > 1)
14392 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14393 bool all_used
= true;
14396 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
14397 if ((! refers_to_regno_p (i
, PATTERN (place
))
14398 && ! find_regno_fusage (place
, USE
, i
))
14399 || dead_or_set_regno_p (place
, i
))
14407 /* Put only REG_DEAD notes for pieces that are
14408 not already dead or set. */
14410 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
;
14411 i
+= hard_regno_nregs
[i
][reg_raw_mode
[i
]])
14413 rtx piece
= regno_reg_rtx
[i
];
14414 basic_block bb
= this_basic_block
;
14416 if (! dead_or_set_p (place
, piece
)
14417 && ! reg_bitfield_target_p (piece
,
14420 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, piece
,
14423 distribute_notes (new_note
, place
, place
,
14424 NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
14427 else if (! refers_to_regno_p (i
, PATTERN (place
))
14428 && ! find_regno_fusage (place
, USE
, i
))
14429 for (tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (place
); ;
14430 tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (tem_insn
))
14432 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn
))
14434 if (tem_insn
== BB_HEAD (bb
))
14438 if (dead_or_set_p (tem_insn
, piece
)
14439 || reg_bitfield_target_p (piece
,
14440 PATTERN (tem_insn
)))
14442 add_reg_note (tem_insn
, REG_UNUSED
, piece
);
14455 /* Any other notes should not be present at this point in the
14457 gcc_unreachable ();
14462 XEXP (note
, 1) = REG_NOTES (place
);
14463 REG_NOTES (place
) = note
;
14467 add_shallow_copy_of_reg_note (place2
, note
);
14471 /* Similarly to above, distribute the LOG_LINKS that used to be present on
14472 I3, I2, and I1 to new locations. This is also called to add a link
14473 pointing at I3 when I3's destination is changed. */
14476 distribute_links (struct insn_link
*links
)
14478 struct insn_link
*link
, *next_link
;
14480 for (link
= links
; link
; link
= next_link
)
14482 rtx_insn
*place
= 0;
14486 next_link
= link
->next
;
14488 /* If the insn that this link points to is a NOTE, ignore it. */
14489 if (NOTE_P (link
->insn
))
14493 rtx pat
= PATTERN (link
->insn
);
14494 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
14496 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
14499 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
14501 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
14502 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
14505 reg
= SET_DEST (set
);
14506 while (GET_CODE (reg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14507 || GET_CODE (reg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14508 || GET_CODE (reg
) == SUBREG
)
14509 reg
= XEXP (reg
, 0);
14514 if (REGNO (reg
) == link
->regno
)
14517 if (i
== XVECLEN (pat
, 0))
14523 reg
= SET_DEST (set
);
14525 while (GET_CODE (reg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14526 || GET_CODE (reg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14527 || GET_CODE (reg
) == SUBREG
)
14528 reg
= XEXP (reg
, 0);
14530 /* A LOG_LINK is defined as being placed on the first insn that uses
14531 a register and points to the insn that sets the register. Start
14532 searching at the next insn after the target of the link and stop
14533 when we reach a set of the register or the end of the basic block.
14535 Note that this correctly handles the link that used to point from
14536 I3 to I2. Also note that not much searching is typically done here
14537 since most links don't point very far away. */
14539 for (insn
= NEXT_INSN (link
->insn
);
14540 (insn
&& (this_basic_block
->next_bb
== EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)
14541 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
->next_bb
) != insn
));
14542 insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
14543 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
14545 else if (INSN_P (insn
) && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, PATTERN (insn
)))
14547 if (reg_referenced_p (reg
, PATTERN (insn
)))
14551 else if (CALL_P (insn
)
14552 && find_reg_fusage (insn
, USE
, reg
))
14557 else if (INSN_P (insn
) && reg_set_p (reg
, insn
))
14560 /* If we found a place to put the link, place it there unless there
14561 is already a link to the same insn as LINK at that point. */
14565 struct insn_link
*link2
;
14567 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link2
, place
)
14568 if (link2
->insn
== link
->insn
&& link2
->regno
== link
->regno
)
14573 link
->next
= LOG_LINKS (place
);
14574 LOG_LINKS (place
) = link
;
14576 /* Set added_links_insn to the earliest insn we added a
14578 if (added_links_insn
== 0
14579 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn
) > DF_INSN_LUID (place
))
14580 added_links_insn
= place
;
14586 /* Check for any register or memory mentioned in EQUIV that is not
14587 mentioned in EXPR. This is used to restrict EQUIV to "specializations"
14588 of EXPR where some registers may have been replaced by constants. */
14591 unmentioned_reg_p (rtx equiv
, rtx expr
)
14593 subrtx_iterator::array_type array
;
14594 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter
, array
, equiv
, NONCONST
)
14596 const_rtx x
= *iter
;
14597 if ((REG_P (x
) || MEM_P (x
))
14598 && !reg_mentioned_p (x
, expr
))
14604 DEBUG_FUNCTION
void
14605 dump_combine_stats (FILE *file
)
14609 ";; Combiner statistics: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n\n",
14610 combine_attempts
, combine_merges
, combine_extras
, combine_successes
);
14614 dump_combine_total_stats (FILE *file
)
14618 "\n;; Combiner totals: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n",
14619 total_attempts
, total_merges
, total_extras
, total_successes
);
14622 /* Try combining insns through substitution. */
14623 static unsigned int
14624 rest_of_handle_combine (void)
14626 int rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
;
14628 df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE
+ DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN
);
14629 df_note_add_problem ();
14632 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs ();
14633 reg_n_sets_max
= max_reg_num ();
14635 rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
14636 = combine_instructions (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
14638 /* Combining insns may have turned an indirect jump into a
14639 direct jump. Rebuild the JUMP_LABEL fields of jumping
14641 if (rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
)
14643 if (dom_info_available_p (CDI_DOMINATORS
))
14644 free_dominance_info (CDI_DOMINATORS
);
14645 timevar_push (TV_JUMP
);
14646 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
14648 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP
);
14651 regstat_free_n_sets_and_refs ();
14657 const pass_data pass_data_combine
=
14659 RTL_PASS
, /* type */
14660 "combine", /* name */
14661 OPTGROUP_NONE
, /* optinfo_flags */
14662 TV_COMBINE
, /* tv_id */
14663 PROP_cfglayout
, /* properties_required */
14664 0, /* properties_provided */
14665 0, /* properties_destroyed */
14666 0, /* todo_flags_start */
14667 TODO_df_finish
, /* todo_flags_finish */
14670 class pass_combine
: public rtl_opt_pass
14673 pass_combine (gcc::context
*ctxt
)
14674 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_combine
, ctxt
)
14677 /* opt_pass methods: */
14678 virtual bool gate (function
*) { return (optimize
> 0); }
14679 virtual unsigned int execute (function
*)
14681 return rest_of_handle_combine ();
14684 }; // class pass_combine
14686 } // anon namespace
14689 make_pass_combine (gcc::context
*ctxt
)
14691 return new pass_combine (ctxt
);